Gsk983m CNC System User Manual

GSK983M Milling CNC System
User Manual
(Volume I: Specifications and Programming)
Foreword
Dear user,
We are really grateful for your patronage and purchase of GSK983M milling CNC
system made by GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
This manual consists of two volumes. Volume I mainly describes the

specifications and programming of the system while Volume II operations, all
codes, parameters, I/O interfaces and other appendices.
This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel as

improper operations may cause accidents. Please carefully read this user
manual before usage.
All specifications and designs herein are subject to change without further
notice.
We are full of heartfelt gratitude to you for supporting us in the use of GSKs
products.
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL .................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Introduction to the Manual ............................................................................................................. 1
2. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................ 2
3. PROGRAMMING........................................................................................................................ 13
3.1 What Is Programming? ................................................................................................................. 13
3.2 Program Make-up .......................................................................................................................... 13
3.2.1 Block ........................................................................................................................................................14
3.2.2 Program word ........................................................................................................................................14
3.2.3 Input format ............................................................................................................................................16
3.2.4 Decimal programming .........................................................................................................................18
3.2.5 Maximum instruction value .................................................................................................................19
3.2.6 Program number ...................................................................................................................................20
3.2.7 Sequence number ................................................................................................................................21
3.2.8 To skip over an optional block............................................................................................................21
3.3 Dimension Word ............................................................................................................................ 23
3.3.1 Controllable axis ...................................................................................................................................23
3.3.2 Set unit ....................................................................................................................................................25
3.3.2.1 Minimum set unit and minimum travel unit..............................................................................25
3.3.2.2 Input unit10 ..................................................................................................................................26
3.3.3 Maximum travel .....................................................................................................................................26
3.3.4 Program origin and coordinate system ............................................................................................26
3.3.5 Coordinate system and origin of processing ..................................................................................27
3.3.6 Workpiece coordinate system............................................................................................................27
3.3.7 Reference (position) point ..................................................................................................................28
3.3.8 Absolute value instruction and incremental value instruction .....................................................29
3.4 Feed Function (F function) .......................................................................................................... 30
3.4.1 Rapid traverse (positioning) function ...............................................................................................30
3.4.2 Cutting feedrate ....................................................................................................................................30
3.4.3 To reduce feedrate to 1/10..................................................................................................................31
3.4.4 Synchronous feed (feed per rotation) ..............................................................................................31
3.4.5 F1 digit feed ...........................................................................................................................................32
3.4.6 Automatic acceleration and deceleration ........................................................................................33
3.4.7 Automatic angle adjustment ...............................................................................................................34
3.4.7.1 Automatic adjustment of inner angle ........................................................................................34
3.4.7.2 Switch of inner arc cutting feedrate ..........................................................................................37
3.5 Preparation Function (G function) .............................................................................................. 38
3.5.1 Selection of planes (G17, G18, G19) ...............................................................................................40
3.5.2 Positioning (G00) ..................................................................................................................................41
3
3.5.3 Unidirectional positioning (G60) ........................................................................................................42

3.5.4 Linear interpolation (G01) ...................................................................................................................42
3.5.5 Arc interpolation (G02, G03) ..............................................................................................................44
3.5.5.1 Arc interpolation without any additional axis ...........................................................................44
3.5.5.2 Arc interpolation with an additional axis ...................................................................................48
3.5.6 Sine-curve interpolation ......................................................................................................................48
3.5.7 Thread cutting (G33) ............................................................................................................................49
3.5.8 Automatic return to reference point (reference positions G27G30) ......................................51
3.5.8.1 Check of return to reference point (G27).................................................................................51
3.5.8.2 Automatic return to reference point (G28) ...............................................................................52
3.5.8.3 Automatic return from reference point (G29) ..........................................................................53
3.5.8.4 Return to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point (G30) .............................................................55
3.5.9 Dwell (G04) ............................................................................................................................................55
3.5.10 Accurate stop detection (G09) .........................................................................................................56
3.5.11 Accurate stop detecting mode (G61) and cutting mode (G64) ................................................56
3.5.12 Coordinate system setting (G92) ....................................................................................................56
3.5.13 Workpiece coordinate system (G54G59) .................................................................................57
3.5.14 To change workpiece coordinate system by program instruction ...........................................59
3.5.15 Automatic setting of a coordinate system .....................................................................................59
3.5.16 To switch between Inch and metric systems (G20, G21) ..........................................................59
3.5.17 Storage travel limit (G22, G23) .......................................................................................................60
3.5.18 Skip function (G31) ............................................................................................................................63
3.6 Compensation ................................................................................................................................ 65
3.6.1 Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49) ...................................................................................65
3.6.2 Tool offset (G45G48) .......................................................................................................................67
3.6.3 Tool radius compensation (G40G42) ...........................................................................................74
3.6.3.1 Tool radius compensation function............................................................................................74
3.6.3.2 Offset (D codes) ............................................................................................................................74
3.6.3.3 Offset vector ...................................................................................................................................75
3.6.3.4 Plane selection and vector..........................................................................................................75
3.6.3.5 G40, G41 and G42 .......................................................................................................................75
3.6.3.6 Details about tool radius compensation C...............................................................................77
3.6.4 D and H functions ............................................................................................................................... 109
3.6.5 External tool offset .............................................................................................................................. 110
3.6.6 To input offset through program (G10)........................................................................................... 110
3.6.7 Zooming function (G50, G51) .......................................................................................................... 110
3.7 Cycle Machining Function ......................................................................................................... 113
3.7.1 External moving function .................................................................................................................. 113
3.7.2 Fixed cycles (G73, G74, G76 and G80G89) ............................................................................ 114
3.7.2.1 Repeating a fixed cycle ............................................................................................................. 126
3.7.3 Specifying an origin and Point R in a fixed cycle (G98, G99)................................................... 132
3.8 Spindle Function (S function), Tool Function (T function), Miscellaneous
Function (M function) and Secondary Miscellaneous Function (B function) ......................... 133
3.8.1 Spindle function (S function) ............................................................................................................ 134
3.8.1.1 S 2 digits ....................................................................................................................................... 134
3
3.8.1.2 S 4 digits ....................................................................................................................................... 134

3.8.2 Constant surface speed control ...................................................................................................... 134
3.8.2.1 Instructed methods ..................................................................................................................... 135
3.8.2.2 Spindle speed .............................................................................................................................. 135
3.8.2.3 Restraint of maximum rotational speed of spindle .............................................................. 135
3.8.2.4 Rapid traverse (positioning) (G00) .......................................................................................... 136
3.8.3 Tool function (T function)................................................................................................................... 137
3.8.4 Miscellaneous function (M function) ............................................................................................... 137
3.8.5 Secondary miscellaneous function (B function) .......................................................................... 138
3.9 Subprogram ...................................................................................................................................... 138
3.9.1 Creation of a subprogram ................................................................................................................. 139
3.9.2 Execution of a subprogram .............................................................................................................. 139
3.9.3 Special methods of application ........................................................................................................ 140
3.10 User Macro ..................................................................................................................................... 142
3.10.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 142
3.10.2 Variables ............................................................................................................................................. 144
3.10.2.1 Indication of a variable ............................................................................................................ 144
3.10.2.2 Introduction of variables .......................................................................................................... 144
3.10.2.3 Undefined variables ................................................................................................................. 145
3.10.2.4 Display and setting of variable............................................................................................... 146
3.10.3 Types of variables ............................................................................................................................ 146
3.10.3.1 Local variables # 1# 33 ....................................................................................................... 147
3.10.3.2 Common variables #100 #149 , #500 #509 ............................................................. 147
3.10.3.3 System variables (for user Macro B) .................................................................................... 147
3.10.4 Operation instructions ..................................................................................................................... 160
3.10.4.1 Definition and substitution of variable .................................................................................. 160
3.10.4.2 Additive operation ..................................................................................................................... 160
3.10.4.3 Multiply operation (Macro B option) ..................................................................................... 160
3.10.4.4 Function (Macro B option) ...................................................................................................... 160
3.10.4.5 Hybrid operation........................................................................................................................ 161
3.10.4.6 Changing operational order using [ ] ................................................................................. 162
3.10.4.7 Accuracy ..................................................................................................................................... 162
3.10.4.8 Cautions regarding deterioration of precision .................................................................... 162
3.10.5 Control instruction ............................................................................................................................ 163
3.10.5.1 Branch (GOTO) ......................................................................................................................... 163
3.10.5.2 Repeat (how to select Macro B) ............................................................................................ 165
3.10.6 Creation and storage of user macro body .................................................................................. 169
3.10.6.1 Creation of user macro body.................................................................................................. 169
3.10.6.2 Storage of user macro body ................................................................................................... 170
3.10.6.3 Macro statement and NC statement .................................................................................... 170
3.10.7 Macro call instruction ....................................................................................................................... 173
3.10.7.1 Simple calling ............................................................................................................................ 173
3.10.7.2 Modal calling .............................................................................................................................. 180
3.10.7.3 Multiple calling ........................................................................................................................... 181
3.10.7.4 Multiple modal calling .............................................................................................................. 181
3.10.7.5 Calling a macro with G codes ................................................................................................ 182
3
3.10.7.6 Calling a subprogram with an M code ................................................................................. 183

3.10.7.7 Calling macros with M codes ................................................................................................. 184
3.10.7.8 Calling a subprogram with a T code ..................................................................................... 185
3.10.7.9 The position of the decimal point of an independent variable ........................................ 185
3.10.7.10 The difference between M98 (calling a subprogram) and G65 (calling a
macro body) ............................................................................................................................................... 186
3.10.7.11 The nesting and local variables of user macro ................................................................ 186
3.10.8 The relationship with other functions ........................................................................................... 187
3.10.9 Special codes and words used in user programs ..................................................................... 189
3.10.10 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 190
3.10.11 Descriptions for P/S alarm ........................................................................................................... 191
3.10.12 Examples of user macros ............................................................................................................ 191
3.10.12.1 Groove machining .................................................................................................................. 191
3.10.13 External output instructions ......................................................................................................... 193
3.10.13.1 OPEN instruction: POPEN ................................................................................................... 194
3.10.13.2 Data output instruction BPRNT DPRNT ........................................................................... 194
3.10.13.3 Close instruction PCLOS ...................................................................................................... 195
3.10.13.4 Necessary settings for using the function ......................................................................... 195
3.10.13.5 Cautions ................................................................................................................................... 195
3.10.14 Macro interruption function (Macro B) ....................................................................................... 196
3.11 Tool Life Management ............................................................................................................... 196
3.11.1 Setting of tool groups ....................................................................................................................... 196
3.11.2 Setting in machining processes .................................................................................................... 198
3.11.3 Performance of tool life administration ........................................................................................ 200
3.11.3.1 Tool life calculation.................................................................................................................... 200
3.11.3.2 Tool change signal and tool change reset signal ............................................................... 200
3.11.3.3 New tool selection signal......................................................................................................... 201
3.11.3.4 Tool skip signal .......................................................................................................................... 201
3.11.4 The display and input of tool data ................................................................................................. 201
3.11.4.1 The display and modification of tool group number .......................................................... 201
3.11.4.2 The display of tool life data during the execution of machine program ........................ 201
3.11.4.3 Presetting tool life counter ...................................................................................................... 202
3.11.5 Other cautions ................................................................................................................................... 203
3.12 The Indexing Function of Indexing Worktable ..................................................................... 203
3.12.1 Instructing methods ......................................................................................................................... 203
3.12.1.1 Input unit ..................................................................................................................................... 203
3.12.1.2 Absolute / incremental instruction ......................................................................................... 203
3.12.1.3 Concurrently controlled axes ................................................................................................. 204
3.12.2 Minimum travel unit: 0.001 degree/pulse .................................................................................... 204
3.12.3 Feedrate ............................................................................................................................................. 204
3.12.4 The clamping and release of indexing worktable ...................................................................... 204
3.12.5 Jog/step/handwheel ......................................................................................................................... 205
3.12.6 Other cautions ................................................................................................................................... 205
Operation Manual (Volume I: Specifications and Programming)
1. GENERAL
1.1 Overview
As a high-accuracy and high-performance closed-loop CNC system with firmware, GSK983M
milling CNC system (hereinafter called System) was newly developed and launched by GSK
CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. to satisfy the demands of NC market and intended for CNC milling
machine and processing center. By employing a high-speed microprocessor, a general large scale
integrated circuit (LSI), a semiconductor memory and up-to-date storage elements, the reliability
as well as performance-to-price ratio of its control circuit are greatly improved, thereby facilitating
the reliability, functions/ performance to price ratio to a large extent.
With a widely applicable advanced servo, GSK983M milling CNC system uses a high-duty pulse
encoder as its detecting element, thereby composing a closed-loop CNC system.
This operating manual describes all available functions of the system. However, a real unit may not
necessarily be provided with all the optional functions. Should the specifications of the control panel
and operating mode of the machine change, the instruction manual supplied with the machine by the
manufacturer shall be referred to.
1.2 Introduction to the Manual

The functions of a NC machine system are not only dependent on its NC, but also on its mechanical
part. That is to say, its heavy current circuit, servo system, NC and mechanical operation panel
jointly determines its performance. The manual only gives a general account from the angle of NC as
it is difficult to describe all the functions of an NC machine and programming and operating
procedures in detail. As for a specific NC machine, please refer to the instruction manual supplied
with the machine by the manufacturer. The contents of the machine instruction manual are more
important than those herein.
The performance of a NC machine system is jointly determined by its NC system, mechanical
structure, heavy current control and servo system including its mechanical operation panel. The
operating manual only describes GSK983M CNC system. To know the performance, programming
and operating instructions of the entire NC machine system further, please refer to the machine
instruction manual supplied by the manufacturer.
The operating manual describes all matters in detail as much as possible. However, the listing of all
matters is unnecessary and impossible as this will complicate the contents of the manual. Therefore,
the functions that are not described in this manual may be considered impractical.
The functions that are not described in this manual may be deemed unavailable so far.
Some items are specifically explained in Note sections. Therefore, if any explanation is not available
in the current Note section, it is advisable to skip over it, thoroughly read the manual and then return
to the part.
1
2. SPECIFICATIONS
Serial
No.
Designation
Descriptions
Controllable axes
Standard: 3 axes, namely axes X, Y and Z

(4 or 5 axes are also available upon customers request. The
address of the 4th axis can be selected from A, B, C, U, V or W.
That the 4th axis is linear or rotary may be set by parameters.
The address of the 5th axis can be designated as U, V, W, A, B
or C. It is possible to specify whether the 5th axis is linear or
rotary by parameters.)
Number of concurrently
controllable axes
Standard: 3, axis 3, link,

(The following configurations are also available upon customers
request: 4, axis 3, link; 4, axis 4, link; 5, axis 3, link; and 5, axis 4
and link.)
Incremental system
Min. set increment
0.001mm
0.0001 inch
0.001
Min entered increment
0.001mm
0.0001 inch
0.001
The minimal increment entered in accordance with parameter

setting metric system may be 0.01mm.
4
Bit detecting device
Pulse encoder
99999.999 mm
9999.9999 inch
99999.999
Max. instruction value
Input format
Decimal point
programming
It is possible to enter numerical values including a decimal point.

The addresses that may include a decimal point are X, Y, Z, A,
B, C, U, V, W, I, J, K, Q, R and F.
Rapid traverse
Axial speed can be up to 24,000m/min or 960 inch/min. In

addition, rapid traverse speed may be changed to FO2550 or
100% using rapid traverse override (optional).
Miscellaneous function
(Bit M2)
Feedrate can be set within the following ranges: 1 mm/min

15,000mm/min and 0.01inch/min 600.00 inch/min. It is
possible to set the upper speed limit of cutting feed by
parameters. A feedrate may be selected from 0 to 200% by
setting the override of feedrate to 10% as a step. The unit of
feedrate may be changed to 0.01 mm/min, 0.001 mm/min or
0.001 inch/min according to parameter setting.
Changeable
employed.
block,
character
and
address
formats
are
Automatic
acceleration/deceleration
Both manual rapid traverse and automatic rapid traverse are

performed in linear acceleration/deceleration mode so as to
reduce positioning time.
11
Absolute/incremental
value instruction
G codes may be used to select absolute or Incremental

programming.
G90: Absolute programming
G91: Incremental programming
12
Coordinate system
setting (G92)
When the instruction value for subsequent axes of G92 is used

to establish a coordinate system, the actual position of cutting
tool will become the instruction value for the coordinate system.
13
Positioning (G00)
All axes individually move to the end point rapidly and

decelerate until stop through instruction G00, and the machine
performs positioning (whether the machine reaches the
instructed position) detection by parameters setting.
14
Linear interpolation
(G01)
Linear interpolation may be conducted at the feedrate specified

by F codes using instruction G01.
Buffer register
When executing a block, the unit reads the next one in buffer
register in advance. In this way the intermittence of the NC
instruction operation caused by the time required for reading
may be avoided. While inputting data in buffer register, BUF will
appear on the lower right of LCD screen.
16
Dwell (G04)
The operation of the next block can be delayed before execution

using instruction G04. The delay time must be specified with
address P or X.
17
Accurate stop detection

(G09)
The block of instruction G09 decelerates and performs

positioning detection by the end of the block.
18
Accurate stop detecting

mode/cutting mode
(G61, G64)
If G61 is instructed, the travel instructions following G61

decelerate from doubtful points of all blocks and continue to
execute the next block when it is positioned.
If G64 is instructed, the travel instructions following G64 rather
than positioning instruction do not decelerate but execute the
following blocks. As a rule, they are applicable for cutting mode.
19
Miscellaneous function
(Bit M2)
The instructions of M2 with 2 digits following may be used to

control the ON/OFF signal on machine side. Only one M code
can be instructed in one block.
Dry run
In dry running mode, feedrate becomes Jog (JOG) feedrate.

The rapid traverse speed keeps constant and rapid traverse
override (option) is still valid in rapid traverse instruction (G00).
However, the dry running of instruction is available when it is set
to rapid traverse (positioning) according to parameters.
10
15
20

It is possible for all axes to individually disable the feed of an
instructed axis. If any instructed axis in interlocked during
traveling, all axes of the machine will decelerate until stop. Once
the interlock signal is cancelled, the machine will accelerate and
restart.
21
Interlock
22
Single block
23
To skip over an optional

block
The block preceded by a / (slash) code may be ignored by

turning on the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKTP switch on the machine
side.
External mirroring
The switch may be used to reverse the program instructions of

axes X and the 4th axis as well as the travel of MDI. It is possible
to set mirroring with the MDI/LCD panel or the switch on the
machine side.
25
Manual Absolute Value

ON/OFF
It is possible to determine whether to add the traveling amount

through the manual traveling tool to absolute coordinates by
switching the manual absolute value switch on the machine
side.
Manual Absolute Value switch ON: To add; OFF: Not to add.
26
To lock auxiliary function
BCD code signal and strobe signal of M, S, T and B are sent to

the machine side.
27
To lock the machine
The machine keeps still. However, position display is still valid

as the machine is moving and machine locking is also valid even
in the execution of a block.
28
To cancel the instruction

for axis Z
The function is only equivalent to Z-axis locking. It is to be used

when NC program is checked by drawing a picture with a pen.
29
To feedrate feed
The function is used to temporarily stop the feed of all axes that
can be restarted by pressing Cycle Start button. Before the
restart of feed, it is possible to insert manual operation in
manual mode.
30
To cancel override
The function is used to fix the cutting feedrate at 100%

depending on the signals from the machine side.
Emergent stop
By pressing the Emergent stop button all feed instructions stops

(interrupt immediately) and the machine stops running at the
same time.
External reset, reset

signal
The function is used to reset NC from the outside of NC. The

signal stops all feed instruction and the machine decelerates
until stop by reset. Additionally, the Reset button on MDI/LCD
outputs reset signals to the machine side during emergent stop
and external reset.
24
31
32
A block instruction can be executed each time.
Overtravel
The moving parts of the machine receives arriving signal when

they come to the end of travel. Then the movement of axis
decelerates until stop and overtravel warning is displayed at the
same time.
NC Ready signal
When the power supply is switched on, NC gives the signal in

controllable state. It stops sending signals to the machine side
once the power supply is cut off or the control unit overheats.
35
Servo Ready signal
When the servo system is ready, the signal is sent to the

machine side. For the axis to be braked, it is locked when the
signal has not been given off. LCD displays NO READY in the
absence of the signal.
36
NC warning signal
The signal is sent out when NC is in warning state.
33
34
37
Distribution Completed
signal
NC outputs the signal when the motion order ends up. If the
functions of M, S, T or B and motion instruction are active in a
block, the signal is given after the completion of the execution of
traveling instruction and the functions of M, S, T or B can be
executed.
38
Cycle Operation signal
NC gives the signal in cycle operation.
39
Cycle Operation Start

Indicator signal
NC sends out the signal at the start of cycle operation.
40
Feed Hold Indicator

signal
NC outputs the signal when it is in holding state through feed

hold.
Manual continuous feed
(1) JOG feed: For JOG feedrate, the rotary switch may be used
for 24-step switching. The ratio of 24-step is geometric
progression.
(2) Manual rapid traverse: Rapid traverse may also be achieved
by manual means. Rapid traverse override may be used for
the rapid traverse speed set by parameters. Rapid traverse
override is an optional function.
Manual continuous feed is available for 2 axes at one time.
42
Incremental feed
Since the following increments may exert positioning control,

manual positioning can be performed efficiently. Incremental
feed is available for 2 axes at one time (incremental feed
amount).
43
Sequence number
searching
It is possible to search the sequence numbers in the currently

selected program with the MDI/LCD panel.
44
Program number
searching
It is possible to search the program numbers of 4 digits following

O with the MDI/LCD panel.
41
45
46
47
48
49
Clearance compensation
It is this function that compensates the lost amount of movement

of the machine. The amount of compensation is set in the
minimum amount of movement within 0 ~ 255 by parameters.
Program key locking
The function disables the display, setting and editing of the

program with a program number of 90009899 by means of
key locking.
Environmental
conditions
(1) Ambient temperature

045 for operation and -2055 for storage and
shipment.
(2) Relative humidity
90%(without condensation), 95%(40)
(3) Vibration
Less than 0.5G for operation and 1G for storage and
shipment
(4) Ambient air
To install an NC in an environment with high density of dust,
machining fluid and organic solvent, contact the
manufacturer.
Self-diagnostics
(1) Servo system

a. To give an alarm when the error of the error register
goes beyond the setting in halted state.
b. To give an alarm when the value of the error register
goes beyond the maximum setting.
c. To give an alarm in case of malfunction of positioning
detection system.
d. To give an alarm when the drift voltage is excessive.
e. To give an alarm in case of malfunction of speed control
unit.
(2) NC
a. To give an alarm in case of malfunction of the memory.
b. To give an alarm in case of malfunction of ROM and
RAM.
c. To give an alarm in case of malfunction of the
microprocessor.
(3) Status display
a. To display the status of NC on LCD.
b. To display the status of I/O on LCD.
S function/T function
(BCD2 bit)
Once the instructions of 2 digits following S and T are instructed,

the code signal of BCD2 bit may be sent out while codes S and
T ad other codes are individually output. They are reserved until
the following S and T are instructed.
6
S4 Bit (binary 12-bit

output)
A/S4 Bit (analog output)
A
The binary 12-bit or analog voltage corresponding to the speed

of principal axis is output to the machine side. The analog
voltage is up to 10V, 2mA and the speed (r/min) of principal
axis is directly specified by S4 Bit. The speed of principal axis
may be regulated in the following range depending on the
contact signal on the machine side: 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110
and 120%.
51
S4 Bit (binary 12-bit

output)
A/S4 Bit (analog output)
B
When the speed (r/min) of principal axis is directly specified, the

voltage for the current speed of principal axis is output by the
presently selected gear numbers 1 to 4.The switching of gear is
performed in a heavy-current circuit, resulting that the signal of
GRA or GRB is input in NC side. As the judging message for
switching gears on the heavy-current side, NC outputs the
higher 2 bits or lower 2 bits of S4 bit in BCD codes.
52
Thread cutting
/synchronous feeding
A position coder is installed on the principal axis. It is possible to

perform thread cutting using the pulse synchronous speed of the
position coder.
Position coder
To achieve the feed that is in step with the rotation of the

principal axis, a device that may generate pulse voltage of which
frequency is proportional to the number of revolutions of the
principal axis and generates 1024 pulses in each rotation shall
be directly connected.
54
Constant surface speed

control
Generally surface speed is instructed with B codes. In this way

the principal axis accordingly changes when the position of the
tool changes so that its surface cutting speed is always equal to
the linear speed set by S codes.
55
Second auxiliary function

(B3 bit)
Address B is followed by three digits. Once it is instructed, a

BCD three-bit code signal will be sent out to position the index
table.
T-function (BCD4 bit)
Addresses S and T are followed by a 2-digit instruction. Once

they are instructed, the code signal of BCD2 bit will likely to be
sent out and other codes of the addresses S and T are
individually sent out and held until the next S and T are
instructed.
Code standards
ISO codes (ISO840) and EIA codes (EIA RS-244-A) can be

used for program code. The identification of ISO codes and EIA
codes may be performed automatically.
50
53
56
57
58
Rapid traverse override

The automatic or manual rapid traverse speed can be set in 4
levels, i.e. FO, 25, 50 and 100% and FO is likely to be set to a
specific speed by parameters.
59
Return to reference point

A
Return to reference point A consists the following procedures:

(1) Manual return to the reference point;
(2) Examination of the return to the reference point (G27);
(3) Automatic return to the reference point (G28).
60
Return to reference point

B
Besides the functions of returning to reference point A, the

return to reference point B also includes the return to the 2nd
reference point (G30).
61
Return to the 3rd and 4th

reference points
It is possible to set the 3rd and 4th reference points by setting

their distances from the 1st reference point and return to these
reference points.
Storage travel limits 1

and 2
For storage travel limit 1, the area beyond those set by

parameters are exclusion areas. For storage travel limit 2, the
inside or outside of the area specified by parameters or
programs are exclusion areas. The validity or invalidity of
storage travel limit 2 is set by G codes.
G22: Valid
G23: Invalid
63
Memory type pitch error

compensation
The function is designed to compensate the pitch error caused

by the mechanical wear of the feed screw so as to maximize
processing accuracy and mechanical life. Compensation data is
saved in memory, thereby omitting the compensation
mechanism such as the stop and the relevant setting
operations.
64
The selection of a
workpiece coordinate
system
It is possible to preset one of the 6 workpiece coordinate

systems using six G codes, i.e. G54G59 and subsequent
programming can be made in the selected coordinate system.
Tool offset (G45G48)
Tools can be offset using instructions G45G48. Tool offset

refers to the side-play mount corresponding to a move
instructions elongation or reduction of an instruction of D or H
codes in axial direction. D or H codes may instruct 132 and
the maximum offset shall be 999.999mm or 99.999 inches.
G45: To increase the set value;
G46: To reduce the set value;
G47: To increase the set value by twice;
G48: To reduce the set value by twice.
62
65
Automatic setting of a
coordinate system
To manually return to a reference point, parameters must be

preset to establish a coordinate system, namely automatic
execution is similar to the condition that the instruction G92 is
used at the reference point.
Tool length offset (G43,

G44, G49)
Tool length offset (tool length compensation) is possible in the

direction of the axis Z using instructions G43 and G44. The
offset number must be selected within 0132 using H codes.
The offset shall fall within 999.999mm or 99.999 inches.
Tool radius
compensation B, C
(G40G42)
Tool radius compensation is possible using instructions G40

G42. The offset number must be specified within 0132 using
D codes. The offset shall fall within 999.999mm or 99.999
inches. Cutter compensation B is unavailable for a tool of a
medial angle less than 90.
Cutter compensation 0 can be used for the tool of a medial
angle less than 90.
Tool length
measurement
Manually position the standard tool to the fixed point of the

machine tool. Then manually position the machine tool to be
measured to the same mechanical point. The length
compensation of the tool will be input as offset once z
INPUT
is pressed.
70
Tool life management

function
Divide the tools in the cutting tool room into several groups and
specify service life for each group of cutting tools. Accumulate
the tool processing time or processing number that serves as
the evaluation standard for tool life whenever a tool in the
groups is used. The next cutting tool in the predetermined
sequence is automatically selected in the same group when the
tool reaches its service life.
71
Additional offset memory

A
The numbers of tool offset and tool radius compensation may be

increased to 64.
72

B
The numbers of tool offset and tool radius compensation may be

increased to 99.
73

C
The number of cutter compensation is increased to 200.
66
67
68
69
74
F1- bit feed
Once the number of F followed by one digit of 1~9 is instructed,

the feedrate corresponding to the number will be set. The
instruction FO is a rapid traverse speed. The feedrate of the
currently selected number can be increased or reduced by
turning the manual pulse generator when the machine side
gives a speed-changing signal.
75
External moving function

(G80, G81)
Instruction G81 is used to output external movement signals

after the positioning of X and Y axes and G80 to cancel it.
76
Fixed cycle A (G80, G81,

G82, G84, G85, G86 and
G89)
It is possible to perform 6 fixed cycles including drilling cycle,

tapping cycle and boring cycle.
77
Fixed cycle B (G73,

G74, G76,
G80G89)
It is possible to perform 12 fixed cycles including gun drilling

cycle, finish boring cycle, tapping cycle and reverse-tapping
cycle.
78
Switch between Inch and

metric systems (G20,
G21)
Input in Inch or metric system can be selected by switching G

codes.
G20: Input in Inch system
G21: Input in metric system
79
Arc interpolation (G02,

G03)
Using G02 (or G03) may achieve any arc interpolation within
0360 with the feedrate of F code instruction.
G02: Clockwise (CW)
G03: Counterclockwise (CCW)
80
Sine-curve interpolation
When an axis in the arc plane does not move (the axis is
considered as an imaginary axis) in the spiral-curve
interpolation instruction, the other 2 axes may be used for
sine-curve interpolation.
81
The arc interpolation

using arc radius R for
programming
In arc interpolation, directly specifying radius with radius value R

rather than I, J and K simplifies programming. An arc over or
below 180 can be instructed.
82
External deceleration
The mechanical vibration at the end of travel can be minimized

and the range of effective travel maximized through the function.
External deceleration is not applicable for an additional axis.
83
External workpiece
number search A
The function is used to input any program number among 131

for NC from the outside such as machine side and to select
these programs from the memory of NC.
84
External data input
The function is used to transmit the following data from the

outside such as machine side:
(1) External workpiece number search C;
(2) External cutter compensation C;
(3) External warning message;
(4) External operation information.
85
Automatic acceleration/
deceleration of cutting
feed
Cutting feed and manual continuous feed can be set by

parameters to make power type acceleration/ deceleration in
8ms4000ms time constant.
10
Additional skipping over

selected blocks
9 switches for skipping over selected blocks can be set on

machine side by adding a digit (1~9) after the switching
instruction/ of a block. When a switch n for skipping over
selected blocks is enabled, the blocks with /n will be skipped
over.
87
Skip function (G31)
When G31 is followed by X, Y, Z, the 4th or 5th axis instruction as

same as G01, it is possible to make line interpolation. If skip
signal is input from the outside during the execution of the
instruction, the remaining part of the instruction stops executing
and the blocks that follow will be executed.
88
Program restart
When the sequence number to be restarted is specified, the

program will restarts from here.
89
Unidirectional positioning
Positioning can only be performed in one direction in order to

eliminate clearance and achieve accurate positioning.
90
Addition of the number of

storable programs
96 programs can be added to the standard programs to reach

191 programs in total.
91
Zoom
The tool path instructed in a program can be zoomed in a range

of 0.00199.999x.
92
Insertion of a manual
tray
The tool movement overlapping an automatic running instruction

can be done only with the pulses of the manual pulse generator
without processing interruption.
93
Automatic angle
adjustment
When cutting the inner side of an angle in tool radius

compensation mode, adjustment can be automatically added in
the set area for processing at low speed.
Manual feed at any

angle
The function is used to set the angle of the positive direction of

axis X on the dial gauge of the operation panel of the machine
and to make Jog feed in the set direction. In the XY plane, this
function is only valid for the increment of 5 spacing within 0
360 range.
95
Sequence number
comparison stop
Once the block with the same sequence number as the preset
one appears in the execution of a program, a single block will be
in stop status when the execution of the program ends. The
function is used to check a program.
96
Indication of running time
The NC automatic running time can be indicated on LCD in

seconds, minutes and hours.
Menu switch
The ON/OFF can be controlled by using the settings on

MDI/LCD rather than the switches on the operation panel on the
machine
86
94
97
11

98
User macros
A and B
99
Graphic display
100
Manual pulse generator

These are the intrinsic functions available for manufacturer and
user and types A and B are provided due to functional limits.
The tracks of cutting tools are traced out on LCD.
The manual pulse generator on the operation panel can be used
to perform Jog feed of the machine. The manual pulse
generator sends out 100 pulses each turn. The travel of each
pulse can be switched between 1x, 10x and 100x depending on
the signals on the machine side.
PLC MODELS A and B are available.
101
PLC
PLC MODEL-A
PLC MODEL-B
Quantity of input
points
192 points
192 points
Quantity of output
points
128 points
128 points
Program step
Up to 2,000
steps
Up to 5,000 steps
12
3. PROGRAMMING
3.1 What Is Programming?
NC processing machine operates by developed programs. To process a part on the NC machine,
the route and other processing conditions of cutting feed shall be included in the program. The
program is called part program.
The following diagram indicates the processes from preparation of detail drawing to NCs
execution of the processing program.
Detail drawing
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Processing plan
Part programming
NCs execution of processing program
Determine the NC processing range and select an NC machine to be used.

Determine the assembling method of the workblank on the machine and select a
necessary clamping device and a tool.
Determine the cutting sequence (process type, home point of the cutting tool, the cut
depths of rough cutting and finish cutting and route of cutting feed).
Select a cutting tool and a tool clamping device and determine the mounting position on
the machine.
Set cutting conditions (spindle rotating speed, feed speed and whether to use cooling
fluid, etc).
Part program is an NC instruction for controlling feed route and the auxiliary movement of a
machine written according to the rules for NC. The instructions are usually written in a program list.
This chapter will describe how to develop a part program.
3.2 Program Make-up

A program consists of main program and subprogram. As a rule, NC moves by the instructions of a
main program. When the main program gives an instruction to switch to a subprogram, NC moves
by the subprogram.
When there is an instruction to return to a main program in a subprogram, NC will return to the
main program and continue to move by the instructions of the main program.
NC memory can store 95 main programs and subprograms in total. When one of the main
programs is selected, NC machine can move by its instructions.
13
Main program
Subprogram
Instruction 1
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction 2
[Instruction to switch to a subprogram]
Instruction n
Instruction n+1
[Instruction to return to a main program]
Note: The number of programs that can be stored will be increased to 191 if the function
Addition of the number of storable programs (Optional) is selected.
Refer to Chapter 4: Operations for the storage method of program.
3.2.1 Block
A program is composed of a number of instructions. Each instruction unit in a program is called a
block. Blocks are distinguished from each other by end code. As described below, end-of-block
code is indicated with a ;.
For example:
XXXX;
XXXX;
XXXX;
Note 1: The maximum number of characters a block is not limited in.
Note 2: End-of-block code: CR for EIA codes and LF for ISO codes.
3.2.2 Program word

The elements composing a block are program words. The program word below consists of an
address and a subsequent figure. A + and a can also be added before the figure.
X - 1000
Address
Figure
Program word
An address is indicated with a letter among AZ. An address determines the meaning of its
subsequent figure. The addresses that can be used in an NC and their meanings are as follows.
An address may have different meanings depending on different instructions of preparation
14
function in a program.
Name
Address
Program No.
: (ISO) /O (EIA)
Sequence No.
Sequence number
Preparatory
function
Instructed move mode (linear, arc, etc)
Coordinate word
Meaning
Program number
X, Y, Z
Move instruction of coordinate axis
A, B, C, U, V, W
Move instruction of additional axis
Arc radius
I, J, K
Coordinates of arc center
Feed function
Designation of feedrate
Spindle function
Designation of spindle rotational speed
Tool function
Designation of tool number and tool offset number
Auxiliary
function
Designation of ON/OFF control on machine side
Worktable indexing, etc.
Offset No.
H, D
Designation of offset number
Dwell
P, X
Designation of dwell time
Designation of
program No.
Designation of subprogram number
Designation of
sequence No.
Designation of sequence number: Program is repeatedly

executed at this sequence number.
Number of
repetition
Numbers of repetition of subprogram and fixed cycles
Parameter
P, Q, R
Parameters of fixed cycle
For example, these program words may compose the following block.
Y
Coordinate No.
Preparatory function
Sequenc No.
Miscellaneous
Tool function
Spindle function
Feed function
15
In the following program list, a line indicates a block and a case in the block indicates a program word.
Name
S57.10.10
Page/
Program No. 0 (: ) 2002

/ N
A/B/ C/V/
C
W
R/I
J K F
B H/
D
N20 G92 X
Y
Z
100.0 200.0 300
.0
L P Q
N21 G00 X
Y
Z
196.0 315.0 500
.0
S40
0
N22 G01
T1
5
M03
F10.
0
(Note ) CR(EIA)LF(ISO)
3.2.3 Input format

All program words composing a block shall be instructed in the formats as specified below. The
input format of this system is a variable block format. Therefore, the number of the program
words in a block and the number of characters in a program word are variable, which makes
programming easier.
(1) Input in metric system
NO4G02XL+053YL053ZL+053
RD053
L+053L+053
ID053JD053KD+053
S02
T02
B03M02;
S04
T04
D02
F050
H02
(2) Input in Inch system

NO4G02XL+044YL+044ZL+044
RD044
L+053L+053
ID044JD044KD044
S02
T02
B03M02
16
D02
F032
H02

S04
T04
Note 1: and are for any one of A, B, C, U, V and W.

Note 2: The address and digits in the above formats have the following meanings.
X
L +
0
5
3
The three digits behind decimal point
The five digits before decimal point
Leading zero may be omitted.
With a symbol
Absolute value or incremental value
Address
J
D
0 5
3
The five digits before decimal point
Leading zero may be omitted.
Incremental value with a symbol
Address
For example: When a cutting tool moves to 50.123mm along X axis, its move instruction is as follows:
G00
X50
123
The five digits before decimal point: 00050
The leading zero and T are omitted.
G00 must not be omitted even the leading zero may be
omitted. (G00 specifies rapid traverse (positioning)).
Note 3: When an address word in a block is instructed twice or more times, the last instruction will be
valid and not give any alarm in principle.
For example: G01 M03 S200 M08;
Now M08 is valid and M03 invalid. For G codes, the lastly specified one in each group of G
codes in a block is valid. However, G90/G91 is only valid at the specified location in a block
(see Section 3.3.8.).
Example G90
Absolute
X10.0
G91
Y20.0
Incremental
If R and I, J or K are concurrently instructed in an arc interpolation instruction, R is always valid

and this is not related to instruction sequence.
Note 4:F050 in Inch-system input format may also be changed into F051 through parameter switching.
Refer to Section 3.4.3 To multiply feedrate by 1/10.
Note 5: Since P and Q have a number of meanings, they are omitted in the above format.
Note 6: Refer to Section 3.2.4 Decimal entries.
17
Note 7: Multiply the value input in metric system of X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, W, I, J, K, Q and R by 10 by

means of parameter setting.
RD052
XL+052YL+052ZL+052L+052L+052
ID052JD052KD052
( and are A, B, C, U, V and W) (Input in metric system) Refer to Section 3.3.2.2 To multiply
an input unit by 10.
Note 8: Refer to Section 3.3.2.2 To multiply an input unit by 10.
3.2.4 Decimal programming

It is possible for this unit to input the numerical values with a decimal point. Decimal point is
used in the values in the unit of distance, time or speed. However, some addresses may not
use decimal for entry. The location of a decimal point indicates the position of mm, inch,
degree or second.
X15.0
X15mm or x15 inches
F10.0
10mm/min for 10 inch/min
G041
Feedrate for 1 second
B90.0
B90deg
The addresses that can be entered with decimal point are as follows:
X, Y, Z, A, B, C, I, J, K, R, Q and F.
Note 1: During the dwell of an instruction, X can be input with the decimal point but P cannot (because
P is also specified with a sequence number).
Note 2: When G codes are used to change the location of the decimal point, it is necessary to
predetermine G codes even in a block. G20; (specify in Inch system ) X1.0G04X1.0 is
considered as a travel distance (in inch) because it does not indicate time. The result is held
for 10 seconds in relation to X10000G04.
When G04 is entered, its indication changes from 1.0 to 10.0.
G04X1.0 is treated as G04X1000 and the result is held for 1 second.
Note 3: Take note that the condition with or without a decimal point is quite different. Its programming
mode differs from an electronic computer.
G21; (specified in metric system)
X1X1 mm
X1X0.001 mm
G20; (specified in Inch system )
X1X1 inch
18
X1X0.0001 inch
Note 4: The numerical values with/without a decimal point can be mixed.
X1000
Y23.7
X10
Y22359
Note 5: If a specified value is less than the minimum setting, the value will be rounded down. The
instruction of X1.23456 is considered as X1.234 when it is entered in metric system and
1.2345 in Inch system . It has cumulative error for an incremental value instruction and has no
cumulative error but rounding error for an absolute value instruction. The instructed digits must
not exceed the allowable maximum digit.
X1.23456789There is an error because it has more than 8 digits.
X1.2345678 There is no error when it is up to 8 digits inclusive.
Note 6: When a figure with a decimal point is entered, the figure will be converted into the integer of the
minimum input increment.
(Example)X12.34
12340(entered in metric system)
In addition, it is necessary to perform digit number verification for the converted integer.
(Example)X1234567.8
X1234567800(entered in metric system). It gives an alarm

because the number of digits exceeds 8.
3.2.5 Maximum instruction value

The maximum instruction values of all addresses are as listed in the table below. Take note
that what the table lists are the ranges of the maximum specified values for the NC unit rather
than the mechanical moving ranges of the NC machine tool. For instance, the moving range of
X axis is about 100m (entered in metric system) for an NC unit while the travel distance of axis
X is likely to be limited to 2m for a machine tool and so is its feedrate. The cutting feedrate of
an NC unit is up to 15m/min while that of an NC machine tool is likely to be limited to 6m/min.
In actual programming, both this manual and the instruction manual supplied by machine
builder shall be referred to. Programming shall be performed on the basis of full knowledge
about the programming ranges of a specific machine tool.
Table 2.5: Basic addresses and ranges of instruction values (including additional options)
Name
Program No.
Sequence No.
Address
Input in mm
Output in mm
Input in inch
Output in mm
Input in mm
Output in inch
Input in inch
Output in
inch
: (ISO)
O (EIA)
19999
See the left
See the left
See the left
19999
19

Preparatory
function
099
Coordinate word
X, Y, Z, I,
J, K, Q, R,
A, B, C,
U, V, W
99999.999mm
99999.999
3937.0078inch
99999.999
99999.999mm
99999.999
937.0078inch
9999.999
Feed per minute
115000
mm/min
0.01600.00
inch/min
115000
mm/min
0.01600.00
inch/min
Feed per minute

(feedrate l/10)
(parameter
setting)
0.115000.0
mm/min
See the above
0.115000.0
mm/min
See the above
Spindle function
030000
See the left
See the left
See the left
Tool function
09999
Miscellaneous
function
099
X, P
0s99999.99s
19999
19999
S, H
0200
0999
Dwell
Sequence
setting
No.
Repeated times
Offset No.
2nd
auxiliary
function
3.2.6 Program number

The control unit can store a number of programs in the memory of the NC. Program numbers
are added to all programs in order to distinguish them.
Program number
(From 1 to 9999.0 and preceding 0 may be omitted)
4 digits
The program starts from the program number and ends at M02, M30 or M99.
01111M02
02222M30
#1111 program
#2222 program
M02 and M30 indicate the end of a main program. M99 indicates the end of a subprogram.
20
05555M99
#5555 subprogram
Note 1: For ISO codes, replace O with a :.
Note 2: The block with an optional block skip code such as /M02, /M30 and /M99 shall not be deemed
as the end of a program.
Note 3: When a program is not provided with a preceding program number, the first sequence number
(N) other than NO of the program may be used to replace the program number.
Note 4: If a program is not provided with a preceding program number or sequence number, MDI/LCD
panel shall be used to specify a program number when storing the program into the memory.
Note 5: For several programs, the second program and the succeeding ones are not necessarily
provided with an EOB code skipped wit a mark. However, an EOB code shall be used before
the program when the foregoing program ends by ER (EIA) or %(ISO).
Note 6: It is possible to operate without a program number. Subprogram shall be provided with a
program number.
Note 7: In some cases, the program number from 9000 9899 can only used by machine
manufacturer rather than user.
Note 8: When it has a robot option, program numbers 99009999 are used as robot data.
Note 9: When there is no M02, M30 or M99 but ER (EIA)%(ISO) at the end of the program, or the next
program number is 0, the end of the program shall be set by parameter No.306 BIT3 (NEOP).
3.2.7 Sequence number

A sequence number may be specified with N followed by four or less digits (1~9999) at the
start of a block. The order of sequence numbers is random and discontinuous. It is likely that
all blocks are provided with sequence numbers or sequence numbers are only added at the
necessary locations of a program.
It is recommended to specify sequence number in succession at key locations, e.g. when
replacing new tools or change the worktable indexing to a new machined surface.
Note 1: The use of the sequence number NO. is not allowed for the purpose of compatibility with the
program formats of other NC units.
Note 2: Since 0 cannot be used as a program number, the sequence number treated as a program
number shall not be 0.
3.2.8 To skip over an optional block

When a slash followed by a digit /n(n=19) is specified at the beginning of a block and the
21
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKTP switch n is enabled on the operation panel , the block with a /n
corresponding to switch number n will be ignored.
When the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKTP switch n is disabled, the block with a /n is valid, namely
operator may choose to skip over the block with a /n. The 1 in /1 can be ignored. However, the
1 in /1 must not be ignored when two or more OPTIONAL BLOCK SKTP switches are used.
When an OPTIONAL BLOCK SKTP switch is enabled, the ignored area is as follows:
/2N123G01X4N7856
Ignored area
Example:
N100X100
N101/2z100
N102/2/3X200
N103/3z200
In the above example, blocks N101 and N102 will be skipped over when No. 2 switch is
enabled and N102 and N103 skipped over when No. 3 switch enabled.
Note 1:Slash (/) shall be specified at the beginning of a block. If it is specified at other places of a block,
the information from the slash (/) to EOB code will be ignored but the information before the
slash (/) will remain valid.
Note 2: When the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKTP switch is enabled, TH and TV checkouts shall be
performed for the skipped part as the switch is disabled.
Note 3: The block to be skipped over is identified when the memory sends information to the buffer
register. When the block preceded by a slash is written in the buffer register, it will not be
ignored even if the OPTIONAL BLOCK SKTP switch is enabled.
Note 4: The function remains available during sequence number searching.
Note 5: The function is invalid when saving a program in the memory. That is, the block preceded by a
slash (/) will be written in the memory regardless the state of OPTIONIAL BLOCK SKIP.
Note 6: The programs may be completely output from the memory regardless the state of OPTIONIAL
BLOCK SKIP.
Note 7: Some OPTIONIAL BLOCK SKIP switches are likely to be unavailable for some machines.
Therefore, it is necessary to consult the machine manufacturer for the number of usable
switches.
Note 8: For the system with additional function to skip over an optional block, the 1 in /1 must not be
omitted if there are two or more marks for skipping over an optional block in one block.
/1 shall be specified as per the above requirements.
Example: Incorrect:
//3 G00 X10.0
Correct: /1/3 G00 X10.0
22
3.3 Dimension Word

A dimension word prescribes the movement of a tool. It composes a relevant instruction with
the address of a kinematical axis and a value indicating the direction and amount of travel. It
varies depending on the different absolute and incremental programming modes. (See Section
3.3.8.)
Address of dimension world
Meaning
X, Y, Z
The addresses of all axes in a rectangular coordinate

system: To indicate the location of the axis or the
distance in axial direction.
Additional axes
A, B, C, U, V, W
The addresses of the 4th and 5th axes: To indicate the

angle of axis of rotation or the location and distance of
linear axis.
Arc
interpolation
parameters
Basic axes
I, J, K
To specify the radius of an arc.

To indicate the distance from the home point to the arc
center along axis X, Y or Z or an axis parallel to them.
3.3.1 Controllable axis

The kinematical axis of a machine under the control of the NC system is called controllable
axis.
Each control shaft is recalled with the dimension word address of the control unit.
The number of axes that can be controlled by the NC system may be 3 (axes X, Y and Z) and
can be added to 4 or 5.
An additional axis may use any address among A, B, C, U, V or W. A, B and C are
recommended for axis of rotation and U, V and W for linear axis.
2 standard axes can be controlled in a block at the same time. The number of concurrently
controllable may be increased to 3 or 4 by means of additional selection. Separate control of
additional axis is only used for 3-axis link. The selection of additional axis gang control function
enables the link of 2 or 3 additional axes. If 3-axis gang control function is selected, it is not
necessary to select additional axis gang control function any more.
Number of concurrently controllable axes
Number of
controllable
axes
Number of
standard
axes
Selection of
concurrently
controllable
additional axes
Concurrent
selection
of 3 axes
3
23
Concurrent
selection of 3 axes
+ Concurrent
control selection of
additional axes
Concurrent
selection of
4 axes

4
5

2
(Including
additional axes)
X, Y, Z
3
(Including
additional axes)
Note 1: The system gives #17 alarm if additional axes (A, B, C, U, V, W) are specified without
additional control function.
Note 2: The number of link axes is always 2 in manual operation.
Note 3: When the system has the 5th axis, the following function control shall be exerted.
Thread cutting and synchronous feed cannot be performed.
The capacity of part program is reduced to 75%.
Additional S4 digit analog output function is not available.
Additional constant surface speed control function is not available.
Coordinate axes and movement symbols
If the machine coordinate axes specified by the machine are not identical with the tool
movement symbols, programming is subject to serious disorder. The concerned basic
concepts are provided in EIA RS-267-A or ISO841.
However, the following points shall be observed during programming.
a) Program shall be developed on the basis of a standard coordinate system (right-manual
rectangular coordinate system).
b) When programming, assume that workpiece does not move and a cutting tool moves around
it.
24
3.3.2 Set unit

3.3.2.1 Minimum set unit and minimum travel unit
1) Minimum set unit (input unit)
Minimum unit of tool travel is input by instruction. The minimum unit is given in mm, inch or
degree.
2) Minimum travel unit (output unit)
The minimum unit output to the machine is indicated in mm, inch or degree. Any one of the
following combinations may be employed.
Input/output
Linear axis
Minimum set unit
Minimum travel unit
Input in mm and output in mm
0.001mm
0.001mm
Input in inch and output in mm
0.0001inch
0.001mm
Input in mm and output in inch
0.001mm
0.0001inch
Input in inch and output in inch
0.0001inch
0.0001inch
0.001
0.001
Axis of rotation
Note: The set unit of an axis of rotation cannot be converted between Inch and metric systems.
Whether the minimum travel unit is 0.001 mm or 0.0001inch shall be determined by the
machine and selected by presetting parameter No.006 BIT0 (SCW).
Whether the minimum travel unit is 0.001 mm or 0.0001inch shall be selected by G codes or by
setting parameter through MDI/LCD panel.
G20The minimum set unit of a linear axis is 0.0001inch.
G21The minimum set unit of a linear axis is 0.001mm.
The state of G20 and G21 remains unchanged when the system is powered on/off.
25
3.3.2.2 Input unit10

The minimum set unit in mm may be changed to 0.01mm by parameter No.006 BIT1 setting.
The minimum set unit in inch cannot be changed.
Minimum set unit
Address
Input in mm
Input in inch
Dimension word
X, Y, Z, Q, R, I, J, K, U, V, W
0.01mm
0.0001inch
Revolution axis
A, B, C
0.01
0.01
0.01s
0.001s
0.01s
0.001s
Dwell time
It cannot be changed in the following cases:

a) Inputting differs from the above conditions
b) Display unit
c) Maximum range of instruction value
d) Units of step feed and manual feed
e) Offset input
f)
Others
Note 1: In the following descriptions herein, input unit is either 0.0001inch or 0.001mm.
Note 2: Display unit may become 0.01mm or 0.01 degree by parameter No.006 BIT2 (MDL)
setting.
3.3.3 Maximum travel

The maximum travels that can be instructed of the device are as listed in the table below:
Input in mm
output in mm
and
99999.999mm
99999.999
Input in inch and

output in mm
Input in mm and
output in inch
Input in inch and

output in inch
3937.0078inch
99999.999
99999.999mm
99999.999
9999.9999inch
99999.999
Note: The travels listed in the above table change depending on different machines.
3.3.4 Program origin and coordinate system

Program origin and coordinate system shall be determined during programming. Generally a
specific point on the workpiece is determined as the program origin.
26
This coordinate system is a workpiece coordinate system.
3.3.5 Coordinate system and origin of processing

A workpiece coordinate system needs to be used when a program is sent to the NC. The
cutting tool starts motion from the origin and the program starts from the origin, but the NC
always need to know the coordinates of the cutting tool at the origin through G92 instruction
(coordinate system setting).
3.3.6 Workpiece coordinate system

Several workpiece coordinate systems are needed when the mounting positions of the several
trailing bars for the machine are different. In this case, the 6 coordinate systems
preestablished on the machine may be selected with 6 G codes (G54G59) and the following
programs are executed in the selected coordinate system. All coordinate systems shall be
determined with the set distance between a reference point (a fixed point on the machine) and
their respective origins of coordinate (workpiece origin offset). See the following diagram for
details.
Refer to Section 4.4.13 for the setting method of workpiece origin offset.
27
It is not necessary to establish a coordinate system with G92 instruction when the
above-mentioned workpiece coordinate system is used. Concurrent use of G54G59 and
G92 may substitute the coordinate system established by G54G59. Therefore, usually G92
shall not be used in conjunction with G54G59.
Note: When using the workpiece coordinate system established by G54G59, make sure to
return to the first reference point after switching on so that G54 will automatically generate a
workpiece system. Hence it is not necessary to set an automatic coordinate system.
3.3.7 Reference (position) point

Reference point is a fixed point on the machine. Reference point return function allows the
cutting tool to return to the reference point. Therefore, a program is likely not to start from one
point on a workpiece coordinate system but from the reference point. In this case, the return of
the tool to the position of the reference point shall always be specified with G92 in the
workpiece coordinate system because the reference point is a specific point on the machine
and the program is developed on the basis of the workpiece coordinate system with a point on
the workpiece as its origin.
28
Note: G92 instruction is not necessary when the workpiece coordinate systems established
with G54G59 are used.
3.3.8 Absolute value instruction and incremental value instruction

The distance that a cutting tool moves along all axes may be programmed with an incremental
instruction or absolute instruction.
It is possible to directly program a running distance in a block using an incremental instruction
(G91).
When using an absolute instruction (G90), the end position of the cutting tool is indicated with
a coordinates in the block.
In the above diagram, the program will give the following position when an incremental
instruction is employed:
G91 X-60.0 Y40.0
In the above diagram, the program will give the following position when an absolute instruction
is employed:
G90
X40.0
Y70.0
29
The instruction mode of G90/G91 must not be changed for all addresses in a block so that the
program can be compatible with other NC.
3.4 Feed Function (F function)

3.4.1 Rapid traverse (positioning) function
All axes of the machine operate at the specified rapid traverse speed during rapid traverse.
As a rule, the rapid traverse speed has been set by manufacturer before shipment (set by
parameters RPDFX through RPDF4).
Since all axes of the machine moves individually, the times for all axes to move from their
home positions to end positions are different.
For example, when the rapid traverse speeds of axes X and Y reach 5m/min and 8m/min
respectively and movement program is as follows:
G91
X200.0 Y200.0
The times for axes X and Y of the machine to run from the starting point to the end point are
24s and 15s respectively.
The locus of the cutting tool in the above example is as indicated in the figure below:
The control over the override of the rapid traverse speed can be achieved with the switch on
the operation panel of the machine. (FO, 25%, 50%, 100%) FO shall be determined by
setting parameter No.113 (SPDFL) and its unit shall not be indicated in percentage (%) but
mm/min or inch/min.
3.4.2 Cutting feedrate

The cutting feedrate shall be specified in the form of the distance per minute. The feedrate is
30
specified as follows with F codes:

F1 (1mm/min; 0.01inch/min)
F15000(15000mm/min) or F60000(600.00 inch/min)

The feedrate is restrained to the upper limit.
According to the upper limit, the manufacturer of the machine sets feedrate by parameter
No.106 (FEDMX) or exerts override restraint from 0 to 200% (10% each step) with the switch
on the operation panel. The control over upper limit speed is also effective for override feedrate.
The means of specifying feedrate with F codes is also applicable for the axis of rotation.
Example: To input in metric system F050
To input in Inch system
F032
When inputting in metric and Inch system s, decimal point may be used for inputting
and it is located in the position of degree/min.
To input in metric system F12
F12
0.12 degree/min
0.12 degree/min
To input in metric system F12.0

F12.0
12 degree/min
12 degree/min
Note 1: Except the acceleration and deceleration processes in the row of NC, NCs calculus error
regarding instructed feedrate is kept within 2%. Moreover, the error is determined by
measuring a travel distance over 500mm when NC is in stable running state.
Note 2: The number of the digits of F codes is up to 7. Should the input feedrate is above the upper
limit, the feedrate is restrained to the upper limit.
3.4.3 To reduce feedrate to 1/10

The input speed in metric system can be changed to 1/10 of the original speed by parameter
No.006 BIT3 (FMIC) setting.
Item
Minimum input unit
Range
Feed per minute
0.1mm/min
F1 to F150,000 (0.1 mm/min to

15000.0mm/min)
3.4.4 Synchronous feed (feed per rotation)

It is possible to specify a feedrate in relation to the feed amount per minute of the spindle. G95
specifies synchronous feed while G94 feed per minute (with travel per minute as the feedrate).
31

Feed per minute
Synchronous feed
Meaning
Feed amount per minute of

cutting tool
Feed amount of cutting tool per

rotation of spindle
Address
G code
G94
G95
Input in
mm
1mm/min15000mm/min
(F1F15000)
0.01mm/r500.00mm/r
(F1F50000)
Input in
inch
0.01inch/min600.0inch/min
(F1F60000)
0.0001inch/r50.0000inch/r
Range
Restraining
value
Both the feed per minute and synchronous feed at specific feedrate are
restrained. The restraining value is set by manufacturer (only the feedrate with
override is restrained).
Override
The override from 0 to 200% (10% each step) is effective for both feed per
minute or synchronous feed.
A restraining value is set in mm/min or inch/min. Synchronous speed is converted to mm/min

or inch/min with the following formula:
fm=frR
Where fm: the feed per minute in mm/min or inch/min
fr: the synchronous feedrate in mm/r or inch/r
R: the rotational speed of the spindle in r/min
Note 1: Both G94 and G95 are modal. Once they are specified, they will be effective until other G
codes appear.
Note 2: The spindle shall be provided with a synchronous feed position coder.
Note 3: When the rotational speed of the position coder is as low as 1 rpm, the feedrate will become
irregular. The irregularity has no impact on the machining of the machine. Therefore it is still
usable when the rotational speed is as low as 1 rpm. However, the degree of irregularity must
not worsen more as the further reduction in rotational speed is subject to deterioration.
3.4.5 F1 digit feed

Specifying a digit (19) behind F sets the feedrate of the corresponding number. Feedrate is
preset for each number using parameter. Specify FO as the rapid traverse speed and set the
F1 digit feedrate switch on the machine panel to ON. Then rotate the manual pulse generator
to increase or reduce the feedrate of the currently selected number.
The increase or reduction in feedrate:
F=
Fma 1
/Manual pulse generator per case
100 X
Where: Fma1 is used as the upper limit of feedrates of F1F4 (set with a parameter).
32
Fma2: is used as the upper limit of feedrates of F5F9 (set with a parameter).
X: Any figure between 1 and 127 (set with a parameter).
Set or modified feedrate can be saved even in case of power failure. The current feedrate is
displayed on the LCD.
3.4.6 Automatic acceleration and deceleration

During the start or stop of feed, acceleration or deceleration is performed at some time
constant so as to prevent the mechanical system from shock. Hence it is possible to consider
the problem of acceleration and deceleration during programming.
It is impossible to machine a sharp angle under the influence of automatic acceleration and
deceleration. To machine a sharp angle, dwell instruction (G04) must be added between two
blocks.
Once the dwell instruction is inserted, the actual tool path tallies with the programmed path.
The rapider feedrate is, the greater time constant of acceleration and deceleration and angle
error will be.
Note 1: The changes of feedrate between the blocks that have specified different moving modes are
as listed in the table below.
Foregoing blocks
New blocks
Positioning
Cutting feed
Not to move
Positioning
Cutting feed
Not to move
: The next block will be executed when the instruction speed is reduced to zero.
: Continue to execute the next block so that the feedrate will not change excessively.
Note 2: Acceleration/deceleration is independently performed on both axes (axes X and Z) and their
feedrates changes between blocks, resulting in the discrepancy between the actual path of the
tool and programmed path. For example, if the tool only moves along axis X in a block and
along axis Z in the next block, the movement in the direction of axis X starts to decelerate near
the angle. Meanwhile, it starts accelerated movement in the direction of axis Z. The actual path
33
of the tool is as indicated in the figure below.
In arc interpolation, the actual arc radius is less than the programmed on (see the Appendix).
The deviation may be increased by minimizing the time constant of acceleration and
deceleration.
3.4.7 Automatic angle adjustment

Tool cutting is subject to overload if the tool performs the rough machining with tool
compensation in inner angle and inner arc area at programmed feedrate. The function
automatically reduces feedrate so as to lower the tools overload in the above machining areas,
thereby obtaining a smooth machining surface.
3.4.7.1 Automatic adjustment of inner angle

1)
Working conditions
Feedrate can be automatically regulated provided that both the two blocks in succession
passing the angle satisfy the following requirements.
a. The G codes of Group 01 are G01, G02 or G03.
b. The offset is not 0 in offset mode.
c. Offsetting shall be performed inside the angle to be processed.
d. The axis moves along the offset surface.
e. Instructions G41 and G42 do not exit in the succeeding block.
f.
Instructions G41 and G42 do not exist in the preceding block or the block is not started
though it has the two instructions.
g. The inner angle is less than the preset by parameter.

The angle judgment with regard to programmed path:
34

(I) Straight line
Straight line
(II) Straight line
(III) Arc
(IV) Arc
Arc
Straight line
Arc
The angle may be considered as an inner angle when P. The value of P shall be set by
parameter (NO335) (1P179). It is subject to error in judgment less than 0.001 provided
that is nearly equal to P.
Operation range
When an angle is determined as an inner angle, feedrate is regulated from the range specified
by the L in the block on one side of the intersection point of the angle to the range specified
by the Ls in the block one the other side of the intersection point. Ls and L are the straight
distances from one point on the path of the tool center to the intersection point. Land Ls are
35
set by different parameters (N0355 and 356).
Feedrate is regulated in the range from point a to point b.
Feedrate is regulated within the range from Point a to Point b.

For an arc, the adjustment function is effective for the end point of a block provided that the
following requirements are fulfilled.
Within the range of L;
The origin and end point of the arc are in the same quadrant or the origin is in the quadrant
adjacent to the one in which the end point is. Similarly, the adjustment of the origin of the
block is effective when the following conditions are met.
Within the range of Ls;
The origin and end point of the arc are in the same quadrant or the origin is in the quadrant
adjacent to the one in which the end point is.
(Example) For a disc:
For the program for an arc, feedrate is regulated from point a to point b and from point c to
point d.
Amount of adjustment
36
Amount of adjustment is set by No. 335 parameter.

1amount of adjustment (1% each step) 100 (%)
This is effective for commissioning and F1 digit instruction. For F4 digit instruction, the actual
feedrate will become:
Fx (inner angle adjustment) (feedrate adjustment)
Whether inner angle adjustment is effective
Whether to adjust an inner angle or not may be selected with G codes. The inclusion of G62 in
the group 15 in which G61 and G64 are is as shown in the table below. These G codes are
related to accurate stop checking mode.
Accurate stop detecting mode
Inner angle adjustment
G61
Valid
Invalid
G62
Invalid
Valid
G64
Invalid
Invalid
Note 1: It is in G64 mode when powered on or cleared.

Note 2: It is necessary to specify G09 when you plan to perform accurate stop detection in G62 mode.
Note 3: The switch of inner arc cutting feedrate is always valid as described in Section 4.7.2 and is not
subject to the influence of G codes.
3.4.7.2 Switch of inner arc cutting feedrate

For inner arc offset cutting, the feedrate of programmed path shall be specified by F codes
while its actual feedrate FRC/RP (where RC is the radius of the path of tool center and RP the
radius of program path.
The switch is also effective for commissioning and F1 digit instruction.
(Example 1)
However, if RC is much less than RP, i.e. RC/RP=0, the tool will stop. Therefore, when
RC/RPMDR after the minimum reduction ratio (MDR) is set, the actual feedrate will be FX
(MDR).
37
MDR is set by N0333 parameter. When 1MDR (1% each step)100, it is applicable for F1
digit and commissioning. The reduction ratio of automatic inner angle adjustment is not under
the influence of MDR.
Note: If inner arc cutting is overlapped on automatic inner angle adjustment, now the actual
feedrate will be F
Rc
(angle adjustment) (feedrate override).
Rp
3.5 Preparation Function (G function)

The two digits following address G determine the meaning that the concerned block involves.
G codes may be divided into the following two types:
Type
Meaning
Primary valid G codes
It is only valid in its instructed block.

After being instructed to be valid, the G codes become invalid only
when another G code in the same group is instructed.
Modal G codes
(Example) G01 and G00 are modal G codes.

G01
G00
G01 is valid in this range.
Table 5.1: G codes list

G codes
Group
G00
G01
G02
Function
Positioning (rapid traverse)
01
Linear interpolation (feed)

Arc interpolation CW (clockwise)
G03
Arc interpolation CCW (counterclockwise)
G04
Hold
G07
G09
00
Speed sine-curve control (specified imaginary axis)

Accurate stop detection
G10
Offset setting, workpiece zero offset setting
G17
To select XY plane
G18
02
G19
G20
G21
G22
To select ZX plane
To select YZ plane
06
04
Input in inch
Input in mm
Storage travel limit ON
38
G23
Storage travel limit OFF
G27
Reference point return check
G28
To return to reference point
G29
00
To return from reference point
G30
To return to the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference points
G31
To skip over cutting
G33
01
G40
G41
Thread cutting
To cancel tool compensation
07
Tool compensation left side
G42
Tool compensation right side
G43
Forward compensation of tool length
G44
08
Reverse compensation of tool length
G49
To cancel tool length compensation
G45
To increase tool offset
G46
G47
00
G48
G50
G51
G54
To reduce tool offset

To increase tool offset by twice
To reduce tool offset by twice
11
14
Zooming OFF
Zooming ON
To select workpiece coordinate system 1
G55
G56
G57
14
G58
G59
G60
00
G61
G62

15
G64
G65
G66
G67
unidirectional positioning
To enable automatic angle adjustment
Cutting mode
00
12
Simple recall of a microinstruction

Modal recall of microinstruction
To cancel modal recall of microinstruction
G73
Gun drilling cycle
G74
Reverse-tapping cycle
G76
Finish boring
G80
To disable fixed cycle
G81
Drilling cycle, spotter
G82
Drilling cycle, counterboring
G83
09
Peck drilling cycle
G84
Tapping cycle
G85
Boring cycle
G86
Boring cycle
G87
Reverse boring cycle
G88
Boring cycle
G89
Boring cycle
39

G90
G91
03
G92
G94
G95
G98
G99
G96
G97
Absolute value programming

Incremental value programming
Absolute zero programming
05
10
Feed per minute

Feed per rotation
To return fixed cycle to the initial point
To return fixed cycle to point R
(Note 1) The G codes marked with ^ are the initial G codes of all groups. That is, these G codes are
established when the system parameters specifying initial G codes are validated by
powering on or pressing the RESET key. For G22 and G23, G22 is selected when power is
switched on and G22 or G23 (one of them is valid before reset) is established after reset.
The selection of the state of the initial G codes such as G00, G01, G43, G44, G49, G90, G91
or G94 and G95 shall be set by parameters ((G00, G43, G44, G90 and G95).
For G20 or G21, the valid one is selected before powering off or pressing the RESET key.
(Note 2) The G codes in group 00 are modal and are only valid in the blocks they belong to.
(Note 3) When a G code not listed in the above table is specified or an optional G code not defined by
control unit is specified, (N0.0/0) will give an alarm. (N0.0/0) But G38 and G39 are ignored.
(Note 4) Some G codes may be specified in the same block even they do not belong to the same
group. When 2 or more G codes than belong to the same group are specified in a block, the
lastly specified G code will be valid.
(Note 5) If any G code in group 01 in fixed cycle mode, the fixed cycle will be automatically disabled
and the system will be in G80 state. However, the G codes in group 01 are not subject to the
influence of the G codes of fixed cycle.
(Note 6) G70 and G71 replaces G20 and G21 (special G codes) by parameter No.008 BIT5 (GSP)
setting.
(Note 7) The G codes of all groups are displayed.
3.5.1 Selection of planes (G17, G18, G19)

A plane is selected with the instruction for arc interpolation and tool compensation.
G17XY plane
G18ZX plane
G19YZ plane
Travel instruction is not related to the selection of planes G17/G18/G19. For example, when
G17Z is specified, Z will move.
40
3.5.2 Positioning (G00)

Using this code positions the tool at the points programmed by addresses X, Y and Z or A, B,
C, U, V and W. Coordinates shall be always specified in absolute instructions while the
distance from the origin to the end point in incremental instructions. All axes move the tool at
rapid traverse (positioning) rates individually and the tool path is not always straight line
during positioning.
2 axes (2 addresses) can be programmed concurrently in a block. But only one can be
programmed for the 4th axis.
G00 specifies a position.
G00:
(=X, Y or Z)
Example: The program shall be as follows when the rapid traverse (positioning)rate is
9.600mm/min in the direction of axis X and 9.600mm/min in the direction of axis Y:
G00 X25.0 Y-10.0
Note 1: The rapid traverse (positioning) rate in G00 instruction is set for all axes respectively by
manufacturer. Therefore rapid traverse (positioning) rate can not be specified through
program.
In the positioning mode of G00, the tool start speeding up until it reaches the predetermined
speed. Then it rapidly travels and finally slows down to the end point. When it comes to the
proper position, the next block is executed in sequence (Note 2).
Note 2: The so-called proper position means motor feed is within the specified range (The range is
determined by manufacturer). The travel instruction in the following format may be specified
provided that the system selects three-axis link function.
G00 XYZ:
In this example, axes X, Y and Z move the tool to designated position in specified rapid
traverse.
When the system selects the linked control function with additional axes, not only addresses X,
Y and Z, but also the addresses of additional axes may be instructed. If they are instructed in
this way, 3 or 4 axes can move at the same time.
Example: X500.0
Y300.0
Z25.0
B20.0:
41
3.5.3 Unidirectional positioning (G60)

For the accurate positioning without offset, final positioning can be achieved in only one
direction.
Origin
End point
(The direction for final positioning is from right to left.)
The condition that replaces G00 with G60 is as follows:
G60
(, and = X, Y and Z or additional axes A, B, C, U, V or W. This is the case of concurrent

control of 3 or 4 axes. The situation of concurrent control of 2 or 3 axes includes the selection
of one additional axis.
Overshoot and positioning direction are set by parameter. The tool stops once before the end
point even the positioning direction of instruction is identical with parameter setting.
Note 1: G60 is an one-off valid G code.

Note 2: Axis Z must not be positioned in a single direction in fixed drilling cycle.
Note 3: The axis whose overshoot has not been set by parameter shall not be positioned in a single
direction.
Note 4: When the travel distance instruction is O, unidirectional positioning will not be performed.
Note 5: When mirroring function is used, it is invalid to set its direction by parameter.
Note 6: Unidirectional position does not apply to fixed cycles G76 and G87.
3.5.4 Linear interpolation (G01)

G01F:
(, and =X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V and W. Gang control is exerted for 4th and other axes.)
This actually specifies linear interpolation mode. and defines the travel distance of the tool.
Whether the distance is in absolute or incremental mode depends on the current state of
G90/G91. Feedrate shall be specified by F codes, which are modal.
42
Example of program: (G91) G01

Y
X200.0
Y100.0
F200.0
End point
0 Origin
200.0
The feedrate instructed by F codes is the traveling speed of the tool. If F codes are not
specified, the feedrate is considered as 0.
The travel instruction (linear interpolation) with 3-axis gang control function is as follows:
G01
XYZF:
It is possible for the instruction to perform linear interpolation for 3 axes at one time.
When additional gang control function is selected, the addresses (A, B or C) of the fourth axis
may be used to replace X, Y or Z. In this way the 3-axis gang control involving the 4th axis can
be exerted.
Example: G01
X500.0 Y300.0
B20.0
F10.0:
When the system is provided with optional 4-axis gang control functio0n, the use of the
following instruction is allowed.
G01F:
Where , , , = X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V or W.
Note 1: Axial feedrates are as follows:
G01 F f:
The feedrate in the direction of axis : F=
The feedrate in the direction of axis : F=
+
L=
2
f
f
Note 2: The feedrate of an axis of rotation shall be instructed in degree/min (input in metric system:
F050; input in inch system: F032).
Example: G91 G01 B90.0 F300:
43
Note 3: In the linear interpolation involving the 4th axis (axis of rotation A, B or C), the unit of cutting
feed is changed from degree to inch (or mm) and the cutting feedrate in rectangular
coordinate system is controlled so that it keeps identical with the speed specified by F codes.
The feedrate of an axis of rotation is determined with the formulas in Note 1 and its unit is
changed into degree/min.
E: G91 G01 X20.0 B40.0 F300.0:
When the unit (degree) of B-axis movement instruction is changed into mm or inch, machining
time shall be determined as follows:
2
20
+ 402
300
=0.014907 (min)
The feedrate of axis B is:
40
=268.3 /min
0.14907
Note 4: For 3- or 4-axis link, the method for calculating the feedrate in rectangular coordinate system is
the same as 2-axis control.
Note 5: For inputting in Inch system and inputting in metric system, the upper limit of the feedrate of an
axis of rotation is approximately 6000/min. The speed is fixed at the upper limit even the
feedrate of an instruction exceeds the upper limit.
3.5.5 Arc interpolation (G02, G03)

3.5.5.1 Arc interpolation without any additional axis
The instruction below moves the tool along the arc.
The arc in the XY plane:
G02
G17
R
XY
G03
F;
IJ
44
The arc in the ZX plane:

G02
G18
R
XZ
G03
F:
IK
The arc in the YZ plane:

G02
G19
R
XZ
G03
F:
JK
Item
Instruction
Plane selection
Rotating direction
The position
of end point
Meaning
G17
The arc in the plane of XY
G18
The arc in the plane of ZX
G19
The arc in the plane of YZ
G02
Clockwise (CW)
G03
Counterclockwise (CCW)
G90 mode
2 of axes X, Y and Z
The position of the end point in the

workspace coordinate system
G91 mode
2 of axes X, Y and Z
The distance from the origin to the

end point
2 of axes I, J and K
The distance from the origin to the

center
The distance from the

starting point to the center
Arc radius
Arc radius
Once the unit is switched on, G17 is enabled as the initial code for plane selection.
Whether it is in clockwise or counterclockwise direction depends on the left-manual or
right-manual coordinate system.
The end point of the arc is determined by address X, Y or Z and its indication in absolute or
incremental value by G90 or G91. In incremental indication, the coordinate of the end point is
specified from the origin of the arc.
45
The center of the arc is determined by the addresses I, J and K corresponding to axes X, Y and Z.
The digit following I, J or K is a coordinate component from the origin to the center of the arc and
they are always specified as an incremental value. The provision has no bearing upon G90 and
G91.
The marks of I, J and K correspond to the specified directions.

Arc interpolation may substitute I and J with R or gives an instruction with K. The instruction is
given in the following format:
G02
XYR:
G03
There are two types of arc in the arc interpolation with R (specified by radius) the arc less
than 180 and more than 180. Its analysis is as indicated in the diagram below.
Example of Instruction:
1 The arc less than 180:
G02 X6.0 Y2.0 R5.0:
2 The arc over 180:
G02 X6.0 Y2.0 R-5.0:
46
a)
Absolute programming
(1) G92
200.0
Y40.0
Z0;
G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0 I-60.0

G02 X120.0 Y60.0 I-50.0;
(2) G92
X200.0 Y40.0 Z0;
G90
b)
G03 X140.0 Y100.0 R60.0

G01 X120.0 Y60.0 R50.0;
Increment programming
(I) G91
G03
X-60.0
Y60.0
F300.0;
F300;
I-60.0 F300;
G02 X-20.0 Y-40.0 I-50.0;

(II) G91 G03 X-60.0 Y60.0 R60.0 F300;
G02 X-20.0 Y-40.0 R50.0;
The tangential feedrate of arc interpolation is equal to the cutting feedrate specified by F codes.
However, the arc interpolation involving the fourth axis is not allowed.
Note 1: In arc interpolation, I0, J0 or K0 may be omitted.
Note 2: When the end point of an arc coincides with its origin, I, J and K are used to instruct a center of
a circle for programming a 360 arc (full circle) and X, Y and Z may be omitted.
Note 3: It will give No. 023 alarm if an arc of radius of 0 is programmed.
Note 4: The deviation of instruction feedrate from actual tool feedrate is less than or equal to 2%. In
tool radius compensation, the actual tool feedrate is the speed of the tool center path.
Note 5: If the addresses I, J, K and R are assigned to the same block, the arc specified by address R is
valid and other I, J and K are ignored.
47
3.5.5.2 Arc interpolation with an additional axis

The arc interpolation with an additional axis is allowable. An axis (X, Y or Z) shall be set to
parallel with the additional axis by parameter setting. If the additional axis does not parallel with
any axis, arc interpolation will be impractical. G code for plane selection shall be specified for
arc interpolation. An address of an axis is specified with the G code for plane selection so as to
determine the axes performing arc interpolation.
Example: Assuming that additional axes U and W parallel with axes X and Y respectively.
a) G17X-Y-XY plane
b) G17U-Y-UY plane (U parallels with X)
c) G17Y-XY plane
d) G17XY plane
e) G17 X-Y-U-
f)
Alarm
G18X-W-XW plane (W parallels with Z)
Addresses I, J and K may also be used to specify the center of the arc. This is similar to the arc
interpolation without any additional axis. The addresses I, J and K are used for the axes
parallel to axes X, Y and Z.
The arc interpolation specified with R is also valid.
3.5.6 Sine-curve interpolation

In spiral cutting instruction, sinusoidal interpolation is realized by specifying an arc instruction
axis not to move during arc interpolation. The imaginary axis is specified as follows:
G070:
(Specify as the imaginary axis)
G071:
(Specify as the real axis)
(= X, Y, Z or additional axes A, B, C, U, V and W)

After instruction G070, axis is deemed as an imaginary axis until G071 instruction is given.
For the single-period sine interpolation in Y-Z plane, axis X serves as an imaginary axis.
X2+Y2 = r2 (r: arc radius)
Y = rsin(
2
)Z( l : the travel distance along axis Z in a single period)
l
48
N001 G07 X0:

N002 G91 G17 G03 X-200 Y0.0 I-10.0 Z20.0 F100:
N003 G01 X10.0:
N004 G07 X1:
Axis X is deemed as an imaginary axis during N002N003 blocks.
In the N003 block, spiral-curve cutting instruction is given in this way when axis Z is used a
linear axis. However, axis Y moves only when axis Z is performing sine interpolation since axis
X does not move.
In N003 block, the machine is in suspended state after interpolation because axis X does not
move.
Note 1: Imaginary axis is only available for automatic operation but not for manual operation.
Note 2: Interlock, travel limit and external deceleration are also available for imaginary axis.
Note 3: Manual insertion is also valid for imaginary axis. That is, the axis moves by manual insertion.
3.5.7 Thread cutting (G33)

The possibility of cutting determines the threads of screw pitch.
G33Z Z F: f:
Where Z is the length of thread (incremental instruction) or end point of thread (absolute
instruction)
f: screw pitch
Minimum input increment
Range
Input in mm
0.01mm
F1 to F50000 (0.01mm to 500.00mm)
Input in inch
0.0001inch
F1 to 500000 (0.0001inch to 50.0000inch)

49
Spindle axis is restricted as follows:

1R(Maximum feedrate/screw pitch) or allowable rotational speed of the position coder)
Where:
R: Spindle speed (r/min)
Screw pitch: mm or inch
Maximum feedrate: mm/min or inch/min
The instruction signal of maximum feed per minute or the maximum feedrate due to the
restriction of motor or machine, whichever is lower;
Allowable rotational speed of position coder: 4,000r/min (position coder A)
6, 000r/min (position coder B)
Note 1: Spindle speed may be read continuously through the position coder installed on the spindle.
The coder converts the spindle speed into the cutting feed per minute for purposes of feed.
Note 2: The converted cutting feedrate is not overridden but fixed at 100%.
Note 3: The converted cutting feedrate shall be fixed.
Note 4: Feed hold is invalid during thread cutting.
Example:
N20
G90
N21
N22
G00
X100.0
S45 M03;
Z200.0
G33
Z120.0
;
F5.0
50
N23
N24
M19;
G00
X105.0
N25
M03;
Z200.0
N26
M00;
X100.0
N27
G04
N28
G33
M03;
X2.0
;
Z120.0
F5.0
Notes:
N20, N21: To locate the tool at the center of the hole and to clockwise (CW) rotate the spindle.
N22: To perform thread cutting for the first time with screw pitch specified by address F.
N23: M19 orders the spindle to stop in a fixed position on the circumference (M19: Spindle
stops in a fixed position).
N24: To withdraw the cutting tool in the direction of axis X.
N25: To move the cutting tool above the hole: M00 orders the program to stop and allows
operator to adjust the tool for the thread cutting for the second time.
N26: To align the cutting tool with the center of the hole and to start forward rotation of the
spindle.
N27: When the travel instruction in the N26 block is relatively short, it is necessary to add
another dwell instruction so that the spindle has adequate time to reach the rated
rotational speed.
N28: To perform thread cutting for the second time.
3.5.8 Automatic return to reference point (reference positions G27G30)

3.5.8.1 Check of return to reference point (G27)
A point fixed on a machined plane is called reference point (reference position). Once a tool is
manually returned to a reference point, it is positioned at the point.
G27 instruction function is used to check that the tool is positioned at the reference point.
G27:
(, are selected from address X, Y and Z and additional axes A, B, C, U, V and W) The
instruction is used to rapidly position the tool at the reference point.
Once the tool reaches the reference point, the indicator indicating controllable axiss return to
the reference point is lit.
After returning to the reference point, the next block will be executed if M00 or M01 does not
exist in M00 or M01. If the return to the reference point is not required in all cycles, optional
51
program skip function can be used.

If the system is provided with 3-axis gang control function, the G27 instruction may be
expressed in the following format:
G27 r :
(The addresses , and r shall be selected from X, Y, Z and additional axes A, B, C, U, V and
W. However, only one axis can be controlled at one time if concurrent control of additional axes
is not selected.)
The use of the following instruction is allowable when 4-axis gang control is selected:
G27r:
Where , , r, = X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V or W
Note 1: In tool compensation mode, the position that the tool reaches with G27 is the position with
offset. In this case, the tool is also not at the reference point and the indicator for return to the
reference point does not illuminate. As a rule, G27 is only used for compensation cancellation
mode.
Note 2: In a inch mechanical system that inputs in metric system, the indicator illuminates even the
programmed position of the tool offsets from the reference point by 1 as a result of that the
minimum input increment is less than the minimum traveling increment of the mechanical
system.
3.5.8.2 Automatic return to reference point (G28)

G28 :
(The addresses and shall be selected from X, Y, Z and additional axes A, B, C, U, V and W.
However, additional axes can only be individually controlled without additional axis gang
control function.)
The axis specified by the instruction can be automatically positioned at the reference point. As
move instructions, and shall be specified in absolute/incremental value in G90/G91 mode.
The end point of the instruction is called intermediate point and the coordinates specified by
this instruction are saved to the NC.
The procedures in the G28 block are as follows:
First all controlled axes are positioned at intermediate points rapidly. Then they move from the
intermediate points to the reference points. If now the machine is not locked, the indicator for
return to the reference point is lit.
The positioning at the intermediate point and reference point in this way is equivalent to the
positioning of G00.
The instruction for 3-axis link is as follows:
G28 r :
52
W.) The following instruction is allowed for 4-axis link function.
G28 r :
Generally the G28 instruction is used for automatic tool change (ATC). In principle, tool radius
compensation, tool offset compensation and tool length compensation shall be cancelled
before executing the instruction.
Note 1: Not only the coordinates of move instruction, but also the coordinates of intermediate point is
saved to memory in the blocks of G28. This is, for the axes without instruction in the blocks of
G28, the foregoing coordinates in G28 serves as the coordinates of the intermediate point of
the axis.
Example: N1 G90 X100.0 Y200.0 Z300.0:
N2 G28 X400.0 Y500.0:
N3 G28 Z600.0:
Remarks:
N2: Intermediate point - 400.0, 500.0
N3: Intermediate point - 400.0, 500.0, 600.0
Note 2: After the system is switched on without manual return to the reference point, it moves from the
intermediate point when G28 is specified. This is similar to the manual return to the reference
point. Now the moving direction from the intermediate point has become the direction of return
to the reference point set by parameter.
Note 3: If G28 is instructed for an axis of rotation, the moving direction from the intermediate point to
the reference point has become the direction of return to the reference point. Furthermore, the
travel is within 360.
3.5.8.3 Automatic return from reference point (G29)

G29:
(The addresses and shall be selected from X, Y, Z and additional axes A, B, C, U, V and W.
However, additional axes can not be interlocked with one the three basic axes if additional axis
gang control function is not selected.)
The tool may be positioned at the specified point through an intermediate point using this
function. As a rule, the instruction is used after a G28 instruction.
and are specified in absolute/incremental value depending on the current G90/G91 state.
In an incremental instruction, an incremental value relative to the intermediate value shall be
specified.
Using the movement of the blocks of G29 allows all instructed axes to pass through the
intermediate point previously defined by G28 instruction and to reach the specified point at
rapid traverse (positioning) rate.
53
The procedures for positioning at the intermediate point and then the specified point are similar
to the positioning with G00.
Example of G28 and G29 application:
For G91:
G28
X1000.0
M06:
G29 X500.0
Y200.0: (From A to B)
Y-400.0: (From B to C)
The example shows that programmer needs not to calculate the actual travel distance from the
intermediate point to the reference point. The G29 instruction for a system with 3-axis
concurrent control function is as follows:
G29 r :
W. However, additional axes can not be interlocked with one the three basic axes if additional
axis concurrent control function is not selected.)
The following instruction is allowed for the system with 4-axis link function:
G29 r :
Where , , r, = X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V and W
Note: After the tool passes through the intermediate point and reaches the reference point
under the instruction of G29/30, the intermediate point shall move to a new coordinate system
in case of change in the position of workpiece coordinate system. Thereafter the tool shall pass
through the intermediate point that has moved to the new coordinate system and reach the
specified point when G29 is instructed.
54
3.5.8.4 Return to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference point (G30)

The following instruction moves the specified axis to the 2nd, 3rd or 4th reference points (G30).
G30
P2
P3
P4
; (P2 may be omitted)
P2: The 2nd reference point

P3: The 3rd reference point
P4: The 4th reference point
Determining the positions of the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference points is to preset the distance
between the 1st reference points for field adjustment. Except that the tool does not return to the
1st reference point but to the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference points, the function is similar to G28s
instructions of return to reference point. After the G30 instruction, G29 instruction positions the
cutting tool to the specified position through the intermediated established by G30 instruction.
Its movement is the same as the situation of specifying G29 instruction after G28 instruction.
When the G30 instructions normal position of automatic tool change (ATC) varies from the
reference point, the G30 instruction is as follows if 3-axis link function is provided:
G30 r :
W. However, additional axes can not be concurrently controlled along with one the three basic
axes if additional axis concurrent control function is not selected.)
The following instruction may be used when 4-axis gang control function is selected.
P2
G30
P3
r ;
P4
Note: After switching on, it is necessary to manually or automatically return to the reference
point once (G28) before executing the G30 instruction.
3.5.9 Dwell (G04)

G04X (t): or
G04P (t):
Either of the above methods may be used for hold. After executing the previous block, It is
necessary to wait for (t) seconds before executing the next block.
The maximum instruction time is 99999.999s and time error is about 16ms.
Example: To suspend for 2.5s
G04
Note 1:
X2.5 or G04
P2500:
Address P does not program with a decimal point.

55
Note 2: Dwell and time delay are applicable for the two conditions below and are enabled by
parameter setting.
1. After the speed of the foregoing block drops to 0
2. After the tool reaches the instruction value (after the inspection of locating point)
3.5.10 Accurate stop detection (G09)

A block involving G09 reduces its feedrate to 0 at the end point and affirms the state of locating
point (Note 2). Then the next block is executed. The function is used to machine a sharp edge
or corner. G09 is only valid in its specified block.
Note 1: Locating point detection is automatically performed in the locate modes (G00, G60) without
G09.
Note 2 Locating point means that a feed motor is within the range of the specified end point.
3.5.11 Accurate stop detecting mode (G61) and cutting mode (G64)
(1)
Accurate stop detecting mode (G61)

The move instructions of all blocks following G61 decelerate to 0 at its end point until G64
instruction. They are determined as being in positioned state and then the next block is
executed.
(2)
Cutting mode (G64)

The blocks following G64 do not accelerate until the end point of the move instruction of G61
but immediately go to the next block. Even in the G64 mode, feedrate is reduced to 0 and
positioning detection is performed under a positioning instruction (G00 or G60) or in the blocks
that has determined (G09) accurate stop detection.
3.5.12 Coordinate system setting (G92)

To move the cutting tool to a specific point with absolute instruction, make sure to preset the
coordinate system, which is established with the following instruction.
G92X (X) Y (Y) Z (Z) r (r) ():
(r, = A, B, C, U, V, W)
The instruction establishes a coordinate system whose origin is located at a point keeping a
specified distance from the tool. The following absolute instruction will refer to the coordinates
in the workpiece coordinate system.
56
G92
X25.0
Z23.0:
As shown in the above program, G92 is used at the beginning of the block to ensure the nose
of the tool coincides with the origin of the program.
G92 X600.0 Z1200.0:

As shown in the above diagram, G92 will confirm that the tool point coincides with the origin of
the program and execute an absolute instruction. The standard point is positioned at the
specified point. To position the nose of the tool to the specified point, the deviation of the nose
of the point from the reference point shall be corrected by tool length compensation.
Note 1: In the coordinate system established with G92 instruction in offset mode, the coordinates of
the tool in specified position does not include offset.
Note 2: Tool radius compensation is temporarily disabled by G92 instruction.
3.5.13 Workpiece coordinate system (G54G59)

G92 instruction is not used to establish a workpiece coordinate system. However, the
machines six exclusive coordinate systems may be preset and selected with G54 and G59.
G54Workpiece coordinate system 1
57

The six coordinate systems are determined by setting all axes distances (the offset of the zero
point of workpiece) from the reference point to their respective points.
Example: G55
G00
X100.0
Z20.0:
X15.5
Z25.5:
In the above example, it is positioned in the workpiece coordinate system 2 (X =100.0, Z =20.0)
and (X =15.5, Z =25.5).
Workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 are established after switching on and returning from the
reference point. G54 coordinate system is enabled upon switching on.
Note 1: When the range of the workpiece zero point offset of all axes compensated by external data
inputting (optional) is 00.7999mm or 00.7999mm, check the machine instruction
manual for the function.
Note 2:When G54G59 are used, the coordinate system is not set with G92 but established with G92.
G54G59 are used to move the coordinate system. G54G59 must not be incorporated with
G92 except the special situation that G54G59 are used to move the coordinate system.
58
When the tool is positioned at (200, 160) in G54 mode, G92 X10 Y100; The specified
workpiece coordinate system 1 (X, Y) is moved by vector A. However, all other workpiece
coordinate systems shall concurrently offset vector A.
Note 3: When automatic coordinate system setting is not selected, proper parameter values shall be
set (309 APXAP4).
3.5.14 To change workpiece coordinate system by program instruction

When the number of workpiece coordinate system becomes inadequate (although 6 are ready)
or when they are to be moved as required, we move them through programming instructions.
G10L2P P XYZ r :
Where P=16: the 16 X, Y, Z, r, (r, = one of A, B, C, U, V and W) of the corresponding

coordinate system: the workpiece zero offsets of all axes.
Note: External workpiece origin offset may be changed by setting P= 0.
3.5.15 Automatic setting of a coordinate system

A coordinate system may be set in the preset parameter number (375PPRTMX441PPRTI5)
when returning to the reference point for the first time after switching on, namely it functions as
that G92 automatically sets a coordinate system at the reference point.
Note: If workpiece coordinate system setting function is enabled, it is necessary to set No.
375378 and 400 parameters to 0 or No. 379382 and 441 parameters to 0. If they are not
set to 0, the workpiece coordinate system (16) will offset.
3.5.16 To switch between Inch and metric systems (G20, G21)

Inputting in metric or Inch system may be selected using G codes.
59
System of units
G codes
Minimum input unit
Inch (Inch system )
G20
0.0001inch
mm (metric system)
G21
0.001mm
Both the G codes must be instructed with a single block before the start of the program and
setting of the workpiece coordinate system.
N10
G20:
N20
G92
XY:
The following items changes with the G codes:

(1) The feedrate instructed by F;
(2) Position indication;
(3) Offset
(4) The unit of the scale of the manual pulse generator;
(5) The travel of incremental feed;
(6) A part of parameters
Note 1: Once it is switched on, it enters into the state before power off.
Note 2: Switching between G20 and G21 in the midway of a program is not allowed.
Note 3: When the system of the units of the machine differs from that of the program, the maximum
deviation is 1/2 of the minimum traveling unit. The deviation value does not accumulate.
3.5.17 Storage travel limit (G22, G23)

The movable range of the tool may be restricted by the two means below.
(The tool does not enter the shadow area.)
Storage travel limit 1:

The outside of the boundary set by parameter is an exclusion area. As a rule, it shall not
change once it is set by manufacturer. Therefore it is set at the maximum travel of the machine
and is equivalent to the current so-called software limit.
60
Storage travel limit 2:

The outside or inside of the boundary set by parameter or instruction is an exclusion area.
Whether it is inside or outside is determined by parameter No.009 BIT6(RWL).
G22 instruction is used to stop the tool from entering the exclusion area and G23 to cancel the
restriction.
The instruction below is used to establish or change an exclusion area.
G22 XYZIJK:
XI, YJ, ZK
XI2000 (Minimum instruction increment)
YJ2000 (Minimum instruction increment)
ZK2000 (Minimum instruction increment)
The points A and B in the figure below shall be involved during parameter setting.
X1X2, Y1Y2, Z1Z2

X1X22000 (Minimum instruction increment)
Y1Y22000 (Minimum instruction increment)
Z1Z22000 (Minimum instruction increment)
If the exclusion area is set by parameter, X, Y, Z, I, J and K shall be set by the minimum travel
unit (input unit) of the mechanical system with the reference as its origin.
If the exclusion area is set by G22 instruction, X, Y, Z, I, J and K shall be set by the minimum
travel unit (input unit) of the mechanical system with the reference as its origin. Then the
programming data is changed into the numerical value in the minimum traveling unit and the
value is set a parameter.
61
Since it is necessary to detect which part of the tool nose or clamp has entered the exclusion
area, the computing methods for X, Y, Z, I, J and K are different.
If point A is detected to enter into the exclusion area, a shall be set. If point B is detected to
enter into the exclusion area, b shall be set.
When point A is used to detect the nose of the tool, it is safe without changing the settings of
the tool each time if the tool of varied lengths are set to the required length.
Overlapped setting is possible for the area.
Note 1: All limits will become effective after power on and manual return from the reference point or
G28 completes automatic return from the reference point.
Note 2: If the reference point is within the exclusion area of all limits, the system immediately gives an
alarm when the storage travel limits are valid after power on and manual return from the
reference point. (For storage limit 2, only G22 mode is applicable.)
When G23 is changed to G22 and the tool is in the exclusion area, the system will give an
alarm in the next block.
Note 3: Pressing the emergent stop switch to cancel the restrictions and move the tool out of the
exclusion area in G23 mode when the tool remains still in the exclusion area under the
conditions of Note 2. The settings shall be changed if they are set incorrectly. Then the tool
returns from the reference point.
Note 4: Since the axis without the function of returning from the reference point, the axis does not give
an alarm in the exclusion area.
Note 5: For the setting of the exclusion area, the area is described as follows:
When the exclusion area is beyond the specified area, all the areas are movable.
62
When the exclusion area is within the specified area, all the areas are restricted for movement
(in G22 mode).
Note 6: The settings beyond the travel of the machine are not necessary.
Note 7: The tool may reversely move provided that the tool is in the exclusion are and an alarm is
given.
Note 8: Even the sequence of the coordinates of the two points In the set area are set incorrectly, the
rectangle with the two points as its acmes can also be created into a limit area.
Note 9: G22 and G23 shall be instructed in single blocks.
Note 10: Storage travel limit 2 cannot be used for additional axes.
3.5.18 Skip function (G31)

The G31 followed by a move instruction is capable of instructing linear interpolation as G01. If
skip signal is input form the outside in the midway of the instruction, the remaining part of the
instruction will be interrupted and the next block will be executed.
G31 instruction is one-off and only valid in the instructed block.
The movement after skip signal depends on whether the next block is incremental or absolute.
1)
The next block is an incremental instruction.

To make incremental movement from the break point:
Example: G31
G91
X100.0:
Y50.0:
The next block is an absolute instruction (only one axis)

The axis instructed in one block moves to the instructed position while those not instructed
remain in the positions input by skip signal.
Example: G31
G90
X200.0:
Y100.0:
63
2)
The next block is an absolute instruction (to instruct 2 axes)

The next block moves to the instructed position wherever skip signal is input.
Example: G31
G90
X200.0:
X300.0
Y100.0:
The feedrate of a block is specified G31with No. 306 (SKPF) parameter in the following two
ways:
a) Feedrate is specified with F codes (may be specified in the foregoing blocks or G31 block)
b) No. 342 parameter is set by No. 342 parameter.
The coordinates when skip signal is switched on are stored in the system variables #5061 to
#5065 of the user macro. Therefore they may be used in macros.
#5061X coordinates
#5062Y coordinates
#5063Z coordinates
#5064The 4th coordinates
#5065The 5th coordinates
The skip function may be used to the situation with unknown travel. Therefore, it is applicable
in the following conditions.
a)
For the standard-dimension feed of the milling machine;
b)
To enable tool contact pick-off to measure
Note 1: Once G31 instruction is performed in the active state of tool compensation C, No. 035 alarm
64
will be given. Tool compensation shall be canceled with G40 before G31 instruction.
Note 2: If the feedrate instructed by G31 is related to the speed set by parameter, it will have a bearing
upon parameter setting in no-load operation.
Note 3: If the feedrate instructed by G31 is related to the speed set by parameter, the automatic
acceleration/deceleration will be invalid. In this way the accuracy of automatic measurement in
skip function applications is improved.
3.6 Compensation
3.6.1 Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49)
Using G43
ZH; or
G44
G43
H;
G44
The end position of the axis Z move instruction is moved forward or reversely by setting the
offset set in the offset storage. Using this function may set the difference between the tool
length estimated in programming and the actual one in service into the offset storage to
achieve compensation without changing the program. H instructs the offset set into the offset
storage by instructing the offsetting direction with G43 and G44.
Offsetting direction
G43
Offset in + direction
G44
Offset in - direction
Whether in the situation of absolute or incremental instruction, the offset specified by H codes
and saved in the offset storage is added to the coordinates of the end point of the spindle move
instruction for G43 and detracted from it for G44. The calculated coordinates become the end
point of the coordinates. It may be illustrated in the same way when axis Z move instruction is
ignored as follows:
G43
G91
ZOH;
G44
The offset is positive for G43 and negative for G44.
G43 and G44 are modal G codes and, when instructed, are always valid if no G codes in the
same group are coded. G 43 or G44 code is valid upon power on depends on parameter setting.
Offset specification
65
Offset number is specified with H codes. The offset set in the offset storage of the number is
added to or detracted from the programming value of axis Z. Offset number may be specified
with H00 or H200. The number of the D codes using tool radius compensation hits 32 (It is also
possible to choose 64, 99 or 200).
Offset corresponds to offset number and may be preset in the offset storage through MDI/LCD
or communicating operations. The setting range of the offset is as follows:
Offset
Input in mm
Input in inch
0mm999.999mm
0 inch999.999inch
The offset of the corresponding offset No.00, i.e. H00 is generally 0. The offset corresponding
to H00 shall not be set.
Cancellation of tool length compensation
To cancel tool length compensation, G49 or H00 shall be instructed. Once H00 or G49 is
instructed, canceling operation will be performed.
(1)
Example of tool length compensation (machining of #1, #2 and #3 holes)
H01= 4.0 (Offset)

N1
G91 G00
X120.0
Y80.0
N2
G43
Z-32.0
H01
N3
G01
Z-21.0
F1000
N4
G04
P2000
N5
G00
Z21.0
;
66

N6
X30.0

Y-50.0
N7
G01
Z-41.0
N8
G00
Z41.0
Y30.0
N9
X50.0
N10
G01
N11
G04
N12
G00
N13
Z-25.0
Z57.0
X-200.0
;
P2000
H00
Y-60.0
Note 1: When offset is changed due to the change of the offset number, the new offset will not be
added to the original offset.
H01Offset 20.0
H02Offset 30.0
G90
G43
Z100.0
H01: Z will hit 120.0
G90
G43
Z100.0
H02: Z will hit 130.0
Note 2: D codes cannot be used for tool length compensation. Other axes except axis Z may employ
tool length compensation.
Which axis will be added with tool length compensation is instructed with axis address in the
same block with G43 and G44
G43
H:
(: any axis)
G44
Tool length compensation can only be added to an axis at one time. Therefore the system
gives an alarm in the following instructions. To switch an axis for tool length compensation, it is
necessary to cancel the one-off tool length compensation.
G43 ZH:
G43 XH: (Alarm)
3.6.2 Tool offset (G45G48)

The moving distance of the specified axis may be zoomed in or zoomed out by the numerical
values set in the offset storage through instructions G45G48. G codes and their functions
are listed in Table 6.2.
67

Table 6.2: Tool offset and G codes
G codes
Function
G45
To zoom in an offset
G46
To zoom out an offset
G47
To zoom in an offset by twice
G48
To zoom out an offset by twice
These G codes are modal and only valid in instructed blocks.

These amounts of compensation are instructed by D or H codes and remain unchanged once
they selected before selecting other amounts of compensation.
Whether tool offset compensation uses H or D codes is set by parameter No.010 BIT3
(OFSD).
In offset storage, the shape of the workpiece serves as the path of the tool for programming
during the setting of the radius of the tool.
Range of offset
Input in metric system
Input in Inch system
Offset value
0mm999.999mm
099.9999
Offset value
00999.9990
00999.9990
The offset function is valid for an additional axis (the 4th axis).
When the offset number is 00 (H00 or D00), the offset will also be 0.
Zooming is made in the moving direction of the tool of the axis. When the absolute value
instructs, the tool starts to move to the position instructed by the instructions in the blocks of
G45G48 and makes zooming compensation.
1)
G45 instruction (only to lengthen the offset)
Move instruction value

Offset
68
Actual travel
a) Move instruction +12.34 offset +5.67
c) Move instruction offset +5.67
2)
b)
d)
Move instruction+12.34 offset
Move instruction -12.34 offset -5.67
G46 instruction (only to reduce by one offset)

If the sign of the offset is reversed in G45 instruction, it will be identical with G46.
a) Move instruction+12.34 offset+5.67(b)(d) (omitted)
3)
4)
G47 instruction (lengthen the offset by twice)

a) Move instruction+12.34 offset+1.23
b) Move instruction+12.34 offset-1.23
c) Move instruction-12.34 offset+1.23
d)
G48 instruction (to reduce the offset by twice)

69
Move instruction-12.34 offset-1.23
If the sign of the offset is reversed in G47 instruction, it will be identical with G48.
a) Move instruction+12.34 offset +1.23(b)(d) (omitted)
When offset is moved in the mode of incremental instruction (G91), the instruction for travel will
be 0. No movement will be performed if the travel instructed in the mode of absolute instruction
(G90).
Offset +12.34 (offset No. 01)
NC instruction G91 G45 X0 D01: G91 G46 X0 D01: G91 G45 X-0 D01 G91 G46 X-0 D01:
Equivalent
instructions
X12.34
X-12.34
X-12.34
X12.34:
Note 1: If one of G45G48 is specified for 2-axis gang control, the tool offset is valid for both axes.
For G45
Move instruction X1000.0
Offset +200.0
Y5000.0
Offset No. 02
Programming instruction G45
G01
X1000.0
Y500.0
D02:
Note 2: During bevel machining, it is subject to overcutting or under-cutting if tool offsetting is

performed.
70
G01 X
G47 X
Y
F
Y
G01 G45 X
X Y
G45 Y
F D
Note 3: When the offset is higher than the move instruction value, the actual moving direction of the
tool will be contrary to the programmed direction.
Example: G46 X2.50;

(Incremental instruction)
Offset+3.70
Equivalent to X-1.20:
Note 4: For arc interpolation (G02, G03), only the tool offset under the conditions of 1/4 and 3/4 circles
may be resulted by G45 to G48 instructions. That is, tool compensation is only available for 1/4
and 3/4 arc instructions.
Example 6.21: Offset +20.0, Offset No. 01
71
Example of programming:
(G91)
G45
G03
X-70.0
Y70.0
I-70.0 D01:
Example 6.22: The tool position offset during arc interpolation

N1
G46 G00
XYD;
N2
G45 G01
YF;
N3
G45 G03
XYI;
N4
G01
X;
Example 6.23: The program with tool offset

Tool radius compensation
72
1. G91
G46
G00
X80.0
2. G47
G01
X50.0
F120;
Y30.0
Y50.0 D01;
3. Y40.0;
4. G48
X40.0;
5. Y-40.0;
6. G45
X30.0;
7. G45
G03
X30.0
8. G45
G01
Y20.0;
9. G46
X0;
10. G46
G02
X-30.0
11. G45
G01
Y0; Only to move the offset in the direction of -Y
12. G47
X-12.0;
13. G47
Y-80.0;
14. G46
G00
X-80.0
J30.0;
Only to move the offset in the direction of -X

Y30.0 J30.0;
Y-50.0;
Note 5: Only axis Z moves an offset if H codes are used in G43 or G44 mode. Therefore, it is
recommended not to use H codes but D codes in the offsets of G45G48 as much as
possible.
Note 6: G45G48 modes are ignored in fixed cycles. Hence G45G48 shall be programmed before
instructing fixed cycles and they must always be cancelled after fixed cycles.
73
Note 7: Tool offset modes (G45 G48) are not allowed in the modes of G41 or G42 (tool
compensation); otherwise P/S alarm will be given (alarm no. 36).
3.6.3 Tool radius compensation (G40G42)

3.6.3.1 Tool radius compensation function
As shown in the figure below, to machine the workpiece indicated by A in the figure with a tool
of radius R, the corresponding tool center must always be B path keeping a distance of R away
from A. Moving the tool from the workpiece by one distance in this way is called offsetting. The
tool compensating function is used to determine the path (i.e. offset) of the tool that has moved
for a distance.
Therefore, programmer may use the tool offset mode to program the outline of a workpiece.
Furthermore, if tool radius (offset) is measured and set in the NC during machining, the tool
path will be offset (path B) regardless the programmed path.
Two types of tool compensation (B and C) are available. This section only describes type C.
The difference between B and C is as follows:
In the mode of type B tool compensation, inward offsetting cannot be performed for angles
equal to or less than 90. In this condition, make sure to program it into a proper inward arc.
3.6.3.2 Offset (D codes)

At most 32 amounts of offset may be set in the offset storage (64, 99 and 200 are optional)
(including 32 amounts of offset for tool length compensation and tool position offsetting). The
offset depends upon the D instructed in program and the number of digits is set with MDI/LCD.
The range of programmable offsets is as follows:
Offset
Input in mm
Input in inch
0mm ~ 999.999mm
0inch ~ 99.9999inch
The offset corresponding to No. 00 or D00 is always 0.

So the offset corresponding to D00 need not be set.
74
3.6.3.3 Offset vector

Two-dimensional offset vector is equal to the vector of the offset specified by D codes. It is
determined in the control unit and its direction is duly corrected in accordance with tool feed of
all axes. The offset vector (hereafter called vector) is generated in the control unit so as to
determine the amount of tool offsetting movement and calculate the actual path that the tool
radius offsets from the programmed path. The offset vector will be cleared away by reset.
The vector changes with the movement of the tool. It is very important to know the status of the
vector during developing a program. Please read the following sections and carefully make
certain how the vector is generated.
3.6.3.4 Plane selection and vector

The calculation of offset is performed in the plane established by G17, G18 and G19, which is
called offset plane. For instance, (X, Y) or (I, J) is used to calculate the offset as well as vector
when XY plane is selected. The coordinates of the axes beyond the offset plane are not under
the influence of offset but follows instructed value in the instruction.
In 3-axis gang control, the tool path projected on the offset plane is compensated.
Plane selection switching shall be performed in the mode of offset cancellation. No. 027 alarm
will be given if plane selection switching is performed in offset mode.
G codes
Offset plane
G17
XY plane
G18
ZX plane
G19
YZ plane
To set an offset plane with an additional axis, it is necessary to preset which one in axes X, Y
and Z that the additional axis parallels with by parameter. When none axis it parallels with, the
offset plane cannot be defined.
While setting the offset plane with an additional axis, the additional axis shall be instructed at
the same time with the G codes, i.e. G17, G18 and G19.
a) G17 X_Y_; XY plane
b) G17 U_Y_; UY plane (U parallels with axis X)
c) G17 Y_; XY plane
d) G17; XY plane
e) G17 X_Y_U_; Alarm
f)
G18 X_W_; XW plane (W parallels with axis Z)
3.6.3.5 G40, G41 and G42

G40, G41 and G42 are used to specify the cancellation and generation of a tool radius
75
compensation vector. To determine the direction of an offset vector and the moving direction of
the tool, G40, G41 and G42 may be instructed concurrently with G00, G01, G02 or G03.
G codes
Function
G40
G41
Tool compensation, left
G42
Tool compensation, left
G41 or G42 instruction allows the system to enter into offset mode.
G40 instruction allows the system to enter into cancellation mode.
An example of offsetting course will be illustrated in the following figure.
Start-up block : Offset cancellation mode becomes offset mode (G41) in this block. The tool
center is offset at the end point (P1) of the block by the radius perpendicular to the lower
section of program path (from P1~P2). The tool compensating value is specified by D07, i.e.
offset No.7. G41 means that the tool offsets to the left.
After workpiece shape P1P2P8P9P1 programming and starting, the system
automatically performs tool compensation.
In block , the tool returns to the point of origin (offset cancellation) through G40. The tool
center moves (from P9P1) normal to the programmed path at the end point of the 10th block.
G 40 instruction (program cancellation) shall be instructed at the end point of the program.
Example of program for tool compensation C:
76
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
N1 G90 G17 G00 G41 D07 X250.0 Y550.0:
(The offset is preset in D07 by MDI)
N2 G01 Y900.0 F150:

N3 X450.0:
N4 G03 X500.0 Y1150.0 I-600.0 J250.0:
N5 G02 X900.0 I200.0 J150.0:
N6 G03 X950.0 Y900.0 I250.0 J0:
N7 G01 X1150.0:
N8 Y550.0:
N9 X700.0 Y650.0:
N10 X250.0 Y550.0:
N11 G00 G40 X0 Y0:
3.6.3.6 Details about tool radius compensation C

The tool radius compensation C is described in detail as follows.
77

(1)
Cancellation mode
The system will be in offset cancellation mode after power on, reset or completion of the
program by executing M02 and M03.
In cancellation mode, the vector is always 0 and the tool center path coincides with the
programmed path. It shall be ended up by means of cancellation at the end of the program.
When the program ends in offset mode, positioning the tool at the end point of the program
cannot be performed and the position of the tool will offset from the end position by a vector.
(2)
Start-up
When a block satisfying all the following requirements is executed in cancellation mode, the
system will be in offset mode. This block is called start-up block.
a) G41or G42 has been instructed and the system is in the state of G41 or G42.
b) Tool compensation number is not D00.
c) Axes (other than axes I, J and K) (even one axis is acceptable) in the offset plane is
allowable and their travel is not 0.
In a start-up block, arc instructions (G02, G03) shall not be used; otherwise the NC will gives
No. 34 alarm and stops operation. The NC reads in two blocks. The next block enters into the
tool compensation buffer register (the contents of the register cannot be displayed) once the
first block is read in and executed.
In addition, two blocks in succession are read in when the system is in single block mode. The
block is firstly read in stops after execution. As a rule, two blocks are normally read in after that.
Hence there are three blocks in the NC, namely the executing block and the next two blocks.
Note: The meaning of the so-called interior angle and other terms are as indicated in the
following figure. The intersection angle of the move instructions of two blocks is called interior
angle when its angular degree on the workpiece side is above 180 and exterior angle when
it falls within 0180.
(i) To machine along the interior side

Straight line Straight line
78
Where:
S indicates the dwell point of single block.
L indicates line motion.
C indicates arc motion.
Straight line Arc
(ii) When the tool machines one side of an obtuse angle, the start-up and cancellation of a
(90180) tool path have the noses A and B and they are selected by parameter No.011
BIT1 (SUPM).
Type A: (Straight line Straight line)
(Straight line Arc)
79
Type B: (Straight line Straight line)
Intersection point is a point at which the offset paths determined by two blocks in
succession intersect.
(Straight line Arc)
The intersection point in the above diagram is a point where the offset paths of the r length
of two blocks.
(iii) To machine an acute angle (90exterior)
Type A (Straight line Straight line)
(Straight line Arc)
80
Type B (Straight line Straight line)
(Straight line Arc)
Note: For Type B, compensation shall be performed as follows when the tool moves on one
side of a sharp angle less than 10.
(3)
Offset mode
In offset mode, arc interpolation may offset even linear interpolation is instructed.
In offset mode, the blocks without move instruction but miscellaneous function, hold, etc
cannot be instructed in two blocks in succession; otherwise it is subject to undercutting or
overcutting.
81
Offset plane cannot be changed in offset mode; otherwise the system will stop after No. 37
alarm.
(i) Situations of interior angle (180)

Straight line Arc
Arc Straight line
Arc Arc
82
For the condition of straight line to straight line, a narrow and closed angle less than 1 is
machined. Now its offset vector becomes extremely big.
User may follow the above procedures for the conditions of arc to straight line, straight line
to arc and arc to arc.
(ii) To machine an obtuse angle along the exterior side (90180)
Straight line Arc
83
Arc Straight line
Arc Arc
(iii) To machine an acute angle along the exterior side

Straight line Arc
84
Arc Straight line
Arc Arc
Note 1: Special cases

When the end point of an arc is not on it
85
If there is a lead on the arc as shown in the diagram, use the arc center connecting to the
end point of the arc as the center of a circle to make a imaginary arc. Make a vector for
compensation by using the imaginary arc as the arc of tool compensation. Its result varies
from the tool center path that uses the arc lead a lead for tool compensation.
Follow the same procedures for the situation of arc arc.
The situation without an internal intersection point
As shown in the diagram below, arc intersection point exists on compensation path when
the offset is small. Increase in the offset eliminates the intersection point. Now the system
gives No. 33 alarm and stops at the end point of the previous block.
As shown in the diagram below, arc intersection point P exists on compensation paths of arc A
and arc B when the offset is small. Increase in the offset eliminates the intersection point. For
that center coincides with the origin or end point, the system gives No. 38 alarm and stops
program execution at the end point of the previous block.
G41 mode
N5 G01 X1000;
N6 G02 X1000 I0 J0;
N7 G03 Y-1000 J-1000;
(4)
Offset cancellation
When executing a block satisfying one of the following requirements in offset mode, the
system enters into tool cancellation mode. The function of the block is called offset
cancellation.
(a) G40 is instructed
(b) D00 is instructed as a tool compensation number.
(G02) and (G03) cannot be instructed when offset cancellation is performed. If they are
instructed, No. 34 alarm will be sent out and NC will stop.
When a block is read in offset cancellation mode, two blocks including that stored in the buffer
(not display) for tool compensation will be executed. In single block mode, a block is read in
86
and executed before stop. The next block is read in and executed by pressing the START
button.
After the control system enters into cancellation mode, the next executed block will be normally
saved in the buffer register rather than typed in the tool compensation buffer register.
(a) To machine an interior angle (180)
Arc Straight line
(b) To machine an exterior angle (90180, obtuse angle)

(i) Type A
Straight line Arc
87
(ii) Type B
Arc Straight line
(c) To machine the exterior angle of an acute angle (90)

(i) Type A
88
Arc Straight line
(ii) Type B
Arc Straight line
Note: For the situation of type B, compensation is performed as follows when the tool machine
an acute angle below 10 by means of straight line to straight line from the exterior side:
89
(5)
G codes for tool compensation in offset mode

It is possible set an offset vector in relation to the direction of the foregoing block by individually
instructing G codes (G41, G42) for tool compensation in offset mode so as to create a correct
angle. It is independent of the inner wall or outer wall to be processed.
Correct arc motion cannot be performed provided that the codes (G41, G42) are included in an
arc instruction.
To reverse the direction of compensation through the G codes (G41, G42) for tool
compensation, refer to Note 2: To change offsetting direction in offset mode.
Arc Straight line
Note 2: Change offsetting direction in offset mode.

Offsetting direction is identified with the G codes (G41 and G42) for tool compensation and
offset signs as follows:
Offset signs
G codes
90
G41
Offsetting to the left
Offsetting to the right
G42
Offsetting to the right
Offsetting to the left
In special cases, offsetting direction can be changed by switching between G41 and G42 in
offset mode. However, it cannot be changed for the start-up block and the block that follows. In
the situation of changing offsetting direction, the concepts of interior side and exterior side are
canceled to adapt to all conditions. The amounts of offset are assumed to be positive in all the
following examples.
(Straight line Straight line)
(Straight line Arc)
(Arc Straight line)
91
(Arc Arc)
When a path with offset has not intersection point:

If the switch between G41 and G42 is performed and there is no intersection point of offset
path from block A to block B, a vector perpendicular to the programmed direction will be
established at the point of origin of block B.
92
a) Straight line Straight line
b) Straight line Arc
c) Arc Arc
The situation in which the length of the tool center path caused by tool compensation:
Generally the above condition will not arise. It is only possible when G41and G42 is switched
or G 40 is instructed with address I, J and K.
93
In the above situation, the tool center path does not go around the circle for one turn but only
makes arc motion along P1P2. Its cause will be described in the alarm caused by
interference verification. If you want the tool to make movement along the full circumference,
make sure to instruct the circumference by sections.
(6)
The cancellation of temporary offset and execution of the following instructions in offset mode,
cancellation of temporary offset will be triggered. Then the system will be automatically
restored to offset mode.
Refer to Section 6.3.6 (4) Offset cancellation and Section 6.3.6 (2) Start-up for the details of
the above operations.
(a) G28 Automatic return to reference point
If G28 is instructed in offset mode, offset will be cancelled at the intermediate point. When
the reference point is reached, the offset mode will be automatically restored.
If offset vector is maintained at the intermediate point, the NC will zero the vector of all
axes returned to reference point.
(b) G29 Automatic return from reference point

If G29 is instructed in offset mode, the offset will be cancelled at the intermediate point and
then automatically restored in the next block.
To directly instruct G29 after G28:
94
The situations rather than that G29 is directly instructed after G28:
(7)
The instruction for temporary cancellation of an offset vector

In the offset mode, offset vector shall be cancelled and then it will be automatically restored if
G92 (absolute zero programming).
In this case, offset cancellation will not be performed. The tool directly moves to the point that
is specified to cancel its offset vector from the intersection point, and directly moves to the
intersection point when the offset mode is restored.
(G41 mode)
N5
G01
N6
X3000
Y7000:
X3000
Y6000:
N7
G92
X1000
Y2000:
N8
G01
X4000
Y8000:
Note: SS indicates the points at which tool stops twice in single block mode.
(8)
The blocks without tool movement

The following blocks are free from tool movement. The tool does not move even tool radius
compensation is valid in these blocks.
95
M05; M code input

S21;
.S code input
G04
X1000;
G22
X100000; Machining area setting
G10
P01 X100; Offset setting
.Dwell time
Not move
(G17) Z2000; .The movement beyond offset plane

G90; Only G codes
G91
X0; Offset is 0
a) The situations in which a block is instructed during start-up

If a block without tool movement is instructed at the origin of the program, it does not
generate offset vector.
G04
G91
N6
N7
N8
N9
X1000.0
Y1000.0;
G41 X0;
Y1000.0;
X1000.0
Y1000.0;
b) The situations in which a block is instructed in offset mode

When a single block without tool movement is instructed in offset mode, its vector and tool
center path are the same as when the block is not instructed (refer to Section 6.3.6 (a):
Offset mode). The block is executed at the stop point of the single block.
When the travel is 0, however, the tool movement of the block is identical with when more
than a block without tool movement is instructed. It is specifically described as follows:
96
More than 2 blocks without tool movement cannot be specified in succession; otherwise a
vector which has a length equal to the offset and direction perpendicular to the moving
direction of the tool in the previous block will be generated, thereby causing overcutting.
Note 4: SSS means that the tool operated by a single block stops here for three times.
c) When the block is instructed along with offset cancellation
When a block without tool movement and offset cancellation are specified at one time, its
vector whose length is equal to the offset is generated in the direction normal to the tool
movement of the previous block. The vector will be cancelled in the next move instruction.
N6
N7
N8
(9)
G91 X100.0
G40:
X100.0 Y0:
Y100.0:
When G40 and the one among I, J and K that is in the offset plane are instructed and the
previous block mode is G41 or G2.
When the above instruction is performed in the offset mode, it will become the following
condition with G17 plane as an example. Analogies may be drawn for the situations of other
planes.
Now the direction of the vectors (I, J) that start from the end point of the previous block are
determined by the above instructions. Its offsetting direction is the same as the previous block.
97
(G42
G40
mode)
X X Y Y I J --:
Note 5: Take note that in this situation the NC gets a intersection point of tool path independent
of the specified machined inner wall or outer wall.
Note 6: When it is impossible to get an intersection point, the tool reaches the position normal
to the previous block path at the end of the previous block.
Note 7: When the length of the tool center path is bigger than the circumference:
98
(G41)
N5 G01 G91 X10000:
N6 G02 J6000:
N7 G40 G01 X5000:
Y5000 I100 J100:
In the above situation, the tool center does not go around the circumference but the section of
arc between P1 and P2.
The alarm caused by interference verification is related to the following conditions. (If you want
the tool to go around the circumference, you need to instruct a circumference by sections.)
(10)
Corner movement
When 2 or more vectors are generated at the end point of a block, the tool makes line motion
from one vector to the other.
If these vectors almost coincide, corner movement will not be performed and the following
vectors will be ignored.
If UVx<UV limits or UVy<UV limits, the vectors that follow will be ignored. UV limit shall be
preset by parameter No.069(CRCDL).
If these vectors do not coincide, movement around the angle will be caused. The movement is
included in the blocks that follow.
99
Note 8: If the path of the next block is an arc over a semicircle, however, the above-mentioned
function cannot be achieved.
The cause is as follows:
If the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as follows:

P0P1P2P3 (Circumference)P4P5P6P7
If the distance between P2 and P4 is small, P3 will be ignored. Now the tool path is as follows:
P0P1P2P3P4P5P6P7
The arc cutting instructed by block N6 will be ignored.
(11)
General cautions about compensation

a) To specify offset
The D codes that are specified with an offset number instructs offset.
Once they are specified, the D codes will remain valid until another D code is specified or
they are cleared.
Besides that D codes are used for the offset of tool radius compensation, they are also
intended for specifying the offset of tool position offset. If both tool compensation (G41/G42)
and tool offset (G45G48) are included in a block, No. 36 alarm will be given.
100
b) To change offset
In general, if offset is changed during tool change in offset cancellation mode, the vector of
the end point of the block is fit for the new offset.
c) Positive and negative offsets and tool center path

A negative (-) offset is equivalent to the exchange of G41 and G42 in the program. If
originally the tool center moves along the exterior side of a workpiece, now it will move
along its interior side, vice versa.
The figure below is an example. In general, offset is programmed as a positive value.
When the offset is negative when the tool path is programmed as shown in the Figure (a),
the tool center will move as indicated in (b), vice versa. Therefore machining a female
mould and a male mould may use the same program. The clearance between them may
be adjusted by selecting an offset (it is also applicable if the start-up and cancellation is of
type A.)
d) Overcutting resulting from tool compensation

(i) To machine the inner side of an arc whose radius is less than that of a tool
When the instructed arc radius is less than that of the tool, the system will give No.41
alarm and stop since the offset of the interior side of the tool may lead to overcutting.
During single block operation, however, it is likely to cause overcutting because the tool
only stops when the program ends up. Now the tool movement is similar to the No. 41
101
alarm below.
(ii) To machine a groove smaller than tool diameter

Since that tool compensation forces the tool center path to move in the direction contrary
to the programmed direction may cause overcutting, No. 41 alarm will be given and NC will
stop at the origin of the block.
(iii) To machine a step less than the tool radius

When the program includes a step smaller than the tool radius and it is machined under
circular cutting instruction, the tool center path using normal offset 6.3.6 (3) will become
the reverse programmed direction. Now the first vector will be ignored and the tool moves
the position of the second vector. The tool stops at this point. The program continues to
execute if it is not machining in single block mode.
102
(iv) The startup associated with tool compensation C and the movement in the direction of axis
Z
At the beginning of cutting, tool compensation (generally XY plane) shall be preset at a
distance from the workpiece and then the tool feed by means of movement along axis Z.
Now take note of the following issues if the rapid traverse (positioning) of axis Z shall not
be independent of the cutting feed.
Refer to the following program
N1 G91 G00 G41 X50000 Y50000 D1;
N3 G01 Z-30000 F1;
N6 Y100000 F2;
In the above example, N3 and N6 will also be read in buffer register during execution of
block N1 and the relationship between them will be properly compensated as shown in the
right figure.
Secondly, if N3 (axis Z move instruction) is separated,

N1 G91 G00 G41 X50000 Y50000 D1;
N3 Z-25000;
N5 G01 Z-5000 F1;
103
N6 Y100000 F2;
Since both the move blocks N3 and N5 do not include the XY plane, block N6 cannot enter
into the buffer register when N1 starts execution. As a result, the tool center path is
calculated by the information N1 in the right figure. In this situation, tool vector will not be
generated during start-up, thereby resulting in the overcutting as shown in the right figure.
In this situation, overcutting may be prevented by specifying an instruction of the same
moving direction in the blocks before and after axis Z feed instruction using the above
rules.
N1 G91 G00 G41 X50000 Y40000 D1;
N2 Y10000;
N3 Z-25000;
N5 G01 Z-5000 F1;
N6 Y100000 F2;
(The moving directions of N2 and N6 are identical)
Blocks N2 and N3 are read in the buffer register and correctly compensated according to
the relationship between N1 and N2 during the execution of block N1.
Note 9: Interference verification
Tool overcutting is called interference. Interference verification is a function designed to

precheck tool overcutting. However, not all overcuts can be checked by the function. There
are also some cases that overcutting is not checked.
104
1 The benchmark for overcutting verification

a) In tool compensation, the traveling direction of the tool center path differs from that of sine
path (differ by 90270) .
b) During arc machining, the angle difference between the starting point and end point of the
tool center path extremely varies from that between those of programmed path except the
above state a (more than 180).
Example of state a:
Example of state b:
(G41)
N5 G01 G91 X8000 Y2000 D01:
N6 G02 X3200 Y-1600 I-2000 J-8000 D02:
N7 G01 X2000 Y-5000:
(Corresponding offset of D01: r1 =2000)
(Corresponding offset of D02: r2 =6000)
In the above example, the arc in block N6 is within a quadrant. However, the arc extends to
105
the four quadrants after tool compensation.

2 Precorrection of interference
(a) Vector travel associated with interference
When tool compensation is performed for blocks A, B and C, the vectors V1, V2, V3 and V4
of blocks A and B as well as the V5, V6, V7 and V8 will be created. The vectors close each
other will be first verified. They will be neglected in case of interference. If the vector to be
neglected due to interference is a vector at the end of the angle, it will not be neglected.
The interference verification before vectors N4 and N5 interferenceV4 and V5 are
neglected.
Verify V2 and V6 interference neglect
Verify V2 and V7 interference neglect
Verify V1 and V8 interference not neglect
If no vector interference is found during verification, the verification will stop.
In case block B is an arc, the arc will make line motion if interference arises.
Example 1: The tool makes line motion from V1 to V8.
Example 2: The line motion of the tool is as follows:

Tool path: V1V2V7V8
106
(b) The tool will stop due to alarm if interference arises after correction (a).
If interference arises at the last vector during correction (a) or there is a pair of vectors at
the beginning of verification and interference arises, the system will give No. 41 alarm and
stop after the completion of the previous block.
Though vectors V2 and V5 are neglected due to interference, interference will arise
between V1 and V6. Now the system gives an alarm and stop.
107
3) Verification is performed even actually no interference arises. See the following examples:
(a) Concave depth less than tool compensation
Though actually no interference occurs, the tool stops due to No. 41 alarm because the
direction of tool path after tool compensation differs from that of programmed path.
(b) Groove depth less than tool compensation
It is similar to (a) and the direction of tool path differs from that of programmed path.
(12)
Instructions input through MDI

Compensation is not applicable for the instructions input through MDI. However, the tool path
is as follows after the use of the programmed operations constituted of absolute instructions,
dwell of execution of single block, performing of MDI operations and the restart of automatic
operations.
Under these conditions, the vector at the starting point of the block that follows is translated
while other vectors are created by the next two blocks.
Therefore, compensation is automatically performed from point Pc.
108
When points PA, PB and PC are specified in an absolute instruction, the tool is stopped at the
end point of the blocks PA to PB by the single block function. Now the means for translation are
operated by MDI. Vectors V B1 and V B 2 are translated to V B1 and V B 2 . The VC1 and
VC 2 between PB PC and PC PD need to be recalculated.

Since the vector V B 2 is not to be calculated, compensation will be accurately performed from
point PC .
(13)
Manual inputting interference

Refer to Volume II, Section 4.3.4.3, e), Note 1 for the manual inputting interference during tool
compensation.
(14)
The tool compensation involving with the 4th axis

Tool compensation cannot be performed for the 4th axis because the offset plane involving with
the 4th axis is not provided.
3.6.4 D and H functions

Address D and H are used to specify tool offset and tool compensation. They use the same
number and the same compensation value.
Address D differs from H as follows:
DFor tool diameter compensation (tool diameter compensation and tool position offset)
HFor tool length compensation (tool diameter compensation and tool position offset)
The codes and offsets are input in storage through MDI/LCD panel correspondingly so as to
specify one two-digit code to perform the relevant compensation. The specified usable value is
selected in the following range. No. 30 alarm will be given if a value beyond the range is
specified.
109
The compensation specified by H00 and D00 are always 0. H00 and D00 are made certain
after power on.
The standard number of tool compensation is 32 (0132). When options A, B and C are
selected for the number of tool compensation, they correspond to 64 (0164), 99(0199) and
200 (01200) respectively.
Note 1: Tool compensation in G40, G41 and G42 modes always use D codes. Tool length
compensation (G43, G44, G49) always use H codes. Whether tool offset (G45, G46, G47, and
G48) uses D codes or H codes are specified by parameter No.010 BIT3 (OFSD).
Note 2: When an additional tool offset number B is used, make sure to select a part program to
save/edit B (40m)F (1280m).
Note 3: When an additional tool offset number C is used, make sure to select a part program to
save/edit C (40m)F (1280m).
3.6.5 External tool offset

The function is designed for correction of an offset from the outside. For example, using the
function on the machine side may input a tool offset and add it to the offset corresponding to
the offset number specified by program. In addition, the input value itself may be specified as
an offset.
When the machine is provided with an automatic measurement function for tool and workpiece,
a difference value in relation to the accurate value may be input in the NC as the amount of
correction with the function.
Make sure to operate by following the instruction manual supplied by manufacturer because of
machine manufacturers difference in programming, operating functions and restrictions.
3.6.6 To input offset through program (G10)

The offsets for tool position offset, tool length compensation and tool radius compensation may
be specified by G10 instruction in programming. The instruction has the following format:
G10
PpRr
p: Offset number
r: Offset
Whether the offset is absolute or incremental depends on G90 or G91 mode.
3.6.7 Zooming function (G50, G51)

The zooming of the switch specified in machine program may be performed through instruction.
First the zooming scale shall be enabled in No. 64 parameter.
G51 I
P :
I, J, K: X, Y and Z coordinates in zooming

110
P: Zooming ratio (minimum input incremental: 0.001)

With the instruction, the move instruction that follows is converted by the zooming ratio
specified by P and centered on the point specified by I, J and K.
The conversion mode is cancelled by G50.
G50: Zooming mode cancel instruction
G51: Zooming mode
The zooming range that may be instructed is as follows:
0.001x99.999x (P1P99999)
P1P4: The outline of machine program

P1 P 4: The outline after zooming
P0: Zooming center
If P is not specified, the zooming ratio may also be set by MDI/LCD. For the situations that I, J
and K are omitted, the point instructed by G51 serves as the zooming center.
The zooming can not be used for offset, e.g. tool radius compensation, tool length
compensation and tool position offset.
Note 1: In a single block, G51 shall be specified in G40 mode. G50 may also be specified in offset
mode. G51 must always be cancelled by G50.
Note 2: A position is indicated at coordinates after zooming.
Note 3: If a setting is used as a zooming ratio that does not specify P, the setting will be the zooming
111
ratio specified by G51 and it is invalid for any other instruction to specify the setting.
Note 4: Whether the zooming function of all axes is valid may be set by parameter. For G51 mode, the
function is always valid for the arc radius instructed by R and is dependent of parameter
setting.
Zooming function is always invalid for additional axes.
Note 5: Zooming function is invalid for manual operations, but valid for DNC, automatic operations and
MDI operations.
Note 6: Zooming is not applicable for the following movement in the event that axis Z moves in a fixed
cycle.
* The cutting depth Q and backing of peck drilling cycle (G83, G73).
* The travel of X and Y in finish boring (G76) and reverse boring (G87) cycles
Note 7: G27, G28, G29, G30 and G92 are specified in G50 mode.
Note 8: Rounding of the zooming result may zero the travel. Now the block is considered as an
unmovable block. Therefore, it may affect the tool movement caused by tool compensation
(see Section 6.3.6 (8)).
Note 9: Reset
(a) Reset in G51 mode changes the original programming coordinate to the current
coordinates or zoomed coordinate. Hence the travel after reset differs depending on
whether the instruction is incremental or absolute.
If it is reset at Point B, Point A in the program shall be regarded as the current B. While
executing the move instruction of Point D, the generation of the following movements
depends on whether they are incremental or absolute.
* Incremental
If the travel from Point A to Point D is incremental, D will become the point of destination
on the programmed path and Point D is converted to Point E. The tool moves to Point EY
because it is only a move instruction for axis Y.
112
AD-AD
* Absolute
If Point D is absolute, the tool moves to Point E, which is converted from Point D.
(b) When clearance is made by reset by parameter No.007 BIT3 CLER setting.
After switching from G51 to G50, the tool moves to point D if the move instruction is
incremental (see Fig. A) and to Point D if it is absolute (see Fig. B).
3.7 Cycle Machining Function

3.7.1 External moving function
As instructed by G81XYL, NC sends out external moving function signal once XY
positioning is completed. The machine side performs clamping, drilling and other specific
operations and executes cycles according to the signal. Each positioning operation sends out
the signal before clearance with G80 instruction. Whether G81 will be reset may be set by
parameter No.007 BIT3 (CLER). The system is in G80 mode when it is switched on.
Circular positioning is conducted for L times depending on the numerical value behind the
address L and external moving signal is given after each positioning. External moving signal
will not be sent out when the blocks excluding X and Y are executed. Besides that G81 is used
for external moving function, it can be applied to the following fixed cycles through parameter
No.009 BIT5 (MCF) setting.
113
3.7.2 Fixed cycles (G73, G74, G76 and G80G89)

In general, a fixed cycle may employ a block including G codes instead of the several blocks
for instructing machining operations in order to simplify programming.
At present, two types (A and B) of fixed cycles are available for your selection. Type A may use
G80, G81, G82, G84, G85, G86 and G89 as listed in the table below while Type B all the G
codes in the table.
Refer to Table 7.2 for the summary of fixed cycles.
Drilling operations
Operations in
Backing operations
(-Z direction)
hole bottom
(Z direction)
G73
Intermittent feed
G74
Cutting feed
G codes
G76
Cutting feed
Spindle forward
rotation
Applications
Rapid traverse
High-speed peck
(positioning)
drilling
Cutting feed
Reverse tapping
Finished boring cycle
Oriented
Rapid traverse
spindle stop
(positioning)
Cancellation
Rapid traverse
Drilling cycle
(positioning)
(fixed-point cycle)
Rapid traverse
Drilling cycle
(positioning)
(counterboring)
G80
G81
Cutting feed
G82
Cutting feed
Hold
G83
Intermittent feed
G84
Cutting feed
G85
Cutting feed
G86
Rapid traverse
(positioning)
Spindle reverse
(only for the 2nd group

of fixed cycles)
Peck drilling
Cutting feed
Tapping
Cutting feed
Boring cycle
Cutting feed
Spindle stop
Rapid traverse
Boring cycle
G87
Cutting feed
Spindle stop
G88
Cutting feed
G89
Cutting feed
rotation
Manual operation of
rapid running
Hold, spindle
Manual operation of
stop
rapid running
Hold
Cutting feed
Boring cycle (reverse)
Boring cycle
Boring cycle
Note 1: Whether the signal [(SRV, SSP) fixed cycle I] output by NC or M codes (fixed cycle II) is used
114
to control the reverse rotation and stop of spindle is determined by parameter No.009 BIT7
(FIX2).
Note 2: In G87 mode, different operations are performed for fixed cycle I and II.
A fixed cycle normally consists of the following six operations.
1. Positioning of axes X and Y
2. Rapidly moving to Point R
Operations
3.
Drilling
4. Performing relevant operations at hole bottom

5. Returning to Point R
6. Rapidly moving to initial point
Positioning is performed on XY plane and drilling is conducted in the direction of axis Z. Drilling
in other planes or axial directions is not allowed. This is independent of plane selection G
instruction.
These fixed cycles are specified in three modes with each specified by a special modal G
code.
G90 Absolute!
Data type
G91 Incremental
G98
Initial-point plane
G99
Point-A plane
Plane of return point
115
G73
G74
G76
G80
See Table 7.2.
G81
G89
Note:
Initial-point plane refers to the position of the absolute value in Z direction when fixed cycle
cancellation mode changes to fixed cycle mode.
The data indicated in Fig. 7.2.2 depends on G90 or G91 mode.

G90
G91
Figure 7.2.2: Absolute and increment programming

A During the returning operation, whether the tool returns to Point-R plane or initial-point plane
depends on the setting of G98 or G99. See Fig. 7.2.3.
G98
G99
116
Fig. 7.2.3: Initial-point plane and Point-R plane

The initial point remains constant even touring operations in G99 mode. If the position of
previous return is located in Point-R plane, the starting point is Point R. If the position of
previous return is in initial-point plane, the initial point is used as the starting point.
B After G73, G74, G76 and G81 to G89, specifying the data related to touring may create a block.
The data saved in control unit as modal value through the instruction data and related to the
machining in a fixed cycle shall be instructed in the following format.
G
Hole machining mode
XYZRQPFL:
Hole position data
Hole machining data
Cycle times
Hole machining mode:

G
(See Table 7.2)
Hole position data X, Y:

Hole position is specified by an absolute or incremental value. Whether the selection of tool
path and feedrate will follow group 01 G codes (G02 and G03 are regarded as G01) or
unconditionally follow G00 shall be determined by parameter No.009 BIT3 (FCUT).
Hole machining data:
Z: It is necessary to specify the increment of the distance from point R to hole bottom or the
absolute coordinates of hole bottom. The feedrate of the operation 3 in Fig. 7.2.1 depends
on F codes. Operation 5 feeds at rapid traverse (positioning)rate or the speed specified by
F codes depending on different drilling modes.
R: R specifies the incremental value of the distance from the initial-point plane to point R or
the absolute coordinates of point R. The feedrate in operations 2 and 6 is a rapid traverse
(positioning) rate.
Q: The depth of each machining is specified in G73 or G83 mode and travel value in G76 or
G87 (fixed cycle II) mode. (It is always an incremental value.)
P: To specify the dwell time in hole bottom: The relationship between time and specified value
is similar to G04 instruction.
F: To specify cutting feedrate
Number of repetitions L: L is used to specify the number of repetitions of fixed cycles (Job 1 to
6). It is considered as 1 when L is omitted.
If L=0 is specified, machining will not be performed though the machining data of hole is saved
in the system.
Once a drilling mode (G) is specified, it remains constant until other drilling modes or the
G codes for fixed cycle cancellation are specified. So it needs not to be specified in each block
when the same holes are machined in succession. The G codes for fixed cycle cancellation
are the G codes in G80 or Group 01.
117
Once hoe machining data is specified, they remain constant until the data is changed or fixed
cycle is disabled. Hence you only need to specify all necessary hole machining holes at the
beginning of fixed cycles and change hole coordinate data in fixed cycles.
When necessary, the number of repetitions L shall be specified. The data of L is valid in the
specified blocks. The cutting speed specified by F is maintained even fixed cycles are
cancelled. Hole machining mode and data remain unchanged, but hole position data and
repetitions are cancelled when the control unit is reset during fixed cycles. When the
parameter (CLER) for specifying G80 mode for reset is set, however, hole machining data is
also cleared.
The example of maintaining and canceling the above data is as follows:
G00
XM30:
G81 XYZRFL: The original data Z, R and F of fixed cycles must be

specified. Drilling operation is specified by G81 for L times.
Y: When drilling mode and drilling data are the same as block , G81, Z, R and F may
be omitted. Hole position is moved for Y distance and drilling is performed once in G81
mode.
G82 XPL: Hole position only moves X in relation to . Drilling is performed for L
times in G82 mode. Now the drilling data is used as follows.
Z, R and F Specified in block
G80
XYM05:
Now touring operation will not be performed and all touring data except F codes will be
cleared.
G85 XZRP: Since addresses Z and R are cancelled in block , they shall be
specified once again. Now F codes are identical with block and may be omitted.
Address P is not needed in this block, but it is still saved.
XZ: Hole position has only moved X and now drilling data is used as follows:
ZSpecified in block
RSpecified in block
FSpecified in block
G89 XY: After the positioning movement specified by addresses X and Y, drilling is
performed in G89 mode. Now the drilling data is applied as follows:
ZSpecified in block
RSpecified in block
FSpecified in block
G01
XY:
Now all hole machining modes and hole machining data (except F) are cancelled.
118
All machining means are described as follows:
1 G73 (high-speed peck drilling)

G73 (with G98)
G73 (with G99)
Backing value is set by parameter No.067 (CYCR).

Drilling may be efficiently performed and cutting easily prevented by axis Zs discontinuous
feed. Backing is carried out at rapid traverse (positioning)rate.
(2)
G74 (left-hand tapping cycle)

G74 (with G98)
G74 (with G99)
The instruction specifies that the spindle forward rotate at hole bottom and then perform a
left-hand tapping cycle.
Note: If feedrate override is neglected or feed hold occurs during tapping with G74, machining
will not stop until the fixed cycle is completed.
119
(3)
G76 (Finish boring)

G76 (with G98)
G76 (with G99)
Hold
OSS
Oriented spindle stop (spindle stops at a fixed point)

Tool motion
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Manual feed
d is set by parameter.
Note 1: G76 can be used only when the output M codes set by parameter No.009 BIT7 (FIX2)
120
are used as the output signals for spindle reverse rotation, spindle forward rotation and spindle
accurate stop.
It is possible to accurately and efficiently perform hole machining and not to damage workpiece
surface by stopping the spindle in oriented position at hole bottom and then removing the tool
bit after it offsets for departing machining. Offset is specified by the address Q (always
positive). The minus sign will be neglected if a negative number is used. An offset direction
shall be preset between (X, Y) and (X,Y) by parameter No.022 BIT4,5 (PMXY1, 2).
Note that Q value is modal in a fixed cycle mode and indicates the cutting depth in G73 and
G83.
Even at the hole bottom, address I and J may specify offset for the tool. Axes X and Y moves
using linear interpolation according to parameter No.022 BIT6 (SIJ) setting and replace Q with
the incremental value specified by I and J. Hence they may offset upward in any direction.
Feedrate is identical with the speed specified by F codes. I and J are modal in mode of fixed
cycles. Hole machining can not be performed only by specifying I and J. The instructions are
only used to specify I and J again.
(4)
G80 (To disable fixed cycles)

The instruction disables fixed cycles (G73, G74, G76, G81G89). Then NC starts to perform
normal operations. The data of Point R and Point Z is also disabled, namely the tool does not
travel and other machine data is cancelled.
(5)
G81 (Drilling cycle, fixed-point drilling)

G81 (with G98)
G81 (with G99)
121
(6)
G76 (with G98)

G82 (drilling cycle, boring)
G76 (with G99)
Except that it holds at hole bottom and then retracts, the instruction is similar to G81 (The dwell time is
specified by address P). The accuracy of hole depth is improved because it holds at hole bottom.
(7)
G83 (Peck drilling cycle)
G83 (with G98)
G83 (with G99)
Now the format of the instruction is as follows:

G83
XYZQRF;
Q indicates the cutting depth of each time and always specifies it in incremental value. Rapid
traverse (positioning) is changed into cutting feed at a distance of a millimeter or inch from the
machined position. Q value is specified in positive number. Minus sign is neglected if it is
122
specified with a negative number. Distance d is set by parameter (CYCD).

(8)
G84 (Tapping cycle)

G84 (with G98)
G84 (with G99)
Rapid traverse (positioning)
Cutting feed
The instruction requires the spindle to counterclockwise rotate at hole bottom and perform a
tapping cycle.
Note: Feed override is neglected and it shall not stop until the end of the cycle during the
tapping instructed by G84. It will not be affected even Feedrate occurs at this time.
(9)
G85 (Boring cycle)

G85 (with G98)
G85 (with G99)
The instruction is similar to G84 except that spindle does not rotate reversely at hole bottom.
123
(10)
G86 (Boring cycle)
G86 (with G98)
G86 (with G99)
The instruction is equivalent to G81 except stop at hole bottom and return by rapid traverse.
(11)
G87 (Boring cycle/Reverse boring cycle)
G87 (with G98)
G87 (with G99)
Fixed
cycle I
124

Not use
Fixed
cycle II
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Manual feed
Tool offset
Spindle accurate stop
Fixed cycle (boring cycle)
The control system enters into Feedrate mode when the tool reaches the hole bottom and the
spindle stops. In this condition, the tool may travel by manual means. Any manual operation
may be performed. For the purpose of safety, however, the tool shall be withdrawn from the
hole.
To restart machining, it is necessary to switch to DNC or automatic mode and press the
CYCLE START key. The spindle rotates forward after the tool returns to the position of origin or
Point R through G98 and G99. Then the instruction of the next block is executed.
Fixed cycle II (reverse boring cycle)
Once axes X and Y are positioned, the spindle stops and the tool offset in the direction
contrary to the tool nose and is rapidly positioned at the hole bottom (Point R). Here the tool
returns in the original amount of offset. The spindle starts clockwise and performs machining in
the direction of axis Z until Point Z. It does not suspend even under P instruction. After the
spindle stops here again, the tool backs out from the original offset and moves upward. Then
the tool returns to the origin and backs out in the original offset. The spindle rotates forward
and the next block starts. The offsets and directions of axes X and Y are identical with G76
(Refer to G76 and G87 for the setting of direction.)
Note: Fixed cycle I is set by parameter No.009 BIT7(FIX2) and signals SRV and SSP are used
as the output signals for spindle reverse rotation and spindle stop.
Fixed cycle II is set by parameter No.009 BIT7 (FIX2) and M codes are used as the output
125
signals for spindle reverse rotation, spindle stop and spindle oriented stop.
(12)
G88 (boring cycle)

G88 (with G98)
G88 (with G99)
Except that the spindle stops rotation after pausing at hole bottom, the instruction is similar to
G87 (fixed cycle I).
(13)
G89 (boring cycle)

G89 (with G98)
G89 (with G99)
Though it is similar to G85, the spindle needs to dwell at hole bottom.
3.7.2.1 Repeating a fixed cycle

To repeatedly machine equally spaced holes with the same fixed cycle, it is possible to specify
the number of repetitions with address L, which is up to 9999 and is only valid in some existing
126
block.
G81
XYZRL 5 F;
XY specifies the first machining position in an incremental value (in G91 mode). If the
instruction specifies it in an absolute value (in G90 mode), drilling will be repeatedly performed
at the same point.
In a fixed cycle, the time constant of automatic acceleration/deceleration can be automatically
switched. It is switched to the time constant of rapid traverse (positioning) or cutting feed
depends on all feed motions. After deceleration is completed at the end of the motion, the
system switches to the next operation.
In G98 instruction, however, it returns to Point R from hole bottom at rapid traverse
(positioning)rate and then to the origin without deceleration.
Notes regarding fixed cycles:
Note 1: Spindle rotation function shall be specified with M codes before specifying a fixed
cycle.
ER:
M03:
Spindle forward rotation (clockwise)
Correct
M05:
Spindle stop
Incorrect (so specify M03 or M04 before the block)
Note 2: In the mode of fixed cycle, touring operation may be performed provided that the
position data corresponding to axes X, Y and Z and the 4th axis are specified in the block.
127
Touring cannot be performed if the position data is not specified. It will not be performed even
the dwell instruction (G04 P ; ) is incorporated. If address X is used to specify the dwell time
(G04 X ; ), touring operation will not be performed.
G00
X :
G81
XYZRFPL :
(Not to drill)
F ;
(Not to drill but modify the value of F)
M ;
(Not to drill but perform M function)
G04
P ; (Not to drill; the P data for drilling will not be modified by the instruction)
Note 3: For the fixed cycles G74, G84 and G86 for controlling spindle rotation, the spindle fails
to reach the normal rotational speed before drilling because drilling is continuously performed
when the spacing between holes and the distance from the origin to Point R are relatively short.
In this case, a G04 (HOLD) shall be instructed to insert between all drilling motions. Therefore,
the program below does not specify the number of repetitions with through L.
G00
M;
G86
XYZRF;
G04
P; (Not to drill but to feedrate)
G04
XY;
P; (Not to drill but to feedrate)
Whether it is necessary to perform the operation or not depends on the performance of the
machine. Refer to the manual supplied by the manufacturer of the machine.
Note 4: The above-mentioned fixed cycles may be deleted with G00, G01, G02 or G03. When
G00G03 is instructed in a fixed cycle, the following motions will be carried out.
# indicates 0, 1, 2 or 3.
G0# indicates G00, G01, G02 or G03.
128
G indicates a fixed cycle.

G0# G XYZRQPFL;
(To perform a fixed cycle)
G G0# XYRQPFL;
The tools travel along axes X and Y depends on G0# codes. The values of R, P and L will be
neglected and F codes saved.
G G0# XYZRQPFL;
If 3-axis link function is not provided, the block will cause an alarm.
Note 5: When M codes and a fixed cycle are specified in the same program, M codes and MF
signals will be sent out during the first positioning (Operation 1). The machining of the next
hole will be performed after receiving the signal FIN at the end of the cycle. The M codes and
MF signals are only sent out in the first cycle rather than the cycles that follow provided that the
cycles are provided with L instruction for repeated operation.
Note 6: Tool offset instructions (G45G48) are ignored in the mode of fixed cycles.
Note 7: Tool length compensation (Operation 2 in Fig. 7.2.1) will be performed during the
positioning of Point R if it (G43 or G44) is instructed in the mode of fixed cycles.
Note 8: Cautions of operation
(a) Reset
When the control unit is stopped by pressing the RESET key of EMERGENT STOP
bottom in a fixed cycle, normally touring mode and touring data will remain unchanged.
Fully note this during restarting. Touring mode and touring data may be cancelled by
parameter No.007 BIT3 (CLER).
(b) Single block
When a fixed cycle is performed in the single block mode of operation, the control unit will
stop at the end points of the operations 1, 2 and 6 in Fig. 7.2.1. As a result, it needs to be
started for three times for drilling a hole.
The FEEDRATE lamp illuminates at the end points of Operation 1 and 2. For Operation 6,
if repeated cycles do not end up in the block, it will stop in Feedrate mode or other stop
mode.
(c) Feedrate
Once the FEEDRATE button is pressed during operations 3 to 5 in G74 or G84, the
FEEDRATE lamp will illuminate and the control unit will continue to perform Operation 6
before stop. If Feedrate is available during Operation 6, the operation will immediately
stop.
(d) Feedrate override
Feedrate is fixed at 100% during the fixed cycle G74 or G84.
129
(e) Manual absolute value

The MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is used to switch between the manual operations of G87
(fixed cycle I) and G88 in the two modes below:
ON: Point R and origin are identical with the programming.
OFF: Point R and origin are offset through manual unit.
Note 9: Fixed cycles G74 and G84 may be changed by parameter No.022 BIT2 (FXCD).
The spindle may dwell before forward and reverse rotation using the time instructed by P by
setting the parameter.
It is very necessary when using a dedicated tapping device. Thread machining is performed
through the forward/backward movement caused by the rotary force of the tap during dwell
without the travel of axis Z.
(a) Left-hand tapping cycle G74
G74
XYZRPF;
G74 (with G98)
G74 (with G99)
(b) G84 (Tapping cycle)

G84
XYZRPF;
G84 (with G98)
G84 (with G99)
130
Example 7.2.2: Programming using tool length compensation and fixed cycle.
Example of program
N001 G92 X0 Y0 Z0; Set the coordinate system at the reference point
N002
G90
G00
N003
G42
Z0
N004
S30
M03; Spindle start
N005
G99
G81
R97.0
Z250.0
T11 M06; Tool change
H11; Origin & tool length compensation
X400.0
Y350.0
Z153.0
F120; Drill 1# hole after positioning
N006
Y550.0; Drill 2# hole after positioning and returning to Point R
N007
G98
Y750.0; Drill 3# hole after positioning and returning to the origin
N008
G99
X1200.0; Drill 4# hole after positioning and return to the origin

131
N009
Y550.0; Drill 5# hole after positioning and return to Point R
N010
G98
Y350.0; Drill 6# hole after positioning and return to the origin
N011
G00
X0 Y0 M05; Return to the reference point and stop the spindle
N012
G49
Z250.0
N013
G43
Z0
N014
S20
M03; Spindle starts
N015
G99
G82
R97.0
T15
M06; Tool length compensation and tool change
H15; Origin, tool length compensation
X550.0
P300
Y450.0
Z130.0
F70; Drill 7# hole after positioning and return to Point R
N016
G98
N017
G99
X1050.0; Drill 9# hole after positioning and return to Point R
N018
G98
N019
G00
X0 Y0 M05; Return to the reference point and stop the spindle
N020
G49
Z250.0
N021
G43
Z0
N022
S10
M03; Spindle starts
N023
G85
G99
T31
M06; Cancel tool length compensation and change a tool
H31; Origin, tool length compensation
X800.0
Y350.0
Z153.0
R47.0 F50;
Drill 11# hole after positioning and return to Point R

N024
G91
Y200.0 L2; Drill 12# and 13# holes after positioning and return to Point R
N025
G00
G90
X0 Y0
N026
G49
G91
Z0; Cancel tool length compensation
Z0 M05; Return to the reference point and the spindle stops
M02: Program stops

Note: When the number of repetitions L is programmed in G98/G99, the tool returns from the
first drill hole to the origin (G98) or Point R (G99).
3.7.3 Specifying an origin and Point R in a fixed cycle (G98, G99)

G98 and G99 specifies whether the return point in a fixed cycle is the origin or Point R as
shown in Fig. 7.3 respectively. If the return position of the first fixed cycle is the origin, the
starting point of the cycle will be the origin. If it is at point R, the starting point of the cycle will
be Point R. In general, G99 is employed to drill the first hole while G98 the last. To program the
number of repetitions L, G98 shall be specified for the first hole so that the tool may return to
132
the origin.
G98
G99
Fig. 7.3: Origin and Point R
3.8 Spindle Function (S function), Tool Function (T function),

Miscellaneous Function (M function) and Secondary Miscellaneous
Function (B function)
A numerical value is specified behind address S, T, M or B so that BCD signal or strobe pulse
is transmitted to the NC machine. This is mainly used for the switching function of the
numerically controlled machine.
S codes are used for spindle control, T codes for tool change, M codes for switching all the
functions controlling the machine and B codes for swivel table division. Refer to the application
instructions for these addresses and codes supplied by manufacturer.
When a move instruction is specified in the same block as the codes S, T, M or B, the
instruction shall be executed by one of the following two methods.
(i) The move instruction is executed at the same time as S, T, M or B,
(ii) S, T, M or B function is performed after the move function.
(Example): N1
G01
G91
X50.0 Y50.0
133
M05: (Spindle stop)
Which method shall be selected depends on manufacturers setting. In general, both the two
methods are available for a numerically controlled machine. Refer to the manual supplied by
the manufacture of the machine.
3.8.1 Spindle function (S function)

3.8.1.1 S 2 digits
Spindle speed is controlled by address S and the 2 digits that follow. Refer to the manual
supplied by the manufacture of the machine for details.
Note: When S 4 digits are specified after S 2 digits, the last 2 digits will be valid.
3.8.1.2 S 4 digits
Spindle speed (r/min) is directly specified by the 5 digits following address S. The unit of
spindle speed (up to 30000r/min) is set by the manufacturer of the machine.
3.8.2 Constant surface speed control

When surface speed (the tool speed relative to workpiece) is specified after S instruction, the
constant speed control function always keeps surface speed unchanged with the change of
the tool position and supplies a control voltage corresponding to the calculated spindle speed
so that the spindle may rotate at correct surface speed.
The units of surface are as listed in the table below:
Input unit
Unit of surface speed
M (Metric system)
m/min
Inch (Inch system )
Inch/min
The units of surface speed may vary depending on different manufacturers.
134
3.8.2.1 Instructed methods

The following G codes are specified for the control of constant surface speed.
G code
Meaning
Unit
G96
Constant surface speed control ON
m/min or inch/min
G97
Constant surface speed control OFF
r/min
To exert constant surface speed control, it is necessary to establish a workpiece coordinate

system so that the coordinates of center of the rotation axis are 0 (the axis that exerts constant
surface speed control).
The axis for constant surface speed control may be selected through programming instruction.
1
2
3
4
G96P
P1Constant surface speed control is designated to axis X.

P2Constant surface speed control is designated to axis Y.
P3Constant surface speed control is designated to axis Z.
P4Constant surface speed control is designated to the 4th axis.
P5Constant surface speed control is designated to 5th axis.
For P0 or that no axis is specified, the present concerned axis is predetermined by No. 315
parameter.
Note 1: To set an axis for constant surface speed control by programming, make sure to
specify P (=1, 2, 3, 4 or5). Otherwise the axis set by parameter setting will be under control.
Whenever G96 is set again, P must be always specified. This is independent of whether G96
P is specified before that.
Note 2: The surface speed (S) in G96 is considered as S=0 until M03 or M04 is specified. That
is to say, S function cannot be performed before specifying M03 or M04 [only when parameter
TCW (the 7th digit of No. 010 parameter) is 1].
3.8.2.2 Spindle speed

The specified surface speed or spindle speed may be overridden in 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100,
110 or 120% by the signal from the operation control panel of the machine.
3.8.2.3 Restraint of maximum rotational speed of spindle

During constant surface speed control, the value in rpm following G92 specifies the maximum
rotational speed of spindle.
G92
S:
135
During constant surface speed control, the system will automatically restrain the rotational
speed of spindle to the maximum value if the speed is higher than the programmed value.
3.8.2.4 Rapid traverse (positioning) (G00)

In the rapid traverse (positioning) blocks specified by G00, it is impossible to exert constant
surface speed control by calculating the surface speed in the position of the tool at all times.
However, the control may be achieved by calculating the surface speed from the starting point
to the end point of the block. Machining cannot be carried out in the conditions of rapid
traverse (positioning).
Note 1: Constant surface speed control is disabled (G97) during power on.
Note 2: Spindle override becomes effective when parameter SOV (the 5th digit of No. 010 parameter) is
preset to 1.
Note 3: The maximum spindle speed cannot be preset (or restrained) during power on.
Note 4: The maximum spindle rotational speed is only restrained in G96 mode. It needs not to be
retrained in G97 mode. However, the spindle motor is restrained by No.136 parameter in G97
mode.
Note 5: G92 S0 means that the spindle speed is restrained to 0 rpm.
Note 6: The S value specified in G96 mode is still saved even after it is switched from G96 mode to
G97 mode. The value will be restored when it is returned from G97 mode to G96 mode.
G96
559: (50m/min or 50 inch/min)
G97
S1000:
(1000r/min)
G96
X3000:
(50m/min or 50inch/min)
Note 7: When tool length compensation (G43 or G44) was made earlier, programming coordinates
shall be used to calculate the constant surface speed. When tool position offset (G45G48)
was made, the existing value shall be used to calculate the constant surface speed.
Note 8: When the machine is locked, calculation about constant surface speed shall be made
depending on the change in the coordinates of the axis with constant speed control.
Note 9: Constant surface speed control is also available during thread machining. Therefore, it is
recommended to use G97 instruction to disable constant surface speed control before face
thread and taper thread chasing because servo system does not respond during the change of
spindle rotational speed.
Note 10: Constant surface speed (feed per minute) control mode (G96) is also allowable in G94
mode.
Note 11: When switching from G96 mode to G97 mode, the final spindle rotational speed, in G96
mode, is used as the S codes in G97 mode if S codes (r/min) is predetermined in G97 block.
136

N111
G97
S800:
800r/min
G96
S100:
100m/min
N222
N333 G97:
X r/min
X the spindle rotational speed X rpm in the blocks before N333, alternatively the spindle speed
remains unchanged when the mode has been changed from G96 to G97. ,
The S value newly specified in G96 mode will be enabled when switching from G97 to G96
mode.
If S is not specified, S=0m/min (inch/min).
3.8.3 Tool function (T function)

Tool function is specified by the 2 or 4 digits after address T. The relationship between T codes
and the tool is set by the manufacturer of the machine.
3.8.4 Miscellaneous function (M function)

When 2 digits are set after address M, a 2-digit BCD code and strobe signal will be sent out.
These signals are designed for the ON/OFF control of the functions of the machine. An M code
may be set in a block. When more than two M codes are concurrently set, the last code will be
valid. The setting of M codes may vary depending on different manufacturers of machine.
The following M codes have special meanings.
(1)
M02, M30: End of program
(i)
This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary for recording NC
instructions in storage in communication mode.
(ii) Automatic operation stop and reset of NC unit (It is different depending on
manufacturers).
(iii)
It will return to the starting point of program after the end of the program for M30, and
return to the starting point for M02.
(2)
M00: Program stops

Automatic operation stops after the end of the block with M00. When the program stops,
all modal data remains unchanged as in the operations of a single block. The cycle
operation restarts by setting NC start-up (This may vary depending on different
manufacturers).
(3)
M01: Selection stops

Just like M00, automatic operation stops after the end of the block with M01. The code is
valid only when the SELECTION STOP switch on the operation panel of the machine is
137
pressed.
(4)
M98: Call of subprogram

The code is intended to call a subprogram. Refer Chapter 9 for details.
(5)
M99: End of subprogram

The code indicates the end of a subprogram. It returns to the main program once M99 is
executed. See Chapter 9 for details.
Note 1: The block following M00, M01, M02 or M30 cannot be read in the buffer register.
Similarly, the next block may set the M codes not to make intermediate conversion through 2
parameters. Refer to the section regarding M codes in the manual supplied by the
manufacturer of the machine.
Note 2: Code signal or strobe signal will not be sent out during the execution of M98 or M99.
Note 3: The M codes other than M98 and M99 will be processed by the machine side instead
of the NC unit. Refer to the instruction manual supplied by the manufacturer of the machine.
3.8.5 Secondary miscellaneous function (B function)

Worktable indexing is set by address B and the 3 digits that follow. Different manufacturers
may have different settings for the division value corresponding to B codes.
3.9 Subprogram
When some areas in fixed sequences or those repeatedly appear are included in a program,
these sequences or areas may be saved in storage as subprograms so simplify programming.
A subprogram can be called in automatic mode of operation. A subprogram can also call
another subprogram.
That a main program calls a subprogram is called primary call. Secondary call of subprogram
is performed as follows.
A call instruction can be used to repeatedly call a subprogram. A call instruction may repeat
calling for 9999 times.
138
3.9.1 Creation of a subprogram

Create a subprogram in the following format:
O (: );
;
;
;
M99;
Specify a subprogram number after O (EIA) or : (ISO) at its beginning. M99 is not
necessarily set in a single block at the end of a subprogram.
Example:
X
M99;
Refer to Sections 5.17 to 5.19 for how to save a subprogram in a register.

Note 1: The subprogram number in the preceding block can also be indicated as N
rather than the (:) following O so that NC program may be compatible with other systems.
The system records the numerical value following N as a subprogram number.
3.9.2 Execution of a subprogram

A subprogram will be executed once it is called by a main program or other subprograms.
A subprogram may be called in the following format:
M98
L :
Number of repeated subprogram calls
Subprogram number
A subprogram shall be only repeated once in case of omission of L.

Example:
M98
P1002
L5:
The No.1002 subprogram will be called repeatedly for five times when the instruction is
executed.
The called subprogram instruction (M98 PL) and move instruction may be set in the same
block.
Example:
X1000
M98
P1200;
In the above example, No.1200 subprogram is called after the travel in the direction of axis X.
139
Example:
The executing sequence for a main program to call a subprogram is as follows:
The executive process for a subprogram to call another subprogram is similar to the above
example.
Note 1: M98 and M99 signals are not sent to the machine.
Note 2: If the subprogram number specified by P is not found, No.78 alarm will be given.
Note 3: The M98 P: instruction input through MDI cannot call a subprogram. In this case,
the following program shall be developed in the editing mode and executed with storage.
O
M98 P:
M02:
Note 4: The blocks or single block containing M98 P; M99; are invalid. When the blocks of
M98 and M99 contain the addresses other than O, N, L and P, however, the stop of a single
block will be valid.
3.9.3 Special methods of application

The following special methods of application are available.
3.9.3.1 When a sequence number is specified in address P in the last block of a subprogram, control
cannot return to the next block of the called subprogram in a main program, but to the block
specified by the sequence number set by address P. Yet the main program is only valid in the
storage operation mode.
The time required to return to the main program by this means is longer than that in normal
conditions.
140
3.9.3.2
If M99 is executed in a main program, the control will return to its beginning.
If a /M99; block is inserted in the proper position in the main program, execution of M99 at this
time will enable the control to return to the beginning of the main program and it will be executed
again.
/M99; will be neglected and the control will go to the next block provided that SKIP
OPTIONAL BLOCKS function is enabled.
If /M99 Pn; is inserted, the control cannot return to the head of the program but to the blocks
of sequence number n. The time required for switching to the blocks of sequence number n is
longer than that for returning to the starting point of the program.
3.9.3.3
It may be executed in automatic mode as a main program from the beginning of MDI Search
subprogram.
In this case, it will return to the beginning of the subprogram if a block containing M99
instruction is executed. When M99 Pn; is executed, it will switch to the block of the sequence
number n and repeatedly execute it.
To stop execution in the above process, it is possible to insert /M02; or /30; in a proper
position if you need to stop the execution. The execution of the above instruction may stop it
and disconnect the switch when the SKIP OPTIONAL BLOCKS switch is set to ON.
141
3.9.3.4 M99 L
Number L of repeated recalls of a subprogram is changed to in midway when the above
instruction is executed.
If the SKIP OPTIONAL BLOCKS switch is set to OFF in the process, the number of repetitions
will be changed to zero and the execution of the main program will go on when END OF
SUBPROGRAM instruction (M99) is executed.
3.10 User Macro

3.10.1 General
The functions of user macros A and B are basically equivalent. The differences between them
are described in section 10.10 (9).
A function is composed of a group of instructions and saved in the storage as a subprogram.
The saved function is symbolized by an instruction. Therefore, it is only necessary to specify its
symbolic instruction for the function to be executed. The group of saved functions is called
macro body and is symbolic instruction is called user macroinstruction. Macro body may
also be called macro for short and user instruction called macro call instruction.
142
Programmer only needs to memorize macroinstructions in stead of the instructions in macro

bodies.
Three points regarding macro: Variables may be used in macro bodies; operations can be
performed on the basis of variables; and the variables that may be actually specified in user
macroinstructions.
The above shows that annularly distributed screw holes are easy to machine.
Once a macro body for annular holes is programmed and recorded, NC may start machining in
it has annular hole machining function.
Programmer may call the annular hole machining function through the following instruction.
G65
PpRrAaBbKk:
p: Macro number of annular holes

143
r: Radius
a: Starting angle of holes
b: Angle between holes
k: Number of holes
In this way user may improve the performance of NC himself. Macro bodies may be supplied
by the manufacturer of machine or developed by user.
3.10.2 Variables
In macros, variables are used to replace data of figures. User may define any of their values (in
allowable range). The application of macros enables them to more general and flexible.
When using some variables, they are identified by signs.
3.10.2.1 Indication of a variable

As shown in Example 10.2.1, a variable consists of a # followed by a variable number.
#1 (i=1, 2, 3, 4)
Example 10.2.1: #5
#109
#1005
The format below may also be usable, in which figure is replaced with a formula.
#<Formula>
Example 10.2.2: ##100
##1001-1
## b/2
The variable # i is replaced with #<formula>hereinafter.
3.10.2.2 Introduction of variables

The values following addresses may be replaced by variables. If a program is <Address># 1
or < Address >-# 1, it means that a variable value or its complement serves as the instruction
value of its address.
Example 10.2.3:
F #33 Assuming #33=1.5, it is similar to F1.5.
Z-#18 Assuming #18=20.0, it is similar to Z-20.0.
G #130 Assuming #130=3.0, it is similar to G3.
144
(1) The addresses prohibited from using variable: 1, :, O and N, namely # 27 or N # 1 or

equivalent expressions are not allowed.
The n folds ((n = 1 9 ) in SKIP OPTIONAL BLOCKS /n cannot be used as a variable.
(2) The method for replacing a variable number with a variable is as follows: When the 5 in
# 5 is replaced with # 30, it shall not be written as # #30 but # (30)
(3) For all addresses, their variable value must not exceed their maximum instruction value.
For instance, when #140=120, M #140 exceeds its maximum value (M code shall be less
than 99).
(4) Numerical number shall not be used for identification purpose. When #30=02, for
instance, F #30 shall be deemed as F2.
(5) 0 and + 0 are not identifiable, namely when # 4 = - 0, X # 4 is deemed as X 0.
(6) When a variable is used for address data, the numerical value below significant bit shall
be rounded (half-adjust)
(7) The numerical value following an address can also be replaced with <Formula>. If <
Formula >[< Formula >] or < Formula > - [<Formula >] is used as a program, the value or
complement of < Formula> shall be the instruction value of the address.
Caution: For a constant without a decimal point in parentheses, assume there is a decimal
point at its end.
Example: 10.2.4:
X [#24+ #18*COS (#1)]
Z- (#18+ #26)
3.10.2.3 Undefined variables

Undefined variable value is called <Empty>. Variable #0 is used for the variable that is
always empty.
An undefined variable has the following characteristics:
(1) Introduction of variable
The address itself will be neglected when an undefined variable is introduced.
When #1=<Empty>
When #1=0
G90
X100 Y#1
G90 X100
G90
X100
Y#1
G90 X100
(2) Operational formula

Except <Empty> is used for replacement, it is equivalent to variable O.
145
When #1=<Empty>
When #1=0
#2=#1
#2=<Empty>
#2=#1
#2=0
#2=#1*5
#2=0
#2=#1*5
#2=0
#2=#1+#1
#2=0
#2=#1+#1
#2=0
(3) Conditional expression

<Empty> and 0 differ in relation to E Q and N E.
When #1=<Empty>
When #1=0
#1EQ#0
Definite
#1EQ#0
Indefinite
#1 NEO
Definite
#1 NEO
Indefinite
#1GE#0
Definite
#1GE#0
Definite
#1GT0
Indefinite
#1GT0
Indefinite (unestablished)
3.10.2.4 Display and setting of variable

A variable may be displayed on LCD and set by MDI means. See Chapter IV, Section 5.8.2.
3.10.3 Types of variables

Variable may be classified into local variable, common variable and system variable
depending on their variable numbers. And these variables have different use and
characteristics.
146
3.10.3.1 Local variables # 1# 33

A local variable is a variable that is locally used in a macro, namely the local variable # 1 for
calling a macro at a point of time varies from the # 1 for calling a macro at another point of
time (regardless the macros are the same). Therefore, the local variable for Macro A will
never be misused for Macro B and damage its variable value as nesting when calling Macro
B from A.
Local variable is used for independent variable conversion. See Section 10.7 for the
relationship between variable and address. The local variable without independent variable
conversion is empty in its original state and user may use them as he like.
3.10.3.2 Common variables #100 #149 , #500 #509

Local variable is common in a macro. Common variable is common for all subprograms
called by main programs and all macros are common. That is, the # 1 for some macro and
the # 1 for another. Therefore, the operation result of the common variable # 1 in a certain
macro is usable in another macro.
In this system, no special requirement is made for the use of common variable. They may be
used by user.
Common variables #100 to #149 can be cleared by powering off. However, the #500 to #509
common variables cannot be removed by powering off.
3.10.3.3 System variables (for user Macro B)

In this system, the use of system variables is definite.
(1) Interface signals #1000 to #1015 and #1032, #1100 to #1115 and #1132
[Input signal]
The state of interface input signal is determined by the readings of #1000 to #1032 system
variables.
147
System variables
Interface input signals

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
210
211
212
213
214
215
#1000
#1001
#1002
#1003
#1004
#1005
#1006
#1007
#1008
#1009
#1010
#1011
#1012
#1013
#1014
#1015
UI0
UI1
UI2
UI3
UI4
UI5
UI6
UI7
UI8
UI9
UI10
UI11
UI12
UI13
UI14
UI15
Variable value
Input signal
Contact ON
Contact OFF
Since the reading of variable value 1.0 or 0.0, it is not necessary to take its unit into account.
However, unit shall be considered in the development of a macro.
All input signals are read in by reading variable system #1032.
15
#1032=
#[1000 + i] * 2
i =0
In operational instructions, system variables #1000 to #1032 shall not be used as the item on
the left side [output signal]
Interface output signals may be given by assigning a value to #1100 to1132 system
variables.
System variables
Interface input signals
148
#1100
20
UO0
#1101
21
UO1
#1102
22
UO2
#1103
23
UO3
#1104
24
UO4
#1105
25
UO5
#1106
UO6
UO7
#1108
UO8
#1109
29
UO9
#1110
210
UO10
#1111
211
UO11
#1112
212
UO12
#1113
213
UO13
#1114
14
UO14
15
UO15
#1107
#1115
Variable value
Output signal
Contact ON
Contact OFF
All output signals can be output at a time by assigning a value to system variable #1132.
15
#1132=
#[1100 + i] * 2
i =0
For #1100 to #1132 system variables, the given final numerical values are stored as 1.0 or
0.0.
Note: When the values of different 1.0 or 0.0 are assigned to #1100 to 1115, <Empty> is
deemed as 0 and all conditions other than <Empty> and 0 are regarded as 1. But the
numerical values less than 0.00000001 are undefined.
Note 1: The figure below indicates the connection for input signals of user macros.
149
Note 2: The figure below indicates the connection for output signals of user macros.
Example 10.3.1
The 3-digit BCD data with symbol is read to #100 by changing address.
Composition of DI:
215
214
213
Other applications
212
Symbol
211
210
29
28
102
27
26
101
150
25
24
23
22
21
100
20
Composition of D0:
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
Unused
Other applications
Addresses
Macro call instruction:

G65 P9100D (address):
The macro body is required as follows:
09100:
#1132=#1132
AND496
G65
T60:
P9101
OR #7:
: To deliver the address

: Time macroinstruction
#100=BIN [#1032 AND 4095];
: To read 3-digit BCD data
IF [#1012 EQO] GOTO 9100;
: With symbol
#100= - #100:
N9100
M99:
Eight types of 6-digit BCD data (3 digits on the left side of decimal point + 3 digits on the
right of decimal point) with symbol are read to #101 through address change.
When D02=0, 3 digits on the right of decimal point
=1, 3 digits on the left side of decimal point
When D02321=000, No.1 data
=001, No.2 data
=111, No.8 data

G65
P9102
D (data number):
User macro body is required as follows:

09102:
G65
P9100D [#7*2];
#101=#101+#100/1000;
M99;
(2)
Tool offsets #2000#2200, workpiece offsets #2500#2906

Tool offsets use system variables #2001#2200 while workpeice offsets #2500 and #2906.
151
The offsets are established by reading these variables and changed by assigning values to
the system variable #1.
Tool offset No.
Tool offset
#2001
#2002
#2003
199
#2199
200
#2200
#2000 is readable, but its numerical value is always 0.

Axes
Workpiece offset numbers
Workpiece offsets
External workpiece offset

G54
G59
#2500
#2501
#2506

G54
G59
#2600
#2601
#2606

G54
G59
#2700
#2701
#2706
The fourth

G54
G59
#2800
#2801
#2806
The fifth

G54
G59
#2900
#2901
#2906
Example 10, 3, 2
#30=#2005
Substitute the tool offset of the offset number for variable #30.
When the offset is 1.500mm (0.500inch), the value of #30 will change into 1.5 (0.15).
152
#2210=#8
Alter the offset of Offset number 10 so that it is equal to the value of variable #8.
(3)
Alarm #3000
When error is found in a macro, an alarm will be given. If the alarm number is specified in
system variable #3000, the warning lamp will be lit and NC unit will be in warning state.
#3000=n (ALARM
MESSAGE):
Select the alarm number not used in standard specifications and set it in the macro. (n
200= A warning less than 26 characters may be specified between the note start code and
note end code.
(4)
Clocks #3001, #3002

It is possible to know the time of the clock by reading the values of system changes #3000
and #3002 for the clock. Time can also be preset by evaluation to the system variable.
Type
System variable
Unit of time
Power on
Counting
condition
Clock 1
#3001
1ms
Reset to 0
Any time
Clock 2
#3002
1hr
The same as power off
When there is an
STL signal
The accuracies of all clocks fall within 16ms. The accuracy beyond the range of Clock 1 will
be reset to 0 at 6536ms. Clock 2 will continue to increase provided that it is not
predetermined.
Time cannot be correctly determined in the event that it goes beyond the maximum value
9544hr.
Example 10.3.3: Timing
Macro call instruction
G65 P9101T (wait time)ms;
The macro may be set as follows:
09101;
#3001=0;
: Initial setting
WHILE [#3001 LE #20] D01;
: Wait for the set time
END1;
M99;
(5)
Disable SINGLE BLOCK STOP and wait for end signal of miscellaneous functions
When the following numerical value is assigned to the system variable #3003, SINGLE
BLOCK STOP function will be disabled and the next block will be executed in advance
153
without waiting for the end signal (FIN) of miscellaneous functions (M, S, T and B).
Distribution end signal (DEN) will not be sent without waiting for end signal. Note that a
miscellaneous function
without waiting for end signal will be set after that.
#3003
Single block stop
End signal of miscellaneous functions
Not disable
Wait
Disable
Wait
Not disable
Not wait
Disable
Not wait
Example 10.3.4: Drilling cycle (for increment programming) is equivalent to G81.

G65
P9081L (Number of repetitions) R (Point R) Z (Point Z):
The macro body is required as follows:

09081;
#3003=1;
G00 Z#18;
G01 Z#26;
G00Z-[ROUND (#18)+ROUND (#26)];
#3003=0;
M99;
Single block will not stop. #18 corresponds to R and #26 to Z.
(6)
Set FEEDRATE, FEEDRATE OVERRIDE and ACCURATE STOP CHECK INVALID in #3004
If the following numerical values are assigned to system variable #3004, the FEEDRATE and
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE of the blocks that follow will become invalid and accurate stop
check will not be performed any more. Press the FEEDRATE key during the execution of
FEEDRATE INVALID block.
Pressing down and hold the key: FEEDRATE will be executed at the beginning of the
first block of FEEDRATE VALID.
Pressing and releasing the key: Now the FEEDRATE lamp illuminates. However,
Feedrate is not performed as above, but started at the end point of the first block of
154
FEEDRATE VALID.
#3004
Feedrate
Feedrate override
Accurate stop
check
: Valid
: Invalid
Example 10.3.5: Tapping cycle (for increment programming) (equivalent to G84)

G65 P9084 L (Number of repetitions)R (Point R) Z (Point Z):
The macro body is developed as follows:
09084;
#3003=1;
: Disable SINGLE BLOCK STOP
G00Z#18;
#3004=7;
G01Z#26;
M05;
FEEDRATE, FEEDRATE OVERRIDE and ACCURATE STOP CHECK
M04;
Z-#26;
#3004=0;
M05;
M03;
G00Z-#18;
#3003=0;
M99;
Note: M05 may be omitted for some machines.
155

(7)
Variable corresponding to the setting data #3005

Setting data is established by assigning a value to the system variable #3005. Its digits
correspond to all setting data when the system variable #3005 is expressed as a binary
number.
#3005=
X MIRROR IMAGE
Y MIRROR IMAGE
A MIRROR IMAGE
TV CHECK
PUNCH CODE
INPUT UNIT
INPUT DEVICE1
INPUT DEVICE2
Example: If #3005=55: instruction is executed, the setting data is established as follows:
X MIRROR
IMAGE (X mirror image)=1
Y MIRROR
IMAGE (Y mirror image)=1
A MIRROR
IMAGE (A mirror image)=1
TV CHECK (vertical check)=0

PUNCH CODE (code standard)=1
INPUT UNIT (input unit)=1
INPUT DEVICE1 (input device 1)=0
INPUT DEVICE2 (input device 2)=0
(8)
Modal messages #4001#4120

The present value instructed by a modal message may be determined by readable system
variables #4001 to #4120. Its unit is the unit during instruction
System variables
Modal messages
#4001
#40021
#4102
#4107
#4109
#4111
#4113
#4114
#4115
#4119
#4120
G codes (Group 01)
G codes (Group 21)

B codes
D codes
F codes
H codes
M codes
Sequence numbers
Program numbers
S codes
T codes
156
Example 10.3.6: Boring cycle (equivalent to G86) during incremental value/absolute value
mixed programming
G65
P9086L (Number of repetitions) R (Point R) Z (Point Z):
The macro is developed as follows:

09086;
#1=#4003;
: Save Group 03 G codes
#3003=1;
: Disable SINGLE BLOCK STOP
G00 G91 Z#18;

G01
Z#26;
M05;
G00 Z-[#18+#26];
M03;
#3003=0;
G#1 M99;
: Restore Group 03 G codes
System variables #4001 to #4120 cannot be used for the left item on the left side of the
operational instruction.
(9)
Position messages #5001#5105

Position messages may be determined by readable system variables #5001 to 5015.
Whether its unit is mm or inch depends on the input system.
System variables #5001# to #5105 cannot be used for the left item on the left side of the
operational instruction
System variables
Position messages
Reading in during
travel
#5001
#5002
#5003
#5004
#5005
End position of Axis X block (ABSIO)

End position of Axis Y block (ABSIO)
End position of Axis Z block (ABSIO)
End position of the 4th axis block (ABSIO)
End position of the 5th axis block (ABSIO)
Applicable
#5021
#5022
#5023
#5024
#5025
Actual position of Axis X (ABSMT)

Actual position of Axis Y (ABSMT)
Actual position of Axis Z (ABSMT)
Actual position of the 4th axis (ABSMT)
Not applicable
#5041
#5042
#5043
Actual position of Axis X (ABSMT)

Actual position of Axis Y (ABSMT)
Actual position of Axis Z (ABSMT)
Not applicable
157
#5044
#5045

#5061
#5062
#5063
#5064
#5065
Axis X SKIP position (ABSKP)

Axis Y SKIP position (ABSKP)
Axis Z SKIP position (ABSKP)
The 4th axis X SKIP position (ABSKP)
The 5th axis X SKIP position (ABSKP)
Applicable
#5083
Tool length offset
Not applicable
#5101
#5102
#5103
#5104
#5105
Axis X servo position deviation

Axis Y servo position deviation
Axis Z servo position deviation
The 4th servo position deviation
The 5th servo position deviation
Not applicable
Abbreviation
ABSIO
Meaning
The end
position of
the previous
block
Coordinate
system
Tool position
Tool length
ABSMT
ABSOT
The actual position of The actual position of

The position of
an instruction
an instruction
the ON SKIP
(identical with
(identical with
signal in G31
indication POS,
indication POS,
block
MACHINE)
MACHINE)
Workpiece
Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate
coordinate
system
system
system
N/A
ABSKP
Applicable
Tool
Tool position Tool calibrating spot
compensation
Workpiece
coordinate
system
Applicable
Applicable
Tool calibrating spot
Tool calibrating
spot
Note: The tool length offset is not valid just between the blocks to be executed, but in the
executing blocks. If SKIP signal is not switched on in G31 block, its position is at the end
point of the block.
Example 10.3.7:
The tool moves to a fixed point (The distances from XP, YP and ZP to the reference point)
and returns to the original position after treatment by programming an intermediate point.
G65
P9300X (Intermediate point) Y (Intermediate point) Z (Intermediate point):
The macro body is developed as follows:

0 9300;
#1=#5001;
#2=#5002;
158

#3=#5003;
G00 Z#26;
X#24 Y#25;
G04; Stop travel because of reading #5021#5023.
G91 X[XP-#5021]Y[yp-#5022]Z[ZP-#5023]:
(Treatment)
X#24 Y#25 Z#26;
X#1 Y#2;
Z#3;
M99;
(10)
The setting and display of variable names

The names consisting of up to 8 characters may be assigned to variables #500 to #511
through the following instructions.
SETVNn[128, 1, 2, 8]:
n is a starting number of the variable numbers with names.
1, 28 are the names of variable number n.
1, 2, 8 are the names of variable number n+1; the same applies below.
All character strings are separated by , . All characters except NOTE END, NOTE START,
[, ], EOB, EOR, : (colon for program number) can be used for valid messages. Variable
names will not be cleared after power off.
LCD displays in the sequence of NO., NAME and DATA.
Note: Since the function is not available for some devices, #510 and #511 may not be used.
Example 10.3.8
SETVN 500[ABCDEFGH, COUNTER, POINTER];
MACRO
NO
0500
0501
0502
0503
0504
0505
0506
0507
0508
0509
0510
0511
P
VAL
06
NAME
ABCDEFGH
COUNTER
POINTER
1st
2nd
01234
N3456
DATA
-12345678
00020000
-00004025
-00004500
12400000]
START
TOOL-PT
00004500
LSK
159
3.10.4 Operation instructions

All types of operations may be carried out between variables. Operation instruction is
equivalent to general arithmetically developed program.
#i=Formula
The right Formula of an operation instruction is the combination of constant, variable,
function and operator. Constant replaces #j and #k. The constant with a decimal point in
Formula may be deemed that there is a decimal point at its end.
3.10.4.1 Definition and substitution of variable

#i=#j
Definition and substitution
3.10.4.2 Additive operation

#i=#j+#k
Summation
#i=#j-#k
Subtraction
#i=#joR#k Logical sum (for each one of 32 digits)

#i=#jXOR#K Exclusive or (for each one of 32 digits)
3.10.4.3 Multiply operation (Macro B option)

#i=#j*#k
Arithmetic product
#i=#j/#k
Quotient
#i=# JAND#K Logical multiply (for each one of 32 digits)
3.10.4.4 Function (Macro B option)

#i=SIN[#j]
Sine (unit: degree)
#i=COS[#j]
Cosine (unit: degree)
#i=TAN[#j]
Tangent (unit: degree)
#i=ATAN[#j]/ [#k]
Arc tangent (unit: degree)
#i=SQRT[#j]
Square root (unit: degree)
#i=ABS[#j]
Absolute value
#i=BIN[#j]
Switching from BCD to BIN
#i=BCD[#j]
Switching from BIN to BCD
#i=ROUND[#j]
Rounding
160
#i=FIX[#j]
Rounding off the part below decimal point
#i=FUR[#j]
Rounding the decimal part to integer part
Note: How to use ROUND function

(1)
If function ROUND is used in an operation instruction or in IF or WHILE conditions, the

original data with a decimal point shall be rounded off.
Example: #1=ROUND [1.2345];
#1 changes to 1.0.
IF [#1 LEROUND (#2)]GOTO 10:
When #2=3.567, ROUND[#2]=4.0
(2)
When the function ROUND is used in an address instruction, it shall be rounded off in its
minimum setting unit.
Example: G01 X[ROUND (#1)];
If #1 is 1.4567 and the minimum input increment of X is 0.001, the block will change to G01
X1.457;
This instruction is equivalent to G01 X#1: in the instruction.
The function ROUND in an address instruction mainly applies to the following conditions.
Example: [It is only moved by #1 and #2 in increment and then return to the initial point.]
N1 #1=1.2345;
N2 #2=2.3456;
N3 G01 X#1 F100;
: X moves by 1.235
N4 X#2;
: X moves by 2.346
N5 X-[#1+#2];
: X moves (because #1+#2=3.5801)
Since 1.235+2.346=3.581, the program cannot return to the starting point through N5.
With N5X-[ROUND[#1]+ROUND[#2] ];
This is equivalent to N5x-1.235+2.346] and the program may return to the starting point.
3.10.4.5 Hybrid operation

The above operations and functions may be combined. The precedence order of operation is
function, multiply operation and then additive operation.
Example 10.4.1
#i #j+#K*SIN [# l ]
Operational order
161
3.10.4.6 Changing operational order using [
The part that is to be preferred may be put in [

the parenthesis in a function).
]. [
] may be nested for 5 times (including
Example 10.4.2:
#i=SIN [ [ [ #j+#K ] *# l +#m ] *n ] (triple nesting)
3.10.4.7 Accuracy
To arrange an order with macro order, make sure it has an adequate accuracy.
(1)
Data format
The floating point format of the data processed by macro is as follows:
M*2E
Where: M: 1 sign bit +31 binary numbers
E: 1 sign bit +7 binary numbers
(2)
Operational precision
Executing an operation once generates the following error. These errors are totalized in
repeated operations.
Operational format
a=b*c
a=b/c
Average error
Maximum error
-10
-10
1.5510
4.6610
-10
Relative error
-9
4.6610
1.8610
-9
-9
a= b
1.2410
3.7310
a=b+c
a=b-c
2.3310-10
5.3210-10
a=SiNb
a=comb
5.010-9
1.010-9
a=ATANb/c
1.810-6
3.610-6
Note: Function TAN executes SIN/COS.
3.10.4.8 Cautions regarding deterioration of precision

(1)
Error type
Add-subtract operation
162
min (
b c
Absolute error
degree
Note that when absolute values operate subtraction in addition or subtraction, the relative
error will not be maintained below 10-8. For example, assuming the actual values of #1and
#2 are as follows:
#1=9876543210123.456
#2=9876543277777.777
Execute the operation of #2-#1:
#2-#1=67654.321
The above numerical value cannot be achieved. Since a macro has only a decimal 8-bit
precision, the precision of #1and #2 numerical values is degraded and approximates:
#1=9876543200000.000
#2=9876543300000.000
Strictly speaking, the above value differs from internal value because they are binary.
#2-#1=100000.000
Causing a bigger error.
(2)
Logic operation
EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE are basically equivalent to add-subtract operation. Hence note
the error and make sure that the #1 and #2 are equal in the above example. For instance,
IF[#IEQ#2] always fails to make correct judgment.
If IF[ABS[#1-#2]LT50000] is used to make error judgment, #1and #2 are considered equal
when the difference between #1and #2 falls within its error range.
(3)
Trigonometric function
Absolute may be well guaranteed in trigonometric functions. Since they are not below 10-8,
note the conditions of multiplication and division after an operation of trigonometric function.
3.10.5 Control instruction

The control of a program is achieved by using the following instructions.
3.10.5.1 Branch (GOTO)

IF [Conditions]GOTOn
If Conditions is satisfied, the next operation will go to the block with a sequence
number n in the program. The sequence number n may be substituted by a variable or [
Formula].
If the condition is not satisfied, it will continue to execute the next block.
IF[Conditions= can also be omitted, and the program is unconditionally forwarded to
block n in this case.
163
Conditions is of the following types:

#JEQ#K=
#JNE#K
#JGT#K
#JLT#K
#JGE#K
#JLE#K
#j and #k may also be substituted with Formula and n with a variable orFormula.
Note 1: The blocks with a sequence number following n are executed after GOTOn and
block shall be preceded by the sequence number n.
Note 2: When executing GOTON, the more distant Nn block is in the same direction, the
longer executing time will be.
In the above figure, the executing time increases in the order of . The GOTOn that
has been executed for more times only keeps a short distance from Nn block. When the
contents of a variable are used for measurement as well as warning, it is recommended not
to use the warning program to approach GOTOn statement. The warning program departs
from GOTOn.
Example 10.5.1: When #110, No.150 alarm will be given.
IF [#1GE10]GOTO150;
The conditions in which no alarm will be given:
M99;
N150 #3000=150;
M99;
(If NEOP (NO.306) is set by parameter, the program will be saved in storage and M99 will
not be used as the end of program.)
Note3: During the execution of GOTO, alarm may be given in the following events:
164
When a macro operation cannot be properly executed in an address

If GOTO is executed when #1=-1,
No. 119 alarm will be given in the block X[SQRT[#1]];.
When the conditions specified by WHILE cannot be correctly executed
If GOTO is executed when #1=0,
No. 112 alarm will be given in the block WHILE [10/#1 GE2]D0 1.
In this case, change the following program:
#2=SQRT[#1];
x#2;
#2=10/#1
WHILE[#2 GE 2]D0 1;
#2=10/#1;
END 1;
Operation instruction does not give an alarm even GOTO is executed.
3.10.5.2 Repeat (how to select Macro B)

WHILE[ConditionsDOm (m=1,2,3)
ENDm
When Conditions is satisfied, the block from DOm to ENDm will be repeatedly
executed. That is, when the conditional expression Conditions for judging DOm block
is satisfied, the program will go to the next block. When the conditional expression is not
satisfied, the blocks following ENDm will be executed.
When WHILE[Conditionsis equivalent to IF, it may also be omitted. If it is omitted, the
program will repeatedly executed from DOom to ENDm.
WHILE[ConditionsDOm and ENDm shall be used in pair and identification number m
be used for mutual identification.
Example 10.5.2
#120=1;
N1 WHILE [#120LE10] DO1;
Repeat for 10 times
N2 WHILE [ #30EQ1 ] DO2;

N3 END 2;
Repeat when #30=1
165
#120=#120+1;
N4
END1;
Note 1: REPEAT (pay attention to the following points during REPEAT programming)
DOm shall always be set before ENDm.
END1;
(N/A)
DO1;
In the same program, DOm shall correspond to ENDm one by one.
DO1;
DO1; (N/A)
END1;
DO1;
END1 (N/A)
END1;
The same identification number may be used for many times.
DO1;
END1;
(Applicable)
DO1;
166
END1;
DO statement may be nested for 3 times.
DO1;
DO2;
DO3;
END3;
END2;
END1;
DO area must not be crossed.
DO1;
DO2;
END1;
END2;
It is possible to transfer from the inside to the outside of DO area.
DO1;
GOTO 9000;
167
(Applicable)
END1;
N9000.;
Transferring from the outside to the inside of the DO area is not allowed.
GOTO 9000;
DO1;
(N/A)
N9000..;
END1;
DO1;
N9000..;
(N/A)
END1;
GOTO 9000;
It is possible to call a macro and subprograms from the inside of the DO area. DO statement
may be nested for three times in a macro body or a subprogram.
DO1;
G65..; (Applicable)
G66..; (Applicable)
G67
; (Applicable)
END 1;
168
;
DO1 ;
M98.. ; (Applicable)
END1;
Note 2: As a rule, the time required for TRANSFER is shorter than that for REPEAT.
Example 10.5.3: Wait for the cyclic program whose signal (#10000) is 1
N 10 I F[#1000 EQ 0]GOTO
10;
If
WHILE [#1000 EQ 0] DO 1
END1
Is used for programming, the executing time will be shorter.
3.10.6 Creation and storage of user macro body

3.10.6.1 Creation of user macro body
Macro and subprogram have the same format.
O
(Program number ):
Instruction
M99;
Program number is prescribed as follows:
(1)
O 1 O 7999
The numbers are applicable for the programs that can be freely saved, cleared and edited.
(2)
O 8000 O
8999
The numbers cannot be used for the programs for saving and clearing way edition without
the setting of relevant devices.
169

(3)
O 9000 O
9019
The numbers are applicable for calling type special macros.

(4)
O 9020 O
9899
The numbers cannot be used for the programs for saving and clearing way edition without the setting
of the parameters.
(5)
O 9900 O 9999
The numbers are applicable for robot operational programs.
Fictitious variable (the variable that macro calls in instruction to receive data) are fixed,
namely the addresses of the specified parameters correspond to macro body number
through macro call instruction.
Example 10.6.1:
O 9081;
G 00 X#24;
Z#18;
G 01 Z#26;
G00 Z-[ROUND[#18]ROUND[#26]];
M99;
Z
#24
#18
#26
X
3.10.6.2 Storage of user macro body

A macro is a subprogram and is stored and edited in the same way as a subprogram. Its
storage capacity is set with that is combined with a subprogram.
3.10.6.3 Macro statement and NC statement

The following block is called macro statement.
(i) Operation instruction (including =block)
(ii) Control instruction (including block GOTO, DO or END)
(iii) Macro call instruction (including the blocks of the macros called by G65, G66, G67 and G
codes)
170
The block other than macro statement is called NC statement.

Macro state differs from NC statement in the following aspects:
(i) Single block does not stop in general single block mode.
(ii) Tool radius compensation C does not serve as block without travel.
(iii) The executing time may vary depending on different statements.
(a)
If a macro statement are provided after a block without buffer (the M codes without buffer
and the blocks of G31), the statement will be executed after the block.
Example 3.1:
N1 X1000 M00;
Executing block
N2 #1100=1;
Macro statement
Execution of
Macro statement
N2
N1
Execution of NC statement
(b)
Time
When a block with buffer is followed by macro statements,
(i) When tool radius compensation C is not used,
The current block will be executed, and at the same time, the next macro statement will be
executed until the next NC statement.
Example 3.2
N 1 G01 X1000; Executing block
N2 #11001; Executed macro statement
N3 #1=10; Executed macro statement
N4 X2000; Next NC statement
Execution of
Macro statement
N2 N3
N1
171
(ii) Tool radius compensation C mode

(21) The first NC statement following the currently executing block is not a block without
travel (no block without move instruction in the tool radius compensation plane).
(211) The 2nd NC statement is also not a block without travel.
The statements after the first NC statement following the executing block are executed.
Example 3.3:
N1 X1000; Executing block
N3
Y1000; The first NC statement
N4
#11001; Executed macro statement

N6 X1000; The 2nd NC statement
Execution of
Macro statement
N4
N5
N1
(212) The 2nd NC statement after the executing block is a block without travel.
The statements after the 2nd NC statement (i.e. block without travel) following the executing
block are executed.
Example 3.4
N1 X 1000; Executing block
N3 Y 1000; The 1st NC statement
N6 Z 1000; The 2nd NC statement
N9 X1000: The 3rd NC statement
Execution of
Macro statement
N4 N5
N1
172
N7 N8
(22) The first NC statement following the currently executing block is a block without travel.
The macro statement cannot be executed.
Example 3.5
N1 Y1000; Executing block
N2 11001; Executed macro statement
N4 # Z 1000; The 1st NC statement (the block without travel)
N7 X1000; The 2nd NC statement
N1
3.10.7 Macro call instruction

Macro may be easily called from a single block or modally from each block by means of
calling.
3.10.7.1 Simple calling

The macro body specified by P (programmer) is called during the execution of the following
instruction.
G 65 P (program number)L (Number of repetitions) <independent variable assignment>:
When an independent variable is required to change to macro, it is set by < independent
variable assignment >. The following two types of <independent variable assignment> may
be set. The independent variable herein is the actual numerical value assigned to a variable.
(Note) G65 shall be always specified before independent variable in a block. Minus sigma
and decimal are usable and independent of the address in <independent variable
assignment>.
(1)
Independent variable assignment I

A
An independent variable other than G, L, N, O and P may be assigned to other addresses.

An address needs not to be assigned alphabetically but specified in the format of words. The
173
addresses that do not need to be specified may be neglected.
The use of I, J and K shall always be assigned alphabetically.

B
True
False
The coincidence relation between the addresses assigned to variable assignment I and the
variable number in macro body is as follows:
(2)
Addresses of independent variable

assignment I
The variables in macro body
A
B
C
D
E
F
H
I
J
K
M
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
#1
#2
#3
#7
#8
#9
#11
#4
#5
#6
#13
#17
#18
#19
#20
#21
#22
#23
#24
#25
#26
Independent variable assignment II

A
I J
J K
Besides that independent variable may be assigned to addresses A, B and C, up to ten

groups of independent variables can be specified with addresses I, J and K. When several
numerical values need to be assigned to the same address, they shall be assigned in the
specified sequence. Unnecessary addresses may be omitted.
The addresses allocated as per independent variable assignment II correspond to the
174
variable numbers of macro as follows:
Addresses of independent assignment I
Variables in macro
#1
#2
#3
I1
#4
J1
#5
K1
#6
I2
#7
J2
#8
K2
#9
I3
#10
J3
#11
K3
#12
I4
#13
J4
#14
K4
#15
I5
#16
J5
#17
K5
#18
I6
#19
J6
#20
K6
#21
I7
#22
J7
#23
K7
#24
I8
#25
J8
#26
K8
#27
I9
#28
J9
#29
K9
#30
I10
#31
J10
#32
K10
#33
The subscripts 1 to 10 of I, J and K indicate the order of the assigned group.

(3)
Concurrently existing independent variable assignments I and II

Alarm will not be given even the independent variables of assignments I and II are within the
same block with G65 instruction.
175
If Type I and II independent variables correspond to the same variable, the latterly specified
independent variable will be valid.
G 65
A1.0
<Variable>
#1: 1.0
#2: 2.0
#3:
#4: 3.0
#5:
#6:
#7
B2.0
I3.0
I4.0
D5.0
P1000:
5.0
In the example, the D5.0 that follows is valid though independent variables I 4.0 and D5.0
are set to variable #7.
Example 10.7.1: Reference point setting
Before instructing hole-group machining, the reference point of the hole group shall be set.
X 0 The X coordinate of hole-group reference point
Y 0 The Y coordinate of hole-group reference point
G 65
P9200
Xx
Yy;
Shall use the following variables:

#100: hole counting
#101: the X coordinate of the reference point for hole-group macro
#102: the Y coordinate of the reference point for hole-group macro
#24: the X coordinate of the reference point is assigned with a macro call instruction
#25: the Y coordinate of the reference point is assigned with a macro call instruction
Macro body is developed as follows:
09200;
#101#24; Notify the reference point to hole-group macro
#102#25;
#1000; : Reset of hole counting
M99;
Example 10.7.2
Bolt-hole ring
The reference point set with the reference-point setting macro is used as the center of the
circular ring. The h holes to be machined distribute on the circular ring at equal spacing. The
176
st
1 hole is located on the straight line of a angle (see the figure below).
The coordinates of the ring reference point for XO and YO bolt-holes

R: radius
A: starting angle
H: number of holes
G65
P9207
Rr Aa Hh;
When h0, however, workpiece will be machined clockwise in h counting.

The following variables shall be used.
#100
hole counting
#101
the X coordinate of reference point
#102
the Y coordinate of reference point
#18
radius r
#1
starting angle a
#11
number of holes h
#30
the storage of the X coordinate of reference point
#31
the storage of the Y coordinate of reference point
#32
Counting shows that the No.1 hole is being machined.
#33
the angle of No.1 hole
Macro body is developed as follows (for absolute programming)

09207;
#30=#101;
: Storage of reference point

177
#31=#102;
#32=1;
WHILE[#32LEABS[#11]]DO1;
: Repeat depending on number of holes
#33=#1+360*[#32-1]/#11;
#101=#30+#18*COS [#33];
: Hole position
#102=#31+#18*SIN [#33];
X#101
Y#102;
#100=#100+1;
: Hole count plus 1
#32=#32+1;
END1;
#101=#30;
; Return to reference point
#102=#31;
M99;
Example 10.7.3: Unequally spaced oblique line
The point established by the reference point setting macro is used as the reference point.
The holes to be machined are arranged by different spacing (1, 12) in the direction
forming an a angle with axis X
Coordinates of X0, Y0
A
Angle
Spacing between holes
Number of holes set by equal spacing (to be assigned with decimal point)

178

G65
P9203
Aa, I1, Kn1, I12, Kn2;
When n=1, Kn may be omitted.

Using the following variables:
#100
: hole counter
#101
: X coordinate of reference point
#102
: Y coordinate of reference point
#1
: angle a
#4
: No.1 spacing 11
#6
: number of holes n1 of the 1st spacing group 11
#7
: No. 2 spacing 12
#9
: number of holes n2 of the 2nd spacing group 12
#2
: the X coordinate of storage reference point
#3
: the Y coordinate of storage reference point
#5
: Take out hole spacing I1 count
#8
: the distance from reference point to the current hole
The macro is developed as follows (for absolute programming)

09203;
#2=#101;
: Storage reference point
#2=#102;
#5=4;
#8=0;
WHILE[#5 LE 31]D01;
: Hole spacing assignment I is limited to 10.
IF[#[#5]EQ#0]GOTO 9001;
: If the assignment I is, it will ends.
D02;
#8=#8+#[#5];
#101=#2+#8*COS [#1];
: Hole position
#102=#3+#8*SIN [#1];
X#101
Y#102;
#100=#100+1;
: Hole count plus 1
#[#5+2]=#[#5+2]-1;
179
IF[#[#5+2]LEO]GOTO 9002;
: Repeat for k times
END2;
N9002 #5=#5+3;
: Move to the next assignment I
END1;
N9001 #101=#2;
: Return to the reference point
#102=#3;
M99;
3.10.7.2 Modal calling

When executing the following instruction, the macro calling mode may be instructed. During
the execution of macro calling mode, calling the specified macro each time executes a move
instruction.
G66P (Program number)L (Number of repetitions)Independent variable assignment:
Independent variable assignment is equivalent to the condition of simple calling.
Macro calling mode will be cleared when the following instruction is executed.
G67;
(Note): In G66 block, G66 shall be instructed before all independent variables.
The addresses forIndependent variable assignment may use minus sign and decimal
point.
Example 10.7.4
Drilling cycle
Drilling cycle is performed at all locating points.
G66
P9082
R (Point R)X (Point Z)X (Dwell time):
Some move block performs drilling cycle within the area.
G67 ;
The macro is as follows (for incremental programming)
180
G9082;
G00 Z#18;
G01 Z#26;
G04 X#24;
G00 Z-[ROUND[#18]+ROUND[#26]];
M99;
Example 10.7.5
Combined type hole group
For a drilling process with the bolt-hole ring as described in 10.7.2 and a unequally spaced
hole group on an oblique line as described in the above example 10.7.3, it is necessary to
perform it with macro and fixed cycle. The program is as follows:
G81;
G65 P9200 X (coordinate of reference point) Y (coordinate of reference point);
G66 P9207 R (radius) A (starting angle) K (number of holes);
G65 P9203 A (angle) I (spacing) K (number) I (spacing);
G67;
3.10.7.3 Multiple calling

It is equivalent to calling a subprogram from another one. It is also possible to call a macro
from another one. Multiple calling includes single calling and modal calling. Its number of
repetitions is up to 4.
3.10.7.4 Multiple modal calling

In modal calling mode, move instruction is executed whenever the specified macro is called.
When several modal macros are specified, the move instruction of the previous macro will be
executed whenever the next macro is called. Macros are called by the following specified
instructions continuously.
181
Example 10.7.6
G66 P9100;
Z10000; (1-1)
G66 P9200;
Z15000; (1-2)
G67;
: P9200 Cancelled
G67;
: P9100 Cancelled
Z-25000;
(1-3)
09100;
X5000;
(2-1)
M99;
09200;
Z6000;
(3-1)
Z7000;
(3-2)
M99;
Executing order (the blocks without instruction are omitted)
(1-1)
(1-2)
(2-1)
(1-3)
(3-1)
(3-2)
(2-1)
(2-1)
(Note): Since (1-3) is not followed by macro calling mode, modal macro is not called.
3.10.7.5 Calling a macro with G codes

A G code for calling macro may be set by parameter, namely substituted by N G65
P<Independent variable assignment>. The same motion may use the following
simple instruction.
N
G<Independent variable assignment>
The correspondence between calling macro with G code xx and calling the program number
may be set by parameter.
182
The program number for calling G code xx and calling macro is set in parameters.
Except G00, up to 10 of G01 to G255 can be selected to call macro. These G codes cannot
be specified through MDI panel like G65 instruction. The G codes cannot be set in the macro
calling instructions for G codes and used in the subprogram calling instructions with M
codes.
Set the following parameters:
0323
The G code for calling macro: 9010
0324
0332
Example 10.7.7 : Clockwise machining with G02

G02
I (Radius)D (Offset number);
(1) Set the following parameter

Macro body: 9010 calls G code=12
(2) Record the following macro body
09010;
#1-ABS[#4]-#[2000+#7];
IF[#1 LEO]GOTO 1;
#2=#1/2;
#3003=3;
G01 X[#1-ROUND[#2]]Y#2;
G17 G02 X#2 Y-#2R-#2;
I-#1;
X-#2 Y-#2 R#2;
G01 X[#-ROUND[#2]]Y#2];
#3003=0;
N1 M99;
3.10.7.6 Calling a subprogram with an M code

The M code set by parameter may be used to call a subprogram. The instruction of N
Y M98P : may be substituted by the following simple instruction.
N
G X
Y M:
183
G X
For M98, a subprogram is indicated on COMND page, but MF and M codes are not sent.
The correspondence between calling macro with M code xx and calling the program number
may be set by parameter.
Except the No. 35 and 36 M30 parameters MBUF1 and MBUF2, at most 3 of M03 to M97 can
be used for macro calling.
Instruction may be specified through MDI keypad. In the macros called by the means that a G
code calls a macro or in the subprogram called by the means that a T code calls a subprogram,
the subprograms of the specified M codes cannot be called like common M codes.
Set the following parameters:
0320
The M code for calling macro: 9001
0321
0322
Example 10.7.8 : Through the ATC fixed cycle of M06

(1) Set the following parameter
Subprogram: the M code called by 9001=06
(2) Record the following macro bodies:
09001;
#1=#4001;
#3=#4003;
G28
G91
G28
Y0;
Z0
M20;
M21;
G00
Z10000;
M22;
G28
Z0;
M23;
G#1
G#3
M99;
3.10.7.7 Calling macros with M codes

The M codes set by parameter may call a macro, i.e. NG65 P<Specified
variable>
Operation is performed when using the following instruction instead.
NM<Specified variable>
The calling of the program number of macro is set by relevant parameter.
184
Except a part of specified M codes, up to 10 of M06 to M255 can call macro. However, this
type of M code cannot be input through MDI like G65 or used in the subprograms called with
G code, M code and T code.
Set the parameters as follows:
043
User macro body: 9020 calls M mode
052
User macro body: 9029 calls M mode
3.10.7.8 Calling a subprogram with a T code

The T codes set by parameter may call a subprogram.
N
G X
Tt;
Operation is performed when using the following two instructions of the program instead.
#149 = t;
N
G X Y M98
P90000;
The t in T codes is saved as the independent variable in variable #149. T codes are
displayed on COMND page, but TF and T codes are not sent. They may be specified through
MDI but cannot be instructed in the blocks with the M codes for calling a subprogram.
In the macro called by the means for G codes to call a macro as well as in the subprogram
called by the means for M or T codes to call a subprogram, these T codes does not call a
subprogram but are treated like common T codes when instructed.
Set the following parameter:
0306
TMCR
3.10.7.9 The position of the decimal point of an independent variable

Independent variable is usually specified with a decimal point. If a decimal point is not
specified, the position of the decimal point is assumed as follows:
Addresses
Input in mm
Input in inch
A, C
3 (2)
B (B 3-digit is not selected)
3 (2)
B (B 3-digit is selected)
D, H
E, F (in G94 mode)
0 (1)
E, F (in G95 mode)
2 (3)
I, J, K
3 (2)
3 (2)
M, S, T
Q, R
185
U, V, W
3 (2)
X, Y, Z
3 (2)
The positions of the decimal point are calculated from the least significant bit for the
numerical values listed in the above table.
The numerical values in () indicate the number of the digits on the right side of the decimal
point. For addresses E and F, parameter FMIC=1.For other addresses, MIC=1.
3.10.7.10 The difference between M98 (calling a subprogram) and G65 (calling a macro
body)
(1) G65 may contain an independent variable, but M98 not.
(2) After executing an instruction other than M, P or L in M98 block, the use of M98 goes to a
subprogram but G65 only transfers.
(3) When M98 block contains an address other than O, N, P and L, a single block stops
execution, but G65 block not.
(4) G65 may change the level of a local variable, but M98 cannot. That is to say, the #1
specified before G65 is different from the #1 in a macro. The #1 specified before M98 is
identical to the #1 in a calling subprogram.
(5) It is possible to call a nesting for 4 times when G65 is combined with G66. M98 can also
call for 4 times (when Macro A or B is selected).
(6) During automatic operation, M98 can achieve 4 calls at most in TAPE mode or MEMORY
mode when an operation is inserted through MDI. One or two codes may achieve 4 calls in
MDI mode. G65 can achieve up to 4 calls in all modes.
3.10.7.11 The nesting and local variables of user macro

When G65, G66 and G codes are used to call a macro, the nesting degree (level) of its
macro increases by 1 and the level of its local variable also increases by 1.
The relationship between macro calling and local variable is as follows:
Local variables
186
Note that local variables (Level 0) #1 to #33 are provided in a main program.
When a macro (Level 1) is called by G65, the local variable (Level 0) of the main
program is saved, the local variables #1#33 (Level 1) of the new macro (Level 1) are
prepared and the substitution of the independent variables are possible (the same for
).
Each group of local variables (Levels 1, 2 and 3) are saved ant new local variables
(Levels 2, 3 and 4) are prepared whenever a macro (Levels 2, 3 and 4) is called.
When using M99 to return from each macro, the local variables (Levels 0, 1, 2 and 3)
saved in and are restored as they are saved.
3.10.8 The relationship with other functions

(1)
MDI operation
Macro call instruction, operation instruction and control instruction cannot be specified with
MDI.
During the execution of a macro and the stop of a single block, the MDI instructions other
than those are related to macros may be executed.
In macro calling mode (G66), inputting a move instruction by MDI cannot perform macro
calling.
(2)
Sequence number retrieving

The sequence numbers in a macro body cannot be retrieved.
(3)
Single block
The blocks other than macro call instruction, operation instruction, control instruction
sometimes may be processed in single block stop mode in a macro.
The blocks of macro call instruction (G65, G66, and G67), operation instruction and control
instruction do not stop in the workpiece with single block.
However, the blocks other than macro call instruction may perform single block stop and be
set through the following settings and parameters.
For the check of a macro body
0318
MCS9
0319
MCS8
MCS7
187
When MCS7 = 1, single block stop will be performed in the macro statements in 01 to 07999
and 0990009999.
When MCS8 = 1, single block stops in the macro statements in 080008999.
When MCS9 = 1, single block stops in the macro statements in 090009899.
However, when single block stops in a macro in offset compensation mode C, it is assumed
that it does not to move. Sometimes wrong compensation is also performed (strictly
speaking, instructing movement is similar to that the amount of movement is zero). The
assumption is preferential for the single block stop restraint of #3003. In a word, when MCS7,
8 and 9 are equal to 1, #3003 will be equal to 1 (also called 3) in the programs in all program
sequence numbers. All single blocks will be restrained. Here MCS7, 8 and 9 are the
parameters for the inspection of macros. Therefore, the parameter shall be set to 0 at the
end of macro inspection.
(4)
Skip optional blocks

When / code appears in <Expression> (on the right side of working equation or in [
may be deemed as a division operator rather than an optional block.
(5)
]), it
Operation in EDIT mode

In order to prevent damage caused by misoperation, the recorded macro bodies and
subprograms may be set as follows.
0318
PRG9
0319
PRG8
Here PRG8 = 1 corresponds to the user macros and subprograms of program numbers
80008999 while PRG9 = 1 to those of 90009899. Recording, clearance and edition are
not allowed. However, clearance of all blocks and output of single programs can be carried
out upon tenderization.
(6)
Indication of the program numbers other than EDIT mode

As a rule, the called programs will be displayed when calling a user macro and a subprogram.
The following setting may be used to maintain the foregoing programs.
0318
MPD9
0319
MPD8
MPD8 = 1 corresponds to the user macros and subprograms of program numbers 8000
8999 while MPD9 = 1 to those of 90009899. These programs are not displayed in the
PROGRAM page for the modes other than EDIT.
(7)
Reset
When reset function is used for clearance, all local variables and public variables #100 to
#149 are in <Empty> mode and system variables #10000 through #1132 cannot be cleared.
188
The calling mode of user macro and subprogram as well as the state of D0 will be cleared
and the main program be returned to in the cases other than the clearance in MDI mode. For
the clearance in MDI mode, only the calling state in MDI mode is cleared.
(8)
Macro statements and NC statements

The following blocks indicate the statements of a macro.
Operation instruction (= is also included in the block)
Control instruction (G0T0, D0 and END are included in the block)
Macro call instruction (G65, G66, G67 and the G codes for calling a macro are included
in the block).
The blocks other than macro statements are NC statements.
(9)
MDIs interference in automatic operation
(10)
When the MDI in automatic operation is used to insert a macro, up to 4 levels of the nesting
degree called by macros and that of D0 can be continuously called from the beginning of
automatic operation.
The display of PROGRAM RESTART page
The M and T codes used for calling a subprogram are not displayed like M98.
(11)
Feedrate
When Feedrate is set to ON, the execution of macro statement stops (also stops during
alarm clearance).
3.10.9 Special codes and words used in user programs

Besides those for common programs, the codes used in user macros include the following
codes:
(1)
ISO
Meaning
[
]
#
*
=
0
+
(2)
Binary encoding
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
Symbol
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
[
]
#
*
=
0
+
EIA
Meaning
[
]
#
*
Binary encoding
0
0
0
1
0 1
1
1
0 0
1
1
Parameter setting
0 0
1
1
189
Symbol
0
0
0
0
&

=
+

0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
,
+
0: The 0 code similar to the 0 of program number shall be used.

The # of EIA codes and code format shall be set by parameter.
However, Chinese characters cannot be used. Latin letters are usable. If # is used, note that
its original meaning is not applicable.
Parameter No.
0317
The special characters used by Macro A are as follows: OR, XOR, IF, GOTO, EQ, GT, LTT,
GE, LE.
The special characters used by Macro B are as follows:
AND, SIN, COS, TAN, ATANN, SQRT, ABS, BIN, RCD, ROUND, FIX, FUP, WHILE, DO,
END.
3.10.10 Restrictions
(1) Usable variables
#0, #1#33, #100#149, #500#509 and system variables
(2) Usable variable value
Maximum 1047, minimum 10
39
(3) Rated numerical value used in <Expression>

Maximum 99999999, minimum 0.0000001
Decimal point: usable
(4) Operational precision: decimal 8 digits
(5) Nesting degree of macro calling: up to 4 levels
(6) Repetition Identification number: 13
(7) Nesting of [
]: up to 5 levels
(8) Nesting degree of subprogram calling: up to 4 levels

(9) The above-mentioned functions: User Macro B may perform all of them while A can only
perform the following operations.
(i) The variables beyond the amount are applicable.
(ii) The following operations may be performed between variables:, , OR, XOR.
190
(iii) IF [ <Conditions> ] GOTO
n is applicable.
(iv) Simple calling and modal calling are possible.
3.10.11 Descriptions for P/S alarm

Alarm No.004
Addresses are not found in proper positions
(Example): X1*1:
No.004 alarm will be given when * instead of the next address appears after X1.
Alarm No.114
The formats other than <Formula> are incorrect. This type of alarm indicators up a lamp
in the following conditions:
(a) The characters following an address shall not be numerical values, , , #, [,
(Example): XF1000:
XSIN [ 10 ]:
(b) The formats other than IF (also called WHILE)[ <Formula><Formula> ]
(Example) IF [ #1 EQ #2 ] GOTO 10:
WHILE [ #1 SIN#2 ] DO1:
3.10.12 Examples of user macros

3.10.12.1 Groove machining
User macro performs fixed cycles of groove in the range of the figure below, where Z is the
machining range of certain depth and z the cutting amount of the machining range.
(1) User macro call instruction

191

G65
P9802
XxYyZzRrQqIIJjKkTtDdFfEe*
The meaning of all addresses

xy: Absolute coordinates of the axes X and Y (Left bottom corner of the groove) at the
origin.
zr: Absolute coordinates of Point Z and Point R (See the figure)
g: The cutting amount of each machining (positive)
ij: The lengths (positive) in the directions of X and Y in machining area (see the figure)
(the machining efficiency will be higher when i> j.
k: Allowable amount at the end
t: The machining width shall not exceed the tool radius xt%
d: Tool radius compensation number (0199)
f: The feedrate in xy plane
e: The feedrate during cutting in, the feed is at 8Xe feedrate 1mm before cutting in.
(2) User macro body
0 9802;
#27#[2000#7];
#28=#6+#27;
#29=#5-2*#28;
#30=2*#27*#23/100;
#31=FUP[#29/#30];
#32=#29/#31;
#10=#24+#28;
#11=#25+#28;
#12=#24+#4-#28;
#13=#26+#26+#6;
G00
X#10
Y#11;
Z#18;
#14=18;
D01;
#14=#14#17;
IF[#14GE13]GOTO 1;
#14=#13;
192

N1
G01
Z#14
F#8;
X#12 F#9;
#15=1;
WHILE[#15
LE
#31] D02;
Y[#11+#15*#32];
IF[#15
AND
1 EQO]GOTO02;
X#10;
GOTO
3;
N2 X#12;
N3 #15=#15+1;
END2;
G00 Z #18;
X#10 Y#11;
IF[#14 LE#13]GOTO 4;
G01 Z[#14+1F[8*#8];
END1;
N4 M99;
3.10.13 External output instructions

Besides typical user macro instructions, the following macro instructions (external output
instructions) may be executed.
(a) BPRNT
(b) DPRNT
(c) POPEN
(d) POLOS
These instructions are for the purpose of outputting values and texts of variable through
RS232 interface.
These instructions shall be instructed in the following order:
OPEN instruction: POPEN
Get external I/O equipment interface ready before outputting a series of data
instructions.
Data output instruction: BPRNT and DPRNT
193
Execute the necessary data output instructions.

Close instruction: POLOS
The instruction shall be used at the end of all data output instructions to disable external
I/O devices and interfaces.
3.10.13.1 OPEN instruction: POPEN

POPEN:
While an external I/O device and its interface is executing an instruction, the instruction shall
be executed to output DC2 control code from the NC side before outputting a series of data
instructions.
3.10.13.2 Data output instruction BPRNT DPRNT

(1) BPRNT [ a
#b
Character
Variable
[o] ]
Number of effective digits after decimal point
The output of characters and binary output of variables are performed during the
execution of BPRNT instruction.
(a) Characters: Instructed characters output as ISO codes. The characters that can be
instructed include:
z
Latin letters (AZ)
z
Numerical values
Special characters (*,/,+,-)

* is output as a space code.
(b) Since all variables with a decimal point will be saved. The number of the valid digits after
decimal point is indicated with the parentheses following a variable instruction. The
variable value that takes the digits after decimal point into account is indicated with a
2-character data (32bit) and starts from high byte outputting in binary data.
(c) EOB codes outputs with ISO codes after outputting instruction data.
(d) The variables of <Empty> cannot be output (with 114#p/s alarm)
(2) DPRNT [
#b
[cd]
Number of the digits after decimal point
Number of the digits before decimal point
Variable
Character
The output of characters and digits of numerical values may be performed with ISO
codes during the execution of DPRNT.
(a) Refer to the descriptions for the points (a), (c) and (d) of BPRNT instruction.
194
(b) During the output of a variable value, the variable number is specified after character #.
Here the numbers of the digits before and after decimal point are specified in
parentheses.
The number of digits of a variable value starts from high-byte valid digit. Each digit and
its decimal point are output through ISO codes.
A variable value consists of up to eight digits. If its high-byte digit is 0, then no code will
be output when No. 315 parameter PRT=1 and space code is output when PRT=0.
Whenever no decimal is output, + code outputs space code when No.315 parameter
PRT=0 in the situation of its sign is positive (+). No code will be output when PRT=1.
3.10.13.3 Close instruction PCLOS

PCLOS
To release the machining link of external I/O unit, the instruction is specified at the end of all
data output instructions. DC4 control codes are output through NC.
3.10.13.4 Necessary settings for using the function

(1) Set No.341 parameter so as to use the output unit RS232C for communication
outputting.
(2) Set all data (baud rate, etc) of the RS232C interface for one of No. 310 to 313
parameters according to the above output unit predetermined for No.341 parameter.
(3) Set the ISO codes as output codes.
(4) Set No.315 parameter so as to determine whether to put space for the preceding 0 when
outputting data with DPRNT instruction.
0
PRT
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
The leading zero is treated by PRT DPRNT instruction as follows during the output of data.
0: Output space
1: Not output
3.10.13.5 Cautions
(1) It is unnecessary to continuously set the open instruction (POPEN), data output
instruction (BPRENT, DPRNT) and close instruction (PCLOS). After setting the open
instruction at the beginning of a program, it is not necessary to set the open instruction
until the close instruction is set.
(2) Open instruction and close instruction shall be set in pair without omission.
That is, close instruction shall be given at the end of a program. It is impossible to
individually set the close instruction without the open instruction.
(3) Reset the data output instruction in the execution of stop program and cancel the data
195
that follows.
If the reset process is instructed by with M30 or a similar instruction at the end of a data
output program, you need to specify the close instruction at the end of the program and
to wait until all data is output before the start of M30 or other reset process.
(4) It is necessary to select Macro B and I/O interface for the function.
3.10.14 Macro interruption function (Macro B)

If a interruption is input for NC between M96 PX X X X; and M97; blocks, control will go to PX
X X X program.
Setting M99; program returns from the original program. The sequence number of the
original program returned to may be set with address P.
(Note 1): Refer to Appendix 11 for the details of the functions of macro.
(Note 2): Make sure to refer to the operation manual supplied by the manufacture of the
machine when using this function.
3.11 Tool Life Management

Tools are divided into serial groups. Specific tool life (in time or number of cycles) is specified
for each group. The so-called tool life management function refers to the capability of
totalizing the tool life of all groups in service and replacing a tool in the predetermined order
in the same group.
3.11.1 Setting of tool groups

The order of the tools in each group and the life of each tool are preset in the NC device in
the following format.
Format
O
G10L3
P L
Meaning
Program number
To set the beginning of tool groups
What follows P is the group number of N01~128
196

What follows L is the tool life of No.19999 tools (Note 1)
(1)
What follows T is a tool number
(2)
What follows H is a tool length offset number
What follows D is a tool offset number
TH O O D
TH O O D
TH O O D ;
P L;
TH O O D ;
G11:
M02(M30):
N Tool selecting order: (1), (2) till (N)

The data of the next group
To set the end of tool group
End of program
The setting procedures are as follows:

(i) Like the general DNC functions, press ENTER in EDIT mode after activating the DNC
communication interface. Programs will be loaded into the part program storage and get
ready for display and edition.
(ii) In storage mode, perform a cycle starting operation so as to run the programs. Data will
be saved in the tool life data area. At the same time, the tool life data of all tool groups
saved earlier will be deleted and the tool life counter cleared. Once data is saved, it will
not lose even after power failure.
(iii) In the operation of Step (i), perform a cycle starting operation in DNC mode and save the
contents of the program directly into the tool life data area through RS232. Now display
and edition cannot be performed as Step (i).
(Note 1) Whether tool life will be indicated in time (min) or frequency (number of cycles) shall
be set by parameter (309LOTM).
(Note 2) One of the following four groups may be selected for tool group number and tool
numbers (309GST1,GST2)
In any type of combination, up to 256 tools can be saved. At most 16 groups can be selected
for group , each group having 16 tools. Group may have 32 groups at most and each
group may have 8 tools, and so on. A type of combination may be changed by modifying its
parameters and then switching off and on the power supply.
Group No.
Tool No.
16
16
32
64
128
(Note 3) H codes and D codes can be omitted when they are not to be used.
197
(Note 4) The same tool number may appear for many times or appear in any position in set
data. The following is an example of program format.
00001;
G10L3;
P001 L0150;
T0011 H02 D13;
T0132 H05 D08;
T0068 H14 D16;
P002 L1400;
T0061 H15 D07;
T0241 H25 D04;
T0134 H17 D03;
T0074 H08 D21;
P003 L0700;
T0012 H14 D08;
T0202 H22 D02;
G11;
M02;
Data of No.1 group
Data of No.2 group
Data of No.3 group
(Note 5) The tool group numbers specified by P are not necessarily continuous and all
savable tool groups need not to be set.
3.11.2 Setting in machining processes

Tool groups are set by T codes as follows in machining processes.
Program format
Meaning
198

T
M O 6 T ;
H;
D00

To use tool group number + tool life administration invalidation
number (Note 1) at the beginning of the next M06 instruction.
The tools specified by (Note 2) are concluded and
those specified by are started.
99 : The tool offset specified by valid group number
00 : Cancellation of tool length offset
99 : The tool compensation specified by valid group number.
00: Cancellation of tool compensation
To use the tools set by after the next M06 instruction.
Tool end number and tool start number
End of machine program
T ;
M O 6 T;
M02
( M
3 0
);
(Note 1) It is set by tool life administration invalidation number from T 0 0 0 0 to

T as common T code instructions without tool life administration. When T tool code
plus group number is specified, the tool life administration of the concerned group
is administrated. Tool life administration invalidation number is set by parameter.
For example, when the value is 100, T0000 through T0100 will be output as common T
codes. When T0101 is specified, the T codes of the tools in No.1 group that have not
reached their service life will be output.
(Note 2) The above program format is used for tool return number instruction mode. Tool
return instruction is required for tool change. It is not required for other instructions. After that,
the T codes of M06 can be neglected. Now the similar tool change operation is performed as
above.
The following is an example of the program format whose tool life administration invalidation
number is 100 in a tool return number instructing method.
Program format
Meaning
199
T 0 1 0 1;
M 0 6 T 0 0 0 3;
G 4 3 H 9 9;
G 4 1 D 9 9;
D 0 0;
H 0 0;
T 0 0 0 5;
M 0 6 T 0 1 0 1;
What follows the next M06 instruction is No.1 group of the used tools.
End of the currently used No.0003 tool and start of using No.1 group of
tools
The setting of the tool length offset number used in No. 1 group
The setting of tool offset number used in No. 1 group
Cancellation of tool compensation
Cancellation of tool length compensation
To use No.0005 tool after the next M06 instruction
End of No.1 group of tools and start of No.0005 tool
3.11.3 Performance of tool life administration

3.11.3.1 Tool life calculation
(1) When tool life is determined in time (min)
Now, T (tool life administration invalidation numbertool group
number) and M06 are instructed in succession. M06 is specified in machine program
again. In cutting method, the actual time of tool usage is calculated by specified time
interval (4s). The time for single block stop, Feedrate, rapid traverse (positioning), dwell,
etc is not included. The maximum set life value is 4300min.
(2) When tool life is determined in number of cycles
Whenever a cycle starting operation is performed, it operates until M02 or M30 is
instructed and NC reset. Then the counter for the used tool group increases by 1. The
counter increases by 1 even a group is instructed for several times in the same program.
Life value is up to 9999. Each group of calculated life and contents of counter will not
lose after power failure.
(Note) For specifying life in number of cycles, EXTERNAL RESET (ERS) or RESET AND
REWIND (RRW) signal is input in NC when M02 or M30 is executed.
3.11.3.2 Tool change signal and tool change reset signal

Another tool will be selected in the predetermined order after the end of tool life. When the
last tool in the same tool group has reached its service life, a tool change signal will be given.
The tool to be changed is displayed on LCD. Then the relevant group number is specified
200
and tool change reset signal input or MDI panel (see 3.11.4.3) operated. All data such as life
counter *,@, etc (see 3.11.4.2) are cleared. All tool groups are changed and reset when tool
change signal is automatically released at the end of tool life. After machining is restored, the
group starts selection from the first tool.
(Note) For specifying tool life in time, tool change signal is output once it has reached service
life and machining goes on until the end of program. For specifying tool life in number of
cycles, tool change signal is output in case of M02 or M30 reset at the end of tool life.
3.11.3.3 New tool selection signal

When a new tool is selected from a group, tool T code and new tool selection signal are
output at the same time. When a new tool is selected, the signal may be used for the
automatic measurement of tool compensation.
3.11.3.4 Tool skip signal

It is possible to forcibly change a tool even it has not reached its service life.
(I) Set the group where the tool is and input tool skip signal. Use the next T code instruction
to select the next tool in the group.
(II) Input tool skip signal without specifying a group number but assuming the selected tool is
specified. Follow (i) for other issues.
Following (I) or (II) shall be set by parameter. Service life starts from 0 no matter which
method is followed. However, output a tool change signal when the tool skip signal inputs
the last tool.
(Note) When STL or SPL or both of them are lit, it indicates that what is input is neither tool
change signal nor tool skip signal.
3.11.4 The display and input of tool data

3.11.4.1 The display and modification of tool group number
In the part program storage and edition area, tool group data may be displayed and modified
like the edition of common programs. As described in Section 11.1, modified program shall
be executed; otherwise it cannot be saved in the tool life data area.
3.11.4.2 The display of tool life data during the execution of machine program
Pressing the DIAGNOSIS button twice in any mode displays the first page of tool life data in
the following format on the screen of LCD.
201
Group No.
T 0 0L
Service life
LIFF
DA TA
01 :
00001
N0012
SELECTED GRP
GRP
GRP
GRP
001:
LIFE
9800
001
COUNT
Life counter
* 0034
*0078
* 0090
@0 0 7 6
0032
0098
0054
0010
0099
0087
0077
service
0066
0055
0024
The tools in Group 1

*: The tool whose life
has come to an end
(a): The
tool
in
LIFE
0500
COUNT 0112
#:
* 0011
*0 0 2 2
*0 2 0 1
*0 1 4 4
* 0155
*0 0 6 6
*0 1 7 6
*0 1 8 8
#0019
0234
0007
0112
0156
0090
0016
0232
0 0 2:
TO
003
BE
006
*0012
6501
*0056
The skipped tool
The tool number in

Group 2
CHANGED :
012
013
LSK
014
INC
The tool group number to

be changed
Two groups of data are displayed on each page. Pressing the page turning button displays
all data groups in sequence. Tool change signal may be given to up to 5 groups, which are
displayed at the bottom of each page. For 6 or more groups, an arrow will be indicated in the
diagram.
To review the data, select address N, enter the group number and press the INPUT button,
or pressure press the CURSOR button to move the cursor to the GRP of the next group
and to display its data.
3.11.4.3 Presetting tool life counter

To modify the tool life counter, select the MDI mode.
(I) P and press the INPUT button.
Now the group counter that is identified by the cursor is preset while other
data in the group remains unchanged.
(II) Type in P9999 and press the INPUT button.
All the executed data in the group identified by the cursor including * are cleared. It
202
functions as the reset of the tools in the group (see Section 3.11.3.2).
3.11.5 Other cautions

Part program storage and edition area will reduce the storage area in the last part for the
purpose of tool life data area. When data is saved in the part program and edition area in
EDIT mode as described in Section 11.1, more area will be occupied.
3.12 The Indexing Function of Indexing Worktable

The 4th axis (e.g. Axis B) may be used for the indexing of indexing work. Indexing instruction
only employees the angle specified by Address B. The process becomes simple as it is
unnecessary to set the M codes for worktable tensioning and releasing.
3.12.1 Instructing methods

3.12.1.1 Input unit
Decimal point, B 11 shall not be used.
Note: When a decimal is used, PS alarm will be given one the digits after it are instructed. (N
O 180) means that the value less than 1 cannot be instructed.
3.12.1.2 Absolute / incremental instruction

Absolute / incremental instruction can be instructed by G90/G91.
Absolute instruction G90
B45; Indexing of 45 position
Incremental instruction G 91 B45; Indexing of negative rotation 45
The point A in the above figure is the actual position. The mentioned instruction moves as
shown in the above figure.
203
3.12.1.3 Concurrently controlled axes

Axis B shall be individually specified. PS alarm will be given when X, Y, Z or the 5th axis is
instructed along with Axis B (NO181).
3.12.2 Minimum travel unit: 0.001 degree/pulse

3.12.3 Feedrate
As a rule, the feedrate of axis B is a rapid one regardless the state of Group 01 G codes (G
00, G01, G02 and G03). When Axis B is instructed in G 00, G01, G02 or G03 mode, the G 00,
G01, G02 and G03 in the blocks regarding other axes are still valid, and hence it is not
necessary to specify G 00, G01, G02 and G03 again.
G01 X10 F5;
Axis X operates at cutting feedrate.
B45 ;
Axis B operates at cutting feedrate.
X29 ;
Axis X operates at cutting feedrate.

(G01 is still valid.)
No-load operation is invalid.
3.12.4 The clamping and release of indexing worktable

The clamping and release of indexing worktable is automatically performed before and after
the movement of Axis B.
(1)
Indexing sequence A
204

(2)
Indexing sequence B
Positioning check is always performed at the Point A when the above indexing sequence A/B
is selected by parameter setting.
Note 1: Clamping or releasing signals are cleared when the NC is reset in the waiting state
after clamping or release. NC unit then completes the waiting state and enters into reset
state.
Note 2: In clamping or releasing mode, these states remain unchanged even the unit is reset,
namely the sequence of release or clamping cannot be automatically executed through reset,
but clamping are releasing signals are cleared.
Note 3: The waiting state after clamping or releasing is displayed in diagnosis mode display
state (DGN701-BCNT).
3.12.5 Jog/step/handwheel
Operations in Jog/step/handwheel mode cannot be performed for Axis B. However it may
return to the reference point in Jog mode. Travel stops once the axis selection signal
becomes 0 when manually returning to the reference point. Clamping instruction is not
performed. In order to avoid the problem, set the sequence program on the machine side so
that the axis selection signal will not become 0 before returning to the reference point.
3.12.6 Other cautions

(1)
The indication of the actual position on the screen of LCD, indication of external
position and the indication on the screen of COMND have a decimal point.
Example: B180.000
(2)
Whether the internal absolute coordinates of NC for Axis B use 360 full circle is set by
parameter (314IRND).
(i) when IRND0, absolute coordinate is rounded to 360 and starts from 0 position.
If G90 B720; is specified, Axis B rotates by 720 (2 turns) and the actual position
205
indication and absolute coordinate is 720.

(ii) When IRND1, absolute coordinate and the actual position are rounded to 360.
However the rounding of absolute coordinates is performed after the travel for
increment determination. That is, if G90 B720; is specified from 0 position, Axis B
will rotate by 720 (2 turns) and absolute coordinate will be 0. Now the actual
position changes as follows:
0
90
180
270
90
180
270
0.
The result of 360 rounding, absolute coordinates and actual position are displayed
between 0 and 359.
For the RELATIVE in the display of the actual position (ABSOLUTE RELATIVE),
rounding is only performed when parameter No. 007 PPD1.
No matter it is in the condition of (i) or (ii), the mechanical coordinate system often
uses 360 for rounding. When automatic return to the reference point is specified,
(G28) calculates the amount of movement with the mechanical coordinate system.
The movement between the intermediate point and reference point is less than
360 (on turn).
(3)
The following requirements are made through parameter setting (314IM15):

When IM151:
(i) Axis-B instruction shall be always considered as absolute instruction regardless
the G90 or G91 mode.
(ii) The rotating direction is positive.
(iii) When M15 is pacified in the same block as the Axis-B instruction, the rotating
direction is negative.
(Note) Though M15 is processed inside the NC, FIN signal returns to the NC because
MF and M codes are sent to the machine side.
(4) During the movement of Axis B, Feedrate, reset and emergent stop are valid. Proper
workpiece shall be done on the machine side in order to prevent stop in midway.
(5) When the option is adopted, the additional axis servo ON signal (*8VF4) will become
invalid.
206
(6) Standard additional axis still applies to the requirements, parameters and inter-unit
connection that are not described in the instruction manual.
207
Add: No.52, 1st . Street, Luochong North Road, Luochongwei, Guangzhou, 510165, China
Website: http://www.gsk.com.cn
Tel: 86-20-81796410/81797922
E-mail: gsk@gsk.com.cn
Fax: 86-20-81993683
All specification and designs are subject to change without notice.
Aug.
2007/Edition 4
Aug.
2007/Printing 4
User Manual
(Volume II: Operations)
Foreword
Dear user,
We are really grateful for your patronage and purchase of GSK983M milling CNC system made by
GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.
This manual consists of two volumes. Volume I mainly describes the specifications
and programming of the system while Volume II operations, all codes, parameters,
I/O interfaces and other appendices.
This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel as

improper operations may cause accidents. Please carefully read this user
manual before usage.
All specifications and designs herein are subject to change without further notice.
We are full of heartfelt gratitude to you for supporting us in the use of GSKs
products.
GSK983M Milling CNC System Operation Manual (Volume II: Operations)
CONTENTS
4. OPERATIONS......................................................................................................................................1
4.1 Power On/off .................................................................................................................................1
4.1.1 Power on ..................................................................................................................................1
4.1.2 Power off ..................................................................................................................................1
4.2 Key Switch.....................................................................................................................................1
4.3 Operations Involving with the Operation Panel .........................................................................1
4.3.1 Operation panel........................................................................................................................1
4.3.2 Emergency stop (red)...............................................................................................................2
4.3.3 Selection mode.........................................................................................................................3
4.3.4 Operations involving with manual operation .............................................................................3
4.3.4.1 Jog feed .............................................................................................................................3
4.3.4.2 MPG feed...........................................................................................................................4
4.3.4.3 Manual absolute ................................................................................................................5
4.3.5 Manually returning to reference point (reference position) .......................................................9
4.3.6 Operations on automatic running ...........................................................................................10
4.3.6.1 Start of automatic operation .............................................................................................10
4.3.6.2 Suspension of automatic operation..................................................................................10
4.3.6.3 Single block .....................................................................................................................10
4.3.6.4 Restart after feed hold or stop .........................................................................................11
4.3.6.5 The manual operations in automatic run..........................................................................11
4.3.6.6 The MDI operations in automatic run ...............................................................................11
4.3.6.7 Skipping over optional blocks ..........................................................................................12
4.3.6.8 Feedrate override ............................................................................................................12
4.3.6.9 Dry run .............................................................................................................................12
4.3.6.10 Machine lock..................................................................................................................12
4.3.6.11 Display lock....................................................................................................................12
4.3.6.12 Mirror image...................................................................................................................12
4.3.6.13 Rapid traverse override .................................................................................................13
4.3.6.14 External workpiece number search function ..................................................................13
4.3.7 JOG feed at any angle ...........................................................................................................14
4.3.8 Manual insertion .....................................................................................................................15
4.3.8.1 Inserting operations by MPG(manual pulse generator/handwheel) .................................15
4.3.8.2 Manual inserting movement by MPG...............................................................................16
4.4 The Display and Operations of the MDI/LCD Panel with LCD Characters .............................17
4.4.1 Status display .........................................................................................................................18
4.4.2 Key input ................................................................................................................................18
4.4.3 Display of program numbers and sequence numbers ............................................................19
4.4.4 Alarm display (function button ALARM)..................................................................................20
4.4.5 Operator information ..............................................................................................................21
4.4.6 Display of actual position and reset (function key POSITION) ...............................................21
4.4.7 Indication of instruction value (function button COMMAND) ..................................................22
4.4.8 Setting (function button SETTING) ........................................................................................24
4.4.8.1 Display and setting of input, output, etc ...........................................................................24
4.4.8.2 Display and setting of user macro variables ....................................................................26
4.4.9 Operating through MDI (function key COMMAND) ................................................................27
4.4.10 Start of MDI motion...............................................................................................................28
4.4.11 Reset ....................................................................................................................................28
4.4.12 Tool position offset................................................................................................................29
4.4.13 Setting and display of workpiece origin offset (Optional) ......................................................30
4.4.14 Measurement of tool length ..................................................................................................31
4.4.15 Program display (function button PROGRAM).....................................................................31
4.4.16 Program number search (function key PROGRAM) ............................................................33
4.4.17 Inputting a program with keys...............................................................................................33
III

4.4.18 Deletion of a program...........................................................................................................35
4.4.19 Deletion of all programs .......................................................................................................35
4.4.20 Sequence number search ....................................................................................................35
4.4.21 Restart of a program ............................................................................................................36
4.4.22 Program number comparison stop function..........................................................................39
4.4.23 Display of parameters (function button: PARAMETER) .......................................................40
4.4.24 Program edit.........................................................................................................................40
4.4.24.1 Word scanning...............................................................................................................41
4.4.24.2 Word search ..................................................................................................................42
4.4.24.3 Address search ..............................................................................................................42
4.4.24.4 Methods for returning to the beginning of a program .....................................................42
4.4.24.5 Word insertion (active when the program protection lock is disabled) ...........................43
4.4.24.6 Word modification (active when the program protection lock is disabled)......................44
4.4.24.7 Insertion and modification of several words, blocks and strings ....................................44
4.4.24.8 Word deletion (active when the program protection lock is disabled) ............................45
4.4.24.9 The deletion of the part before EOB ..............................................................................45
4.4.24.10 Deletion of blocks (active as program protection lock is disabled)...............................45
4.4.24.11 Storage sorting.............................................................................................................46
4.4.24.12 The indication of all stored program numbers..............................................................46
4.4.24.13 Edit of user macro (active as the program protection lock is disabled) ........................46
4.4.25 Indication of run time ............................................................................................................48
4.4.26 Menu switching function .......................................................................................................48
4.4.27 Operations of LCD soft function keys ...................................................................................50
4.4.27.1 General ..........................................................................................................................50
4.4.27.2 Display ...........................................................................................................................50
4.4.27.3 Direct entry of measured workpiece origin offset ...........................................................57
4.5 Position Indication through Position Display Unit (Available upon Customers Request) ..58
Appendix 1 Codes for Programming ........................................................................................59
Appendix 2 G Codes List ...........................................................................................................62
Appendix 3 Ranges of Instruction Values ................................................................................64
Appendix 4 Calculating Chart....................................................................................................65
Appendix 5 Parameters..............................................................................................................69
Appendix 6 Alarms List............................................................................................................108
Appendix 7 List of the States during Switching On, Reset and Clearance..........................117
Appendix 8 Memory Type Pitch Error Compensation ...........................................................119
Appendix 9 Operations List .....................................................................................................125
Appendix 10 Lock of Program Key .........................................................................................127
Appendix 11 The Interrupt Function of User Macro...............................................................129
IV
4. OPERATIONS
4.1 Power On/off
4.1.1 Power on
1) Make sure all parts of the machine are properly wired and secured.
2) Switch on the machine by following its manual.
3) Pictures appear on the LCD several seconds after switching on the machine.
4.1.2 Power off

1) The indicator of the cycle start button on the operation panel of the machine goes out.
2) All moving parts of the machine stop.
3) Make sure the above operations are performed well and then press down and hold the
POWER OFF button for 1 or 2 seconds.
4) Disconnect the power supply of the machine by following its manual.
Note: Never use the keys on the MDI keypad to power on/off the machine.
4.2 Key Switch

A key switch for program protection may be set with the operation panel of the machine. The key
switch offers two modes of protection:
1)
Relevant operations cannot be performed unless the key switch is actuated. However, the
concerned data is still displayed on the LCD.
2)
Operations can or cannot be performed without actuating the key switch. It is possible to
switch between the two modes by parameter.
The Section 4.4 herein will describe in detail which functions are under the protection of 1) or 2)
mode.
4.3 Operations Involving with the Operation Panel

4.3.1 Operation panel
The functions of the operation panel and the layout of switches on it vary depending on different
machine types. The following is a typical operation panel. Refer to the relevant parts of the manual
supplied with the machine for details. This chapter only describes the operation panel of 3-axis
control system (The operation panels of 4-axis and 5-axis control systems are primarily similar to
that of a 3-axis control system).
4.3.2 Emergency stop (red)
In an emergency, press the EMERGENCY STOP button to stop the movements of all the axes of
the machine. At the same time, the button is locked in the stop position.
The release mode of the button varies with different manufacturers. In general, it is released by
pushing down and clockwise turning the button.
Note 1: The power supply of the motor is switched off when the button is pressed.
Note 2: The control unit is in reset state.
Note 3: Make sure to eliminate all troubles before releasing the button.
Note 4: Return to the reference point by through manual operations or G28 instruction.
4.3.3 Selection mode
Modes
EDIT
AUTO
(MEMORY)
MDI
JOG
MPG(HANDLE)
MACHINE
ZERO (HOME)
Functions
Perform the following operations:
(1) Saving programs in storage;
(2) Modifying, inserting and deleting programs;
(3) Outputting the programs in storage and editing other programs
(1) Executing the programs saved in storage;
(2) Search the sequence numbers of the programs in storage
(1) Manual data entry may be performed through MDI and the
operation panel of the machine.
(1) It is possible to perform Jog feed.
(1) It is possible to perform manual feed.
Return to the machine zero.
4.3.4 Operations involving with manual operation

Except the automatic operations that can be performed with programs, it is possible to conduct
the following manual operations with switches.
4.3.4.1 Jog feed

Jog feed enables the machine to move.
1)
Set the selection mode switch to JOG position.
2)
Select a motion axis so that the machine travels in the selected direction.
Note 1
2 axes may be concurrently controlled by manual operation.
Note 2
After power on, the selected axis of the machine will not immediately move even the
SELECTION MODE switch is set to JOG position. Now it is necessary to reselect an axis.
3)
Selecting Jog feedrate

Position
of switch
0
Feedrate
Lead screw for feed in metric system
mm/min
inch/min
0
0
Lead screw for feed in Inch system

inch/min
mm/min
0
0
1.0
0.04
0.02
0.508
1.4
0.055
0.208
0.711
2.0
0.079
0.04
1.02
2.7
0.106
0.054
1.37
3.7
0.146
0.074
1.88
5.2
0.205
0.104
2.64
7.2
0.283
0.144
3.66
10
0.394
0.2
5.08
14
0.551
0.28
7.11
10
20
0.787
0.40
10.2
11
27
1.06
0.54
13.7
12

37
1.46
0.74
18.8
13
52
2.05
1.04
26.4
14
72
2.83
1.44
36.6
15
100
3.94
2.00
50.8
16
140
5.51
2.80
71.1
17
200
7.87
4.00
102
18
270
10.6
5.40
137
19
370
14.6
7.40
188
20
520
20.5
10.40
264
21
720
28.3
14.40
366
22
1000
39.4
20.00
508
23
1400
55.1
28.00
711
24
2000
78.7
40.00
1016
Note 1: The numerical values listed in the above table vary with different machines.
Note 2: The allowable deviation of the feedrates listed in the above table is approximately 3%.
4)
Rapid traverse
An axis rapidly traverses in the selected direction when the button is pressed.
Note 1: The feedrate, time constant and acceleration/deceleration mode for manual rapid traverse are
the same as the rapid traverse under G00 program instruction.
Note 2: When the machine has a memory type travel limit selecting function, it shall be provided with an
axis with the function of returning to the reference point. When the RAPID button is pressed after
power on or emergency stop, its feedrate will not change into rapid feed but maintain at Jog
feedrate provided that the function of returning to the reference point is not executed.
This is because memory type travel limit dose not function before the manual return to the
reference point, thereby preventing the machine from quickly reaching the end of run.
4.3.4.2 MPG feed

Make accurate adjustment for the feed of the machine with a manual impulse generator as
follows.
(1) Set the SELECTION MODE switch to MPG position.
(2) Select a motion axis.
(3) Turn the handwheel of manual impulse generator.
Clockwise..+ direction
Counterclockwise
- direction
(The rotating direction depends on the settings of manufacturers)

(4) Amount of travel: Some of the operation panels are provided with the following selector
switches: 10 means multiplying amount of travel by 10 while 100 by 100.
Input system
Input in metric system
Input in inch system
1
0.001mm
0.0001inch
The amount of travel each step

10
100
0.01mm
0.1mm
0.001inch
0.01inch
Note 1: If the handwheel rotates at a speed over 5 turns per second, the amount of the rotation of the
4

handwheel will differ from the travel distance of the machine. Hence do not rotate the handwheel
too quickly.
Note 2: When 100 override is selected and the handwheel is turned at quick speed or the workbench
moves at rapid traverse rate, the machine will be subject to impact if it is stopped abruptly. The
selection automatic acceleration/deceleration function is also valid for manual feed, thereby
reducing mechanical shock.
4.3.4.3 Manual absolute
If the switch is set to ON, the manual-operated travel amount will be added to the coordinate axes.
(1)
MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch ON: Coordinates change with manual operation.
(2)
MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch OFF: Coordinates do not change.
(Example) For example, in the following blocks:
G01
G90
X100.0
Y100.0
F010
X200.0
Y150.0
X300.0
Y200.0
a) The above block has been executed while block is only executed after manual
operation (travel by 20.0 in X direction and 100.0 in Y direction).
b) Press the FEED HOLD button in the execution of the block . After manual operation
(Y+75.0), press the CYCLE START button so as to cancel the hold mode and continue the
execution.
c) Press the FEED HOLD button in the execution of the block . Reset the machine after
manual operation (Y+75.0). The block restarts inputting.
d)
When manual operation is followed by a single-axis instruction, then only the instructed axis
returns to the programmed absolute position of the axis.
N1 G01 G90
N2 X200.0
N3 Y160.0
X100.0
Y100.0 F5000
e) When manual operation is followed by an incremental instruction, then the position that the
6

axis moves to is identical with that is instructed while the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is set
to OFF.
Note 1: Insert manual operations when tool radius compensation C offsets. Now the actual motion path
of the tool is as follows:
(1)
MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch OFF

When tool radius compensation C is enabledIf MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is switched off for
manual operation when tool radius compensation C is enabled, the path of the automatic tool
motion will translate in parallel by the offset of the inserted manual operation.
(2)
MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch ON

When tool radius compensation C is enabledIf MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is switched on for
manual operation when tool radius compensation C is enabled, the path of the tool under
absolute instruction after restart is as follows. The tool path for the blocks after manual operation
runs parallel to the vectors of the origin of the next block.
Tool path is determined by the vectors between the next block and the block that follow. For the angle
machining with the intervention of manual operation, its tool path is identical with the above.
If a program consists of incremental instructions rather than absolute instructions, its tool path is
identical with that when the MANUAL ABSOLUTE switch is set to OFF.
(a) Performing manual operations during execution of a block
Example 1: In the following programmed path (PAPBPCPD), assuming the point PH
between PA and PB is moved to point PH by manual operation after pressing the FEED
HOLD button, the end point PB of the current block translates to point PB due to the offset
as a result of manual operation and the vectors VB1 and VB2 of the original point PB also
translate to VB1 and VB2.
The vectors between the next block (tool path from PB to PC) and the one that follows (from
PC to PD) do not need compensation. The new vectors (VC1, VC2) with compensation
results from the relationship between the two blocks (programmed paths from PB and PC to
PD and from PC to PD). Since vector VB2 coincides with VB2, however, the section of path
between PB and PC as a result of tool offset is not accurately performed. But for the block
after point PC, tool offset can be precisely performed.
Example 2: If manual operation is inserted in angle machining in the case of tool radius
compensation, the feed path after manual operation will be determined by the same method
as Example 1. That is, the vectors VA2, VB1 and VB2 in the figure below are determined by
translating the vectors VA2, VB1 and VB2 by an amount of manual travel and the new
vectors result from VC1 and VC2. The block after point PC will be precisely performed by the
tool offset compensation C.
(b) If manual operation is inserted after the execution of single block function, the vectors VB1
and VB2 for the end points of the current block will be moved in parallel and the method for
determining the following feed path will be identical with (a). MDI operation may be inserted
after the execution of a block with single block function. The feed path after MDI operation
coincides with tat after the insertion of a manual operation.
4.3.5 Manually returning to reference point (reference position)

The machine may return to the reference point by manual operations:
1) Set the SELECTION MODE to JOG.
2) Press the MACHINE ZERO key.
3) Move all axes toward the reference point by Jog feed.
The machine rapidly traverses to the deceleration point and then to the reference point at FL
9

speed. Rapid traverse override is still active during traversing.
4) The machine stops at the reference point and the indicator indicating the end of the return to
the reference point is lit.
Note 1: The indicator is lit after the return to the reference point. If the switch for returning to the
reference point is set to ON position, the machine cannot translate in Jog mode.
Note 2: The following procedures may extinguish the indicator: (1) Move the machine away from the
reference point; (2) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button.
Note 3: For the distance to the reference point, refer to the manual supplied by the manufacturer of the
machine.
4.3.6 Operations on automatic running

The machine may automatically run by programs.
4.3.6.1 Start of automatic operation

Procedures for starting the program stored in memory:
(a)
Select the program number. See Section 4.4.16 Program number search.
(b)
Select AUTO mode.
(c)
Press the CYCLE START button. Automatic operation starts once the CYCLE START
button is pressed and at the same time the CYCLE START indicator is lit.
Note 1: The programs read in are loaded when the CYCLE START button is pressed in EDIT mode. The
loading mode is the same as that when the INPUT button is pressed for parameter setting.
Note 2: The CYCLE START button is inactive in the following conditions
(a) When the FEED HOLD button is pressed;
(b) When the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed;
(c) When the RESET signal is enabled (contact the manufacturer of the machine for details);
(d) When the SELECTION MODE switch is set to a wrong position (other than AUTO or EDIT
mode);
(e) When it is search a sequence number;
(f)
When an alarm is given;
(g) When automatic operation is selected;

(h) When the NC system is not ready
4.3.6.2 Suspension of automatic operation

Press the FEED HOLD button
The FEED HOLD indicator illuminates and the CYCLE START indicator goes out when the
FEED HOLD button is pressed. And now,
(a) If the machine is moving, the feed slows down and stops;
(b) If the machine is in hold state, the hold state will interrupt even in FEED HOLD mode;
(c) The machine stops after the performance of M, S, T or B function.
4.3.6.3 Single block

If the SINGLE switch is turned to ON position, the control only executes a block each time and
10

stops when the CYCLE START button is pressed.
The control only executes a block each time and stops when the SINGLE switch is turned on.
When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the control stops after the execution of the next
block.
Note 1: In G28, G29 or G30 mode, the tool stops at the intermediate point if the SINGLE function is used.
Note 2: For fixed circular processing, the tool stops at the end point of the circular path , or of the
fixed cycle (see the figure below) if the SINGLE function is active.
When the result of the fixed circular calculation is not 1, the FEED HOLD indicator illuminates
except the block of the final cycle. The FEED HOLD indicator illuminates whenever block
or stops.
Note 3: For the blocks of M98P, M99 and G65, G66 or G67, the stop of the single block is invalid.
However, it is valid if the instructions in M98 or M99 block are of the addresses other than O, N, L
and P.
4.3.6.4 Restart after feed hold or stop

(1)
Select the AUTO mode;
(2)
Press the CYCLE START button. The FEED HOLD indicator goes out when the CYCLE
START button is pressed.
4.3.6.5 The manual operations in automatic run

(1)
In automatic run, suspend the operation by pressing the FEED HOLD button on the
operation panel or bring the SINGLE switch to ON position.
(2)
Record the coordinates of the stop position displayed by the location display unit.
(3)
Perform JOG operation (see Section 4.3.4.3).
(4)
Return the tool to the recorded coordinates (the origin of JOG operation).
(5)
Set the SELECTION MODE switch to the position before JOG operation so as to restart
automatic run.
(6)
Press the CYCLE START button.
4.3.6.6 The MDI operations in automatic run

(1)
Set the SINGLE switch to ON position.
(2)
Select MDI operation mode.
(3)
Perform MDI operation.
(4)
To restart automatic operation, return to the original operation mode and press the CYCLE
START button on the operation panel.
Note 1: The modal data reserved in cycle movement is under influence when MDI instruction is used.
Note 2: The modal data instructed by MDI is still valid for automatic MDI operation.
11

Note 3: Too radius compensation C is not performed during MDI operation.
Note 4: MDI operation is disabled in feed hold state.
4.3.6.7 Skipping over optional blocks

When some block contains /n(n=1 to 9), the function allows the control to skip over the block.
Switches correspond to the 19 numbers respectively.
Note: While blocks are being read in the buffer from storage, the validity of function of skipping
over optional blocks is judged. Therefore the function is invalid for the blocks read in buffer
register.
4.3.6.8 Feedrate override

For the feedrate set by F function, it is possible to set an override in the range of 10% to 200%.
An override of 10% increment is recommended.
4.3.6.9 Dry run

If the switch is set to ON position in the cycle operation instructed by storage or MDI, the F
function does not work and the machine travels at the following speeds.
RAPID button ON/OFF
In rapid traverse
In cutting feed
RAPID button ON
Rapid traverse
Maximum Jog feedrate
RAPID button OFF
Jog feedrate (see Note)
Jog feedrate
Note: The dry run of rapid traverse may be disabled or enabled by parameter setting.
4.3.6.10 Machine lock

When the MACHINE LOCK switch is set to ON, the movement instruction pulse is inhibited.
Therefore the position indication for circular feed start or JOG operation is continuously
updated according to input instructions. But the machine does not move itself. The function is
used to check procedures.
Note 1:
When G27, G28 or G30 instruction is set, the machine will not return to the reference point.
Hence the indicator for returning to the reference point is not lit.
Note 2:
M, S, T and B functions are performed.
4.3.6.11 Display lock

When the DISPLAY LOCK switch is activated, the coordinates indicated by the location display
unit are locked. For instance, when the coordinate system is moved as a result of JOG
operation, the use of this switch prevents the indicated values from changing by manual
movement.
Note: The function is optional.
4.3.6.12 Mirror image

Once the mirror image switches of axes X and Y as well as the 4th axis are activated in
automatic operation, the axes move reversely. The reference point is returned to by JOG or
automatic operation, the movement between the intermediate point and the reference point
does not inverse and position display depends on the actual movement of the tool. This may
be achieved by setting parameters with MDI unit (see Section 4.4.7).
12
4.3.6.13 Rapid traverse override

It is possible to set the rapid traverse override switch of optional overrides 100%, 50%, 20%
and F0 on the operation panel of the machine.
When the feed speed is 10m/min and the switch is set to 50% position, the actual feed speed
will be 5m/min.
F0 is a fixed speed (feedrate) provided by the manufacturer of the machine. The function
applies to the following conditions:
(1) The rapid traverse specified by G00;
(2) The rapid traverse in fixed cycles;
(3) The rapid traverse in G27, G28, G29 and G30 modes;
(4) JOG rapid traverse;
(5) The rapid traverse for manually returning to the reference point.
4.3.6.14 External workpiece number search function

Select a workpiece number to be processed with the switch on the operation panel of the
machine (No example of the operation panel is given in this user manual). (Machining
programs are pre-stored in the part program storage.) Press the START button. Now the
system automatically executes the program corresponding to the workpiece number. By using
the function, operator does not need to search the stored program numbers so as to reduce
dry run time and errors.
(1) Preparation for the program: In the situations using the function, the numbers assigned to
programs shall correspond to the workpieces to be processed. That is, a number among
01 to 31 shall be designated for each workpiece to be processed. The relevant program
number is expressed as follows:
0(:) 0 0 (0 for EIA and : for ISO)
Workpiece number (01 to 31)
Optional workpiece number
They are stored in the part program memory. As shown in the following examples, each
program shall be started by the address 0 followed by a program number and ended by
M02, M30 or M99.
In addition, the storage of the programs irrespective of workpiece number is allowable.
0
0001
N
0001 G00
The program corresponding to workpiece No. 01
N
120 M02
0
0002
N
0001 G00
N
300 M30
0
0004
N
001 G00
13

080 M02
0
6247
N
001 G00
N
034 M99
Programs irrespective of workpiece number
Note 1:
Each program shall be started by the address 0 followed by a program number and ended by
M02, M30 or M99. However, M02, M30 and M99 cannot be specified in the middle of the
program. If one of them is specified in the middle section, the program that follows will
regarded as another program segment (the block following M02, M30 or M99 is immediately
numbered as a program when the program is stored in memory).
Note 2:
The allowable quantity of workpiece numbers depends on factory setting (see the manual of
the machine).
Note 3:
For the machine system provided with external workpiece number search function A, the
allowable maximum workpiece number is 31. Now the first two digits of the program number
corresponding to a workpiece number must be 00.
(1) Operating procedures
Operating procedures vary with different manufacturers of machine. The operating
procedures described below are general. Refer to the manual supplied by manufacturer of
the machine for specific operating procedures.
Note 1:
Select the automatic mode and then set the program (01 to 31) corresponding to the workpiece
number with the rotary switch on the operation panel on the machine side. When the START
button is pressed, the program corresponding to the set workpiece number will be searched
out and machining performed with the start of the program.
Note 2:
When a workpiece number is set to 00, the corresponding program will not be searched if the
START button is pressed. The execution starts from executable section of the current program.
For the situations that starts in the midway of the program or that the executing program is
independent of workpiece number, it is necessary to set the workpiece number to 00 and press
the START button after sequence number search or program number search.
Note 3:
The function does not apply to MDI operation but automatic operation.
Note 4:
If a program number corresponding to the workpiece number is not stored in the memory, an
alarm (No. 59) will be given once the START button is pressed.
Note 5:
It is not always necessary to select the relevant program even a workpiece number is selected
with the dial. Refer to the manual supplied with the machine for the procedures for selecting a
program. When workpiece number search function A is selected, program search is performed
after the NC system starts automatic operation in reset mode.
4.3.7 JOG feed at any angle

Set an angle and feedrate in the plane of X and Y and then press the START button. In this
way the machine may feed at any set angle by JOG operation.
(1)
Set the SELECTION MODE switch to the mode of JOG feed at any angle
(2)
Set an angle with the angle setting dial. The position of an angle is selected among 0-71 with a
2-digit BCD code. 0 ~71 correspond to 0 ~360 respectively (in 5 increment).
14
For angle setting, make sure to switch on angle strobe pulse. If angle strobe pulse is switched
on, the formerly set angle will remain valid.
As shown in the above figure, the + direction of Axis X is 0 and that of Axis Y is 90.
(3)
Select a feedrate (speed in tangential direction) with the Jog feed dial.
(4)
Press the START button in the mode of JOG feed at any angle. Then the machine moves at
the selected feedrate in the set direction.
If the JOG RAPID button is pressed, the machine will feed at the maximum Jog feedrate. The
machine feeds when the JOG RAPID TRAVERSE button is switched off and stops feed when
it is switched off.
Note 1:
If axes X and Y are interlocked, both axes will slow down and stop. They will restart once the
interlocking is disabled.
Note 2:
In automatic operation, it is possible to insert JOG feed at any angle when the machine is stop
in feed hold mode.
Note 3:
For the situation with external deceleration selection, JOG feed at any angle is also active.
Now the tangential feed is equal to the external decelerating rate.
Note 4:
The automatic acceleration and deceleration for cutting feed also apply to the JOG feed at any
angle.
Note 5:
JOG feedrate at any angle does not change with Jog feedrate even during the switching
between metric and inch systems.
4.3.8 Manual insertion

For the specific axis (fixed by parameter) in automatic operation, the movements operated with
handwheel may be performed in addition to the self-motion of the axis.
4.3.8.1 Inserting operations by MPG(manual pulse generator/handwheel)

Manual insertion is possible by turning the manual pulse generator in the following conditions.
(1)
Mode: automatic mode or MDI mode
(2)
Operating state: Manual insertion is possible during linear interpolation, arc interpolation, spiral
interpolation or sine-curve interpolation.
However, the following conditions are excluded:
(I)
When an alarm is given;
(II) When any axis does not move;

(III) When positioning is valid;
(IV) When interlocking is active;
(V) In the absence of travel instruction.
15
(3)

Manual axis selection signal
Manual axis selection signals (HX, HY, HZ, H4 and H5) are switched on (contacts close) for the
axes to perform manual insertion.
4.3.8.2 Manual inserting movement by MPG

(1)
Amount of travel: The amount of travel to be inserted by manual shall be identical with that
during JOG feed. The amount of travel depends on the scale of the manual pulse generator and
JOG feed overrides (X1, X10 and X100) and is added to that of automatic operation.
(2)
Traverse speed: The axial speed for JOG insertion is the result of the addition of the travel speed
of automatic operation to that inserted by manual. Therefore, axial speed is limited to rapid
traverse speed (Parameter HR) in the event that axial speed exceeds rapid traverse speed.
Displacement mismatches the indicated value of the manual pulse generator.
(3)
The correspondence between manual-inserted travel and all signals is as follows:

Signal
Machine
is
locked
Display
is
locked.
Mirror image of
Axis X
(4)
Affected: The tool does not move when MACHINE LOCK is enabled.
Affected: Relative coordinates remain unchanged when display is locked.
Not affected: The machine moves forward when the handwheel is turned
clockwise.
The correspondence between manual-inserted travel and position indications is as follows:

Indication
Absolute
coordinates
Relative
coordinates
Mechanical
coordinates
(5)
Travel
Travel
Not affected: Manual-inserted pulse is not added to absolute coordinates
Affected: Manual-inserted pulse is added to relative coordinates
Affected: Manual-inserted pulse is not added to mechanical coordinates
Indication of amount of travel: Manual-inserted amount of travel may be displayed in diagnosis

message (Diagnosis No. 805 to 809). To display a diagnosis message, press the function key
DIAGNOSIS on the MDI panel.
Diagnosis data numbering
805
Manual-inserted amount of travel of Axis X
806
Manual-inserted amount of travel of Axis Y
807
Manual-inserted amount of travel of Axis Z
808
Manual-inserted amount of travel of the 4th axis
809
Manual-inserted amount of travel of the 5th axis
Unit: 0.001mm (input in metric system)

0.0001 inch (input in inch system)
Note: Only the removable amounts of travel are cleared.
16
4.4 The Display and Operations of the MDI/LCD Panel with LCD
Characters
The MDI/LCD panel is usually mounted on the upper front side of the control cabinet. It consists
of an LCD and buttons as follows.
Function buttons: The large number of items displayed with the function buttons is just like the
chapters of a book. When a function button is pressed for the second time and third time, the chapter
2 or 3 of the corresponding display functions (if the function button for the chapter is provided). Each
chapter includes several pages and each page is selected with the page button.
4TH
5TH
The names and meanings of all function buttons are listed below.
POSITION
SETTING
Pressing once
Pressing once
Pressing twice
Pressing for
the third time
Pressing once
PROGRAM
Pressing twice
PARAMETER
OFFSET
ALARM
COMMAND
Pressing once
Pressing twice
Pressing once
Pressing twice
Pressing once
Pressing twice
Pressing once
Pressing twice
Display of actual position and reset

Display and setting of set data
Display and setting of user macro variables
Display and setting JOG switch
Display of the information regarding a program in EDIT
mode
Display of the executing or executed blocks and the blocks
that follow in a mode other than EDIT
Display of the list of program numbers (See Section
4.4.24.12) (The chapter 2 may also be omitted depending
on the conditions of the system.)
Display and setting of parameters
Display and setting of PC parameters
Display and setting of offset
Display and setting of origin offset in a workpiece
coordinate system
Display of the information of an alarm
Display of an external alarm and external information
Display of instruction value and the instructions input
through MDI
Display of the information regarding program restart
17

Pressing once Display of system diagnostic data
DIAGNOSIS
Pressing twice Display of the information regarding tool life management
Note: Clear the displayed screen by concurrently pressing a function key and CANCEL button.
The corresponding screen is displayed when the function button is pressed again.
4.4.1 Status display

The status indication of the system is displayed on the lower right part of the screen:
Status indication
The displayed indications are as follows:

NOT READY indicates that the control or servo system fails to operate. LSK indicate the LABEL
SKIP mode created after power on or reset of control rather than in MDI mode. BUF indicates
that a block is read in but not executed. The block not executed still does not disappear after
reset in rather than MDI mode. ABS indicates that MDI instruction is absolute and INC state will
be entered into when the SHIFT button is pressed. INC indicates that MDI instruction is
incremental ABS state will be entered into when the SHIFT button is pressed. ALM indicates that
an alarm is given. The alarm type will be displayed (the symbol blinks) when the ALARM button
is pressed. EDIT indicates that the editing function is being executed (the symbol blinks). The
stopping operation of edition shall be performed when the symbol exits. SRCH indicates that
sequence search is being performed (the symbol blinks). RESTR indicates that the period from
program restart to the return to the final axis (the symbol blinks).
4.4.2 Key input

The entries input with address keys or numerical keys are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
18
Data cannot be typed in any more when the POSITION or and ALARM button among the
function buttons is pressed to display a screen.
Press D/H to enter D and again to enter H.
Only a word consisting of one address and a figure can be typed in when Program edit is not
being performed. Pressing CANCEL once clear a word.
One or more words, a block or any character string of up to 32 characters can be entered with
the keys during Program edit.
The last entered character is cleared by pressing the CANCEL key. If the CANCEL key is
pressed continuously, the typed characters will be cleared in succession.
Note: In EDIT mode, Program edit is possible when the PROGRAM button is pressed.
4.4.3 Display of program numbers and sequence numbers

Program numbers and sequence numbers are displayed at the top of the screen as shown in the
following picture.
19

The meanings of the displayed sequence numbers and program numbers are as follows:
Mode
Mode other than
EDIT
Auto
mode
(MEMORY)
Edit mode
Auto
mode
(MEMORY)
Operation
Indication
In the mode other than EDIT

When search a sequence
number
Pressing the cursor key
when the function button is
in PROGRAM mode
in PRG mode
To display the last displayed sequence

number
To always display the sequence number
during search
To return to the start of a block
To display the block
To review programs in + direction from the
actual position of the storage;
To display the firstly found N value

in PRG mode
To review programs in - direction from the

actual position of the storage;
To display the firstly found N value
Entering reset state by

pressing the RESET button
To return to the switch of the block and

display the block
Program number search
To display
searched
the
program
numbers
4.4.4 Alarm display (function button ALARM)

When ALM is indicated at right bottom of the screen in case of alarm, clear warning messages
through the following procedures
Press the ALARM button. When the information about operator is displayed, press the ALARM
button again to display alarm message.
Refer to Appendix 6 for the meanings of all alarm numbers
Note: As a rule, alarm message appear on the screen in the event of alarm.
20
4.4.5 Operator information

Once the machine sends out operator information, the information will be automatically
displayed on the screen.
When operator information appears after some other page is displayed, press the ALARM button.
When alarm message appears, press it again.
4.4.6 Display of actual position and reset (function key POSITION)

(1)
Press the POSITION button.
(2)
Press the Page button. Data is displayed in one of the following three modes.
(I)
Position display in a relative coordinate system
Relative position is displayed once operator resets a position to zero.

Reset: When the X , Y , Z or 4TH/5TH button is pressed, the pressed address
characters will continuously blink. The relative position of the blinking address will be set for
0 when the SHIFT button is pressed again.
(II) Position display in a workpiece coordinate system
The current value of program coordinate system is set by G92, automatic coordinate system
or reset and displayed. For Axis T, the currently selected tool number is displayed. Reset
21

(program protection unlocking)
For resetting, the X , Y , Z or 4TH/5TH button is pressed. The pressed address
characters will continuously blink. The coordinate position of the blinking address when the
SHIFT button is pressed again. The actual position of the blinking address is reset.
Note: Reset operation can only be performed in automatic stop status.
(III) Display of comprehensive position

The actual position is displayed in the following coordinate systems at the same time:
(a) The position in relative coordinate system (RELATIVE)
(b) The position in absolute coordinate system (ABSOLUTE)
(c) The position in machine coordinate system (MACHINE)
(d) The distance to be traveled (DISTANCE TO
GO)
DISTANCE TO GO indicates the remaining distance of a block. The positions of all coordinate
systems cannot be reset when displaying the comprehensive position. The unit of machine
coordinate system is identical with that of the machine system.
4.4.7 Indication of instruction value (function button COMMAND)
22

(1)
Press the COMMAND button.
(2)
Press the PAGE button. Data is displayed in the following two modes.
(I)
Display the formerly set modal values while executing an instruction value.
As shown in the above figure, the figure following character % stands for feedrate.
(II)
Display the instruction value input by MDI or the instruction value to be executed next time.
(III) Display the instruction value of the next block to be executed during the tool offset of tool
radius compensation C.
23
4.4.8 Setting (function button SETTING)

4.4.8.1 Display and setting of input, output, etc
(1)
Press the SETTING button.
(2)
Press the PAGE button. Setting and display may be performed in the following two modes.
(I)
Setting of input and output
Setting (active when the program protection lock is disabled and inactive when it is locked,
which can be switched by parameter)
(a)
Set the SELECTION MODE switch to MDI mode.
(b)
Press the cursor button to move the cursor to the position of the item to be changed. The
cursor cannot be moved with the address key N.
(c)
Enter 1 or 0 with the P key as shown in the following table.
24

0
1
X MIRROR IMAGE
MIRROR IMAGE OFF
MIRROR IMAGE ON
Y MIRROR IMAGE
MIRROR IMAGE OFF
MIRROR IMAGE ON
4th AXIS MIRROR IMAGE
MIRROR IMAGE OFF
MIRROR IMAGE ON
TV CHECK
NO
YES
PUNCH CODE
EIA
ISO
INPUT UNIT
mm
inch
INPUT DEVICE1
DNC (can only be set to 0)
INPUT DEVICE2
Unused
RS232C input
Press P ,
or
1 , INPUT to proceed.
Note 1: Unselected selection function cannot be set. For example, INPUT UNIT=1 cannot be
used for a metric-system machine when metric/inch system selection function is not available.
PUNCH CODE=1 cannot be set when ISO code input selection function is not available.
Note 2: INPUT UNIT is automatically rewritten when executing G20 (input in inch system and
G21 (input in metric system).
Note 3: The ISO or EIA specified by PUNCH CODE is independent of input during data output.
ISO or EIA code can be automatically identified.
Note 4: The output device for data output is set with data No. 341.
(II)
Other settings and indications
The displayed numbers and their meanings are as follows:

Data No.
057
058
059
067
068
141
151
152
153
155
156
157
180
319
Meaning
Run time (Unit: hr) (TMHOR)
Run time (Unit: min) (TMMIN)
Run time (Unit: sec) (TMSEC)
The retraction (CYCR) in fixed cycle G73 (depth high-speed Jog touring cycle)
The cutting origin in fixed cycle G83 (depth Jog touring cycle)
Run time (TIMDE1)
X value of Acme 1 of storage type travel limit 2
Y value of Acme 1 of storage type travel limit 2
Z value of Acme 1 of storage type travel limit 2
X value of Acme 2 of storage type travel limit 2
Y value of Acme 2 of storage type travel limit 2
Z value of Acme 2 of storage type travel limit 2
The sequence number whose execution has stopped
Settings (PRG8.MSBL)
25
340
341
355
356
407

Input device for selecting data storage (IDVICE)
Output device for selecting data for output (ODVICE)
Decelerating distance (automatic angle override) of the end point of block
Decelerating distance (automatic angle override) of the origin of block
Scaling override
Note 1: The data numbers other than those listed in the above table are not displayed.
Note 2: It is also possible to set the data number identical with the above table as a reference
number.
Note 3: Refer to Appendix 5 for the details about data numbering.
Note 4: The details of data No. 340 and 341 are as follows:
340
I DVICE
341
O DVICE
IDVICE is used to select an input device for storing data in memory. When the set input device
(INPUT DEVICE)2=1(Interface RS232), the setting is valid.
ODVICE is used to select an output device for data output.
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
I/O
Input: paper tape reader; output: FACIT PUNCHER
Common for input and output: ASR33/ASR43; Set
parameters to 310.
Common for input and output: reader/puncher; Set
parameters to 311.
parameters to 312.
parameters to 313.
baud rate and other

baud rate and other
baud rate and other
baud rate and other
It is also possible to set them by parameters.

Setting (active when the program protection lock is disabled and inactive when it is locked, which
can be switched by parameter)
(a) Set the SELECTION MODE switch to MDI mode.
(b) Press the cursor button to move the cursor to the position of the item to be changed. The
cursor cannot be moved with the address key N.
(c) Press P , numerical keys and INPUT in succession to proceed.
4.4.8.2 Display and setting of user macro variables

It is possible to display general variable values and the local variable values of the currently
called user macro body on LCD.
When a variable value is <Empty>, the display will be blank. When an absolute value exceeds
99999999, it displays OVER FLOW. When an absolute value is not 0 but less than 0.0000001, it
displays UNDER FLOW.
26
Display
(1)
Select a set chapter 2

Press the SETTING button for SETTING DISPLAY and press it again.
(2)
Since the display covers 6 pages, you need to press the PAGE button to display the required
page.
Page 1The currently called local variables #1-#20 for nesting
Page 2The currently called local variables #21-#33 for nesting
Page 3General variables #100-#119
(3)
Move the cursor to the variable number to be displayed.

Method 1: Press the cursor button and move the cursor in succession. The next page will be
switched to once the cursor goes beyond the current page.
Method 2: Set by typing with N, variable number and INPUT (active when the program
protection lock is disabled).
(a) Select MDI mode;
(b) Type with P, variable number and INPUT when the variable is displayed and the cursor is
moved to the variable number to be changed.
4.4.9 Operating through MDI (function key COMMAND)

A program instruction to be executed may be input through MDI&DPL panel.
(1)
Example: X 10.5
Y200.5
(a) Set the selector switch to MDI position.

(b) Press the COMMAND button.
(c) Press the PAGE button. Next block (command data input) appears on the upper left of the
screen.
27
(d) Press the X , 1 , 0 , and 5 keys and the INPUT button in succession. If the
numeral entered before pressing the INPUT button is incorrect, press the CANCEL button
and enter the correct numeral again. If an error is found after pressing the INPUT button, it
is necessary to enter the numeral again.
(e) Press the Y , 2 , 0 , 0 , and 5 keys and the INPUT button. If the typed numeral
is found incorrect, proceed in the same way as inputting X.
(f)
(2)
Press the CYCLE START button on the control panel of the machine.
Delete Y200.5 from X10.5 Y200.5 before pressing the CYCLE START button.
(a) Press the
Y , CANCEL and INPUT in succession.
(b) Press the CYCLE START button on the control panel.

(3)
Delete modal data.

Since G code and F, D and H data cannot be deleted, it is necessary to input correct modal data
again for modification.
4.4.10 Start of MDI motion

Press the CYCLE START button to execute the instruction input through MDI.
4.4.11 Reset
As a rule, pressing the RESET button cancels alarm state.
Once the RESET button is pressed, the NC system is set to the following states:
28

State before reset
In execution of a move
instruction
M, S, T or B
In transfer
Storage 1 of MDI mode
buffer
Mode
other
memory,
than
MDI
block
mode
State after reset

The tool slows down and stops and the remaining travel
disappears.
The transfer sequence stops. Refer to the manual supplied
with the machine for the state of the machine now.
The contents of the buffer memory are not eliminated.
The contents of the buffer memory are eliminated and the
BUF label disappears.
In any case, pressing the RESET button sets the NC system to reset state. In the modes other
than MDI, the NC system is set to the LABEL SKIP mode.
4.4.12 Tool position offset

The setting display of tool radius compensation (function button: OFFSET)
(1)
Press the OFFSET button.
(2)
Press the PAGE button and display the required page.

Position offset No. 1-12 of page 1;
Position offset No. 13-24 of page 2;
Position offset No. 25-32 or 25-36 (optional) of page 3;
Position offset No. 37-48 (optional) of page 4;
Position offset No. 97-99 or 97-108 (optional) of page 9;
Position offset No. 193-200 (optional) of page 17;
(3)
The indication of page 1 of position offset

Move the cursor to the offset number to be changed.
Method 1: Press the cursor button and move the cursor in succession. The next page will be
switched to once the cursor goes beyond the current page.
Method 2: Set by typing with
(4)
N , variable number and INPUT.
Set the SELECTION MODE switch to a mode other than EDIT.

29
(5)
Type

and POSITION OFFSET and then press the INPUT button.
The figure below is the page after

position offset number is 19.
P ,
1 ,
5 ,
and INPUT is pressed when the
Note 1: When offset is changed in automatic operation, the new offset is not valid until its number
is specified as D or H code.
Note 2: 0-9999 INPUT is used to reset all offsets to zero.
4.4.13 Setting and display of workpiece origin offset (Optional)

(1)
Press OFFSET twice to display the WORKPIECE OFFSET page.
(2)
Press the PAGE button to display the required page. Each page indicates as follows:
(i)
Page 1(Workpiece coordinate offset 01)

00: Workpiece coordinate offset
01: The origin offset of the workpiece in workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54)
(ii) Page 2(Workpiece coordinate offset 02)

30

(3)
Move the cursor to the number to be changed.

Method 1: Press the cursor button or and move the cursor in succession. The next
page will be switched to once the cursor goes beyond the current page.
Method 2: Set by typing with
N , NUMBER and INPUT.
(4)
Set the SELECTION MODE switch to a mode other than EDIT.
(5)
Type X ,
button.
Y,
or 4TH/5TH and the offset to be changed or set. Then press the INPUT
The setting range of the workpiece coordinates is 0 mm to 7.999 mm or 0 inch to 7.999 inch.
4.4.14 Measurement of tool length

(1)
Press the OFFSET button to select the page of offset.
(2)
Select a standard tool and manually move it until it contacts the fixed point of the machine (or
fixed point of workpiece).
(3)
Press the Z and SHIFT buttons so that the relative coordinates of Axis Z is reset to zero.
(4)
Then select the tool to be measured and manually move it until it contacts the same fixed point.
Now the difference between the standard tool and that to be measured is indicated in the display
of relative position.
(5)
Just like the setting of offset, move the cursor to the offset number and press the Z and INPUT
keys but do not type in any numeral. The measured difference now is the offset to be input.
4.4.15 Program display (function button PROGRAM)

(1)
When in EDIT mode, press the PROGRAM key to display the page of the selected character in
the current selection program.
31
See the program number in Section 4.16 for which program is displayed. Pressing the cursor
or key displays the contents of the program in sequence. When the cursor key is
pressed, the page is displayed in forward direction. When the cursor key is pressed, it is
displayed in reverse direction.
(Note 1) Set the SELECTION MODE switch to EDIT and press the PROGRAM button to display
the contents of the program at the beginning of an executing or executed block. However, the
beginning of the program will be displayed when it is returned to (see 4.4.24.4).
(2)
In automatic operation
Press the PROGRAM button to display the current executing block.
Indications of the cursor (in automatic operation)

(a) When the cursor blinks, it indicates the block to be executed next time.
(b) When the cursor does not blink, it indicates the currently executing or executed block.
(3)
Note 1: Strictly speaking, when the buffer register becomes empty neither in automatic operating
state nor in feed hold state, the blinking of the cursor indicates the next block is going to read in
the buffer register so as to continue to execute a program.
Note 2: When the PAGE button or cursor button is pressed in EDIT mode to move the cursor and
the program is started in memory mode, the block at the cursor in EDIT mode is read in the
buffer register.
(4)
EDIT mode and the other modes except automatic mode

When the PROGRAM button is pressed, the executing and executed blocks are displayed on
the left side of the page and the blocks to be executed next time on the right side.
32

Note: When an angle moves in G28, G29, a fixed cycle and tool radius compensation, the
contents on the left and right of the page are the same for the situation in which a block causes
the cycle movement of several blocks.
4.4.16 Program number search (function key PROGRAM)

When several programs are stored in memory, it is possible to search one of them.
0
1001
3054
1972
Search a program number

(1)
Method 1
(a)
Select a mode (EDIT or AUTO).
(b)
Press the PROGRAM key.
(c)
Enter
and the program number to be searched and then press the cursor
key.
The switching page of the program is displayed after search.

(2)
Method 2
(a)
Select the AUTO mode.
(b)
Press the PROGRAM key.
(c)
Press
O , CANCEL and the cursor
in sequence. The next stored program is
displayed.
(3)
Method 3
(a) Select the EDIT mode
(b) Press the PROGRAM key.
(c) Press
and the cursor
to display the next stored program. In addition, the stored
programs are displayed in sequence for reviewing the stored program numbers when the
cursor
key is pressed continuously.
Note 1: The start position is returned to when the stored program numbers are displayed.
Note 2: The contents in the buffer register are deleted when search a program number.
4.4.17 Inputting a program with keys

A program may be directly stored in memory with the MDI keys.
(a) Select the EDIT mode.
(b) Press the PROGRAM button to display the current program.
(c) Enter the program number to be stored. A new page appears when the
number and INSERT keys are pressed.
33
O , the program
(d) Type in a block

[Example] When typing in G92 X500.0 Y200.0 M12,
G
EOB
(e) If a typed character is incorrect, press the CANCEL key to delete the lastly typed word.
Pressing the CANCEL key continuously deletes the typed words one by one from the last
typed one. If the number of the characters of a block exceeds 32, the program cannot be
entered. Now it is possible to divide the block with proper breakpoint.
(f) If the typed program is correct, press the INSERT key.
34
(g) Enter blocks in succession by this means.

(h) For correcting a typed block, proceed as indicated in the section of Program edit.
(i)
For restart, continuously move the cursor to the lastly typed character. The procedure is the
same as insertion.
(j)
When all programs are input and at the end of the procedures, press the RESET key if you
want to return to the start position.
4.4.18 Deletion of a program

(Program protection lock is active; function button PROGRAM) Deleting a program stored in
memory:
(b) Press the PROGRAM button.
(c) Press O , the program number and DELETE. The program whose number is entered is
deleted.
4.4.19 Deletion of all programs

(Program protection lock is active; function button PROGRAM) Deleting all programs stored in
memory:
(c) Press
O,
-,
9,
9,
9,
and DELETE.
4.4.20 Sequence number search

(Function button PROGRAM)
Sequence number search is usually used to search a sequence number in the midway of a
program and start or restart the program from the block whose sequence number is searched. Its
skipping over blocks exerts no influence on the NC system. Namely when skipping over blocks,
the coordinates of the blocks who are skipped over, M, S, T or G codes do not change the
coordinates and modal values of the NC. When a macro is supplied, sequence number will not
be displayed in search.
Therefore, necessary M, S, T, G codes and coordinate system shall be set for the blocks to be
started or restarted according to sequence number. If the block needs to restart search during
machining, MDI must be used to assume M, S, T, G codes and coordinate system so that the
35

present state of the machine and NC system can be searched.
(a) Select the AUTO mode.
(b) Select the program number where the sequence number to be searched belongs to.
0
Selected program
Search range
To search the sequence number on the block, follow (c). When the sequence number to be
searched does not exist on the block, however, the program number with a pre-search
sequence number shall be selected for sequence number search.
(c) Press the PROGRAM button.
(d) Type in N and the sequence number to be searched. Then press the cursor
the sequence number.
to find
Note 1: Coordinates and modal data do not update during search. These data are set through
MDI after search.
Note 2: The following items are checked during search.
TH check
TV check
Skipping over optional blocks
Alarm check (03, 04, 05 and 10)
Note 3: M98P (calling a subprogram) is not executed during sequence number search.
Therefore, when the sequence numbers in the subprogram called by the current
selected program for search in AUTO mode, No. 060 alarm will be given.
In the following example, alarm will be given when N8888 is searched.
4.4.21 Restart of a program

When the machine restarts after the damage of the tool and stop of machining, the restart
function starts the machine from a block to be restarted according to the specified sequence
number.
(1)
The tool is damaged (method P)

(a) Press the FEED HOLD button, retract the tool and replace a new tool. Change the offset
when necessary.
(b) Set the PROGRAM RESTART button on the operation panel to ON.
(c) Press the PROGRAM button to display the present program.
(d) Press the cursor
button to return to the starting point of the program.

36

(e) Press the P, the sequence number and the cursor to search the block to be restarted.
If the same sequence number appears for many times, e.g. when sequence number search
calls a subprogram for many times, the higher four digits are specified as the number of
times of block appearance and the lower four digits as its sequence number.
P 1 2 3 4
Number of times
1 2 3
Cursor
Sequence number
The number of times is 1, the higher four digits can be omitted. The preceding zero can also
be omitted when the number of times is established.
(f)
After search, LCD changes to display the page for program restart.
The TARGET POSITION indicates the restarting position of machining.

The DISTANCE TO GO indicates the distance from the current tool position to the restarting
position of machining.
M indicates the M codes instructed in the last 35 times.
T indicates the T codes instructed in the last 2 times.
S indicates the last instructed S code.
B indicates the last instructed B codes.
The first instructed code is indicated.
The program restart instruction or the CYCLE START instruction for eliminating each code
in reset state is also indicated.
(g) Set the program restart switch to OFF.
(h) Observe the page. Output by the MDI panel in MDI mode if the M, S, T and B codes to be
output exist. In this case, the M, S, T and B codes to be output no longer appear on the
program restart page.
(i)
(2)
When the tool moves to the machining restarting position in AUTO mode, check the
distance indicated by DISTANCE TO GO is correct and the tool does not contact workpiece.
Press the CYCLE START button after manually moves the tool to the position that does not
contact the workpiece. Now the tool moves to the restarting position in the sequence of the
4th axis, axis X, axis Y and axis Z and restart machining.
Restart machining (Q type) after the occurrence of the following conditions.

(a) Disconnect the power supply.
(b) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button
37

(c) The machine immediately stops due to storage type travel limit alarm.
(d) The coordinate system changes after the last automatic operation.
Example:
(i)
Specify G92 instruction through MDI.
(ii) Move the coordinate system.

(iii) Set the automatic coordinate system after returning to the reference point.
(iv) Press the SHIFT button.
(v) Owing to reset, the change of coordinate system, etc.
(a) After switching on or the release of emergency stop and travel limit alarm, the machine
returns to the reference point before restart (see the Notes below)
(b) The tool is moved to the programmed starting point of machining by manual and the set
modal data and coordinate system is identical with the restart of the machine.
(c) If necessary, set or change the offset.
(d) Set the PROGRAM RESTART button on the operation panel of the machine to ON.
(e) Display the program by pressing the PROGRAM button. Search the required program when
it is not available.
(f)
Return the program to the origin point. Press the cursor

mode.
button in automatic operating
(g) Search the sequence number that the block restarts by pressing the Q and cursor
button and typing in the sequence number.
When the same sequence number appears for many times during search, the higher four
digits are specified as the number of times of sequence number appearance and the lower
four digits as its sequence number.
(h) After search, LCD turns to display the page for program restart.
(i)
Set the program restart switch to OFF.
(j)
Observe the page. Output by the MDI panel in MDI mode if the M, S, T and B codes to be
output exist. In this case, they no longer appear on the program restart page.
(k) When the tool moves to the machining restarting position, check that the tool does not
contact workpiece. If necessary, manually move the tool to the position that does not contact
the workpiece.
(l)
Check that the distance indicated by the DISTANCE TO GO is adequate.
(m) Return to the AUTO mode and press the CYCLE START button. Now the tool moves to the
restarting position in the sequence of the 4th axis, axis X, axis Y and axis Z and restart
machining.
Note 1: The following conditions, pressing the
button do not restart the program.
button, the sequence number and the cursor
(a) After switching on, no automatic operation is performed.

(b) Automatic operation is performed after the release of emergency stop or storage type travel
limit alarm.
(c) The coordinate system is established, changed or moved (the change in the offset of the
origin of the external workpiece). The automatic operation is performed.
The above (a), (b) or 9497 alarm reset causes P/S 97 alarm.
P/S 94 alarm caused by the establishment of a coordinate system;
P/S 95 alarm caused by the travel of a coordinate system;
P/S 96 alarm caused by the change of a coordinate system.
The block for the restartable machining is one of the many blocks. The block follows the block
38

when the coordinate system is last set of changed before the interruption of machinating.
Note 2: In P mode or Q mode, the tool moves to the machining restarting position by traveling by
one axis each time. The stop of a single block is possible after the motion of the axis. However,
JOG operation rather than MDI operation can be inserted. The returned axes cannot move.
Note 3: When move signal, offset and other conditions are different from the past, the tool cannot
return to the machining restarting position identical with the past. The single block switch is set to
ON or AUTO mode is switched to for continuous search operation.
Note 4: When feed hold is active during search or reset operation is performed after search, make
sure to carry out program restarting operation from the beginning. After the end of search, however,
the parameter No.007 CLEAR Pos shall be changed to reset state in MDI mode.
Note 5: CYCLE START can be ignored provided that the automatic restart switch of program is
set to ON position.
Note 6: Always bring the JOG absolute switch for ON position for JOG operation no matter it is
before or after machining.
When a program restarting operation instead of resetting is performed after JOG operation or
when JOG operation is performed along the axis that has not returned to the machining
restarting position, the concerned motion is performed once the manual absolute switch is set to
ON position regardless that the manual absolute switch is in ON or OFF position.
Note 7: In principle, the tool cannot return to the correct position in the following cases:
(a) The manual absolute switch is brought to OFF position for JOG operation.
(b) The tool is moved in the lock state of the machine or after the cancellation of axis Z
instruction.
(c) Mirror image function is used.
(d) The coordinate system is not set at the beginning of incremental Program edit.
(e) JOG operation is inserted during the return of an axis.
(f)
Machine lock is disabled after the program restart is instructed.
(g) Program restart instruction is given during the execution of the cutting program with skip or
the blocks of an absolute instruction.
(h) A coordinate system is established after search. Nevertheless, in the condition of (c) the
return of the tool in P mode in the block executed by setting the mirror image machining
switch to OFF position as well as the blocks that follow. In this case, the mirror image
machining state is the same as interruption. No alarm is given in any case.
Note 8: When the specified block only includes M98, M99, macro calling instruction (M65, G66
and G67) or macro statement, or no specified block is searched, No.60 alarm will be given.
Note 9: When program restarting operation is instructed and G28 is detected without returning to
the reference point after power on or cancellation of emergency stop or travel limit alarm
(immediate stop), P/S alarm (98) will be resulted in.
Note 10: After the end of search, P/S alarm (99) is given when a move instruction is executed
through MDI operations before axis motion.
Note 11: After the program restart is instructed, RESTR blinks at the button of the LCD screen
before the return of the last axis (Z).
Note 12: When the block before the restart block has G28, G30, an instruction or incremental
instruction, the absolute position of the 4th axis can be displayed in the range of 360. In this
case, the 4th axis is an axis of rotation and the direction of returning to the reference point is
negative.
4.4.22 Program number comparison stop function

The function is used to stop machining after an instruction is executed to the preset sequence
number.
39

(a) Select the MDI mode.
(b) Press the SETTING button to display the SET page. Move the cursor to the set number 180
by pressing the cursor or key. The cursor cannot be moved with address N.
(c) Type the instruction in the sequence of
INPUT.
P , the sequence number to be stopped and
(d) Select the AUTO mode and get ready for operation by setting the machine.
(e) Press the CYCLE START button.
The machine stops after the data in the block whose sequence number has been
predetermined in step (c).
The predetermined sequence number is cleared while the machine is stopping.
To perform another comparison stop, repeat the above procedures from (a).
Note 1: Sequence number O cannot be used for comparison stop
Note 2: The predetermined sequence number is cleared by setting.
4.4.23 Display of parameters (function button: PARAMETER)

Press the PARAMETER button to display the parameters, which are laid out in several pages.
Find the desired parameter by pressing the PAGE button (see Appendix 5 for the meanings of
parameters).
4.4.24 Program edit

(Function button: PROGRAM)
The function is used to modify the stored programs.
(1) Set the SELECTION MODE switch to EDIT.
(2) Press the PROGRAM button.
(3) Select a program. Proceed with (4) if the program has been selected; otherwise perform
program number search.
(4) Search the words to be modified by scanning or word search.
(5) Modify, insert or delete the words.
Note 1: Definition and edit unit
A word comprises an address and the numeral that follows. For user macro, however, the
concept of word is indefinite. Hence the concept of edit unit is adopted. Edit unit serves as the
object of modification and deletion in a single operation and moves the cursor to its beginning in
a single pass. For data insertion, the data is inserted behind the edit unit.
Definition of edit unit
From one address to the next one;
An address is a letter symbol: WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, =, or ; (EOB)
According to the definition, a word is also an edit unit. On the basis of the following explanations
about edit, strictly speaking, word shall be called edit unit.
Note 2: During program execution, machining is temporarily suspended by single block
skipping, feed hold and other functions. Nevertheless, continuing to execute a program is not
allowed after program modification, insertion and deletion; otherwise the program cannot be
correctly executed as required by program data. Program is displayed on the LCD after
subsequent machining.
To modify stored data in part program edit mode, they must be modified in reset condition before
program execution or when resetting operation is performed after edit.
40
4.4.24.1 Word scanning

(1)
Press the cursor
button.
The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen. The cursor is displayed underneath the
address character of the selected word.
(2)
Press the cursor
button.
The cursor returns word by word on the screen. The cursor is displayed underneath the address
character of the selected word.
Example:
(3)
Continuous search can be conducted by pressing down and holding the cursor
button.
(4)
The next page is displayed and search starts from the beginning of the page by pressing the
page button.
(5)
The previous page is displayed and search starts from the beginning of the page by pressing the
page button.
41
or
(6)

Displaying page by page is possible by pressing down and holding the cursor or button.
4.4.24.2 Word search

Search a specified word from the present position forward.
N12341000
Y1250X1234N5678
Current word
Search direction
(1)
Enter
X,
1,
2,
M03
X1234 is the object of search.

and
with the keypad.
Note 1: The search that only enters X123 and X1234 with the keypad can not be performed.
Note 2: The search that only enters X9 and X009 with the keypad can not be performed. 009
shall be entered with the keypad for the search of X009.
(2)
Search starts when the cursor

after the search.
is pressed. The cursor is displayed underneath X in X1234
4.4.24.3 Address search

Search a specified address from the present position forward.
N1234100.0
Y1250X1234N5678,
Current word
(1)
Type in
(2)
Search starts when the cursor

search.
M03
M03 is the object of search.
M.
is pressed. The cursor is displayed underneath M after the
Note 1: Pressing the CANCEL button after typing in a numeral deletes the latter and displays a
blank space. Pressing the CANCEL button only indicates CAN.
Note 2: Both word search and address search do not start by pressing the cursor
button.
4.4.24.4 Methods for returning to the beginning of a program
01100 N0001 X12.34: Z15.67: G0112.5: M04
Beginning
(1)
Current word
Method 1
A program is displayed from its beginning when the RESET button is pressed in EDIT mode.
(2)
Method 2
Perform sequence number search.
(3)
Method 3
(a) Set the SELECTION MODE button to AUTO.
42

(c) Press the cursor
button to return to the EDIT mode for editing a part program.
4.4.24.5 Word insertion (active when the program protection lock is disabled)
Insert T105
N1234100.0
Y1250X1234N5678,
M03
Object of search
(1)
Quickly search and scan the word preceding the position where a word is to be inserted.
(a) Scan. See 4.24.1.
(b) See 4.24.2 for word search. When Y1250 is in front of the currently indicated position, first
move the cursor to the beginning of the program.
(2)
Type in
T,
1,
and
and press the INSERT button.
Before insertion
After insertion
Note 1: When what is inserted is not an address but a numeral, the inserted number is added to
the word indicated by the cursor. (Edit unit: In the above example, the insertion of 2.5 will create
43

Y12502.5 when the cursor is underneath Y in Y1250.
Note 2: A numeral can also be added to all addresses.
E.g. EOB, IF, etc. When the cursor is underneath ;, the insertion of 23 will create ; 23.
However, it makes no sense in programming.
4.4.24.6 Word modification (active when the program protection lock is disabled)
N1234100.0
Y1250T105 S1234
To be changed to M15
(1)
Search and scan the word to be modified.
(2)
Type in
M,
and
N1234100.0
and press the ALTER button.
Y1250M15 S1234
The program is to be modified.
4.4.24.7 Insertion and modification of several words, blocks and strings

Word, block, character string and other information can be inserted (up to 32 characters). In the
example above, to insert T105 M20, type in T105 M20 and press the INSERT button.
Before insertion
44
After insertion
A word indicated by the cursor can be changed to a word, block or a string, etc.
Note 1: When the cursor is underneath Y in Y1250, the insertion of 25 M20 will become Y1250
2.5 M20.
Note 2: When the cursor is underneath Y in Y1250 T105, the insertion of 2.5 M20 will become
Y1250 2.5 M20.
4.4.24.8 Word deletion (active when the program protection lock is disabled)
N1234 100.0
Y1250
T105 X1234
(1)
To delete Y1250
Search and scan the word to be deleted.
(2)
Press the DELETE button.

N1234 100.0
T105
X1234
The program after deletion
4.4.24.9 The deletion of the part before EOB

Current word
N1234 100.0
Y1250
T105
M13 X1234
Range of deletion
Press the EOB and DELETE buttons to delete the part before EOB and move the cursor to
the underneath of the address character of the next word.
4.4.24.10 Deletion of blocks (active as program protection lock is disabled)

The range of deletion covers from the currently dedicated word to the block whose sequence
number is specified.
45

Current word
Enter N2233 with the keypad
N1234 M10M15100.0T0122N2233 T1200N3344 Y10.0
Range of deletion
(1)
Type in the sequence number of the last block to be deleted. Type in

3 in this example.
(2)
Press the DELETE button.
N,
2,
2,
and
4.4.24.11 Storage sorting

The frequent edit of part program sometimes prevents the storage from economic usage,
resulting in the failure to store the program data whose length is specified. Hence it is
necessary to regularly clean up the storage.
Press the CANCEL and SHIFT buttons in succession in the EDIT mode. After sorting, the
admissible number of characters is indicated at the bottom of the screen.
Note 1: For one program, the storage stores the specified length of the program. For many
programs, some storage areas are used to identify these programs.
Note 2: The storage areas to be modified or inserted that exceed the actual length are wasted
in quick part program edit. Storage sorting may eliminate the waste.
4.4.24.12 The indication of all stored program numbers

Once the contents of the storage described in 4.24.11 are sorted, all stored program numbers
are displayed.
4.4.24.13 Edit of user macro (active as the program protection lock is disabled)
User macro may be edited using the SHIFT key. Operate the key in EDIT mode and when the
program protection switch is released. The following points shall be observed.
(a)
SHIFT key
Once the SHIFT key is pressed, the cursor (the cursor for keyboard entry: the cursor is in the
position of the character whose data is last input) changes from to . Press the key with
a character in the lower right angle of the key top in this state. The character in the lower right
angle can be entered.
After entering a character, the cursor restores to the initial . If the SHIFT key is pressed
46

twice, the cursor also restores the initial .
(Example)
(b)
Deletion, insertion and modification of a program

While editing an entered user macro, the cursor moves at the following locations:
(i) At an address
(ii) At the / of an optional block skipped over
(iii) At the left beginning # of a substitution statement
(iv) At (=)OR;
(v) At the leading character of IF, WHILE, GOTO, END or DO
On the LCD screen, there is a blank space for a character before the above characters.
Deletion, modification and insertion may be performed between the front and rear cursor
positions.
(Example) Cursor position
N001x-#100: #1=123 N002 / 2x[12/#3]:
N003x-SQRT[#3/3*[#4+1]]: N004x-# 2 Y#1:
N005#5=1+2-#10 IF[#1 NE 0]GOTO 10:
WHILE[#2LEB]D01: #[2000+#2]=#2*10:
#2=#2+1: END1:
(Note 1) The cursor cannot be stopped in (
).
Control OUT/IN
(Example)(#1=100):
The cursor cannot stop here.
(Note 2) The position of the cursor can change with the changed program.
(Example) X100 Y200: before program modification:
If Y200 is changed into 100 with the ALTER key, it will become X100 100:
(c)
Abbreviations of macro word

To change or insert a macro word, it can be abbreviated to its first two characters. The
underlined part can alternate the word as an abbreviation.
WHILE, GOTO, END, XOR, AND, SIN, COS, TAN,
47

ATAN, SQRT, ABS, BCD, BIX, FUP, ROUND.
(Example): When WH[TA[#1*AB[#2]]LERO[#3]] is entered as data of keyboard entry, the
actual entry will be:
WHILE[TAN[#1*ABS[#2]]LEROUND[#3]]
4.4.25 Indication of run time

Automatic operating time can be accumulated and displayed in hour, minute and second
(increment of 2sec) on the screen.
Time is displayed as indicated in the picture below when the SETTING button is pressed. Press
the PAGE button for other pages.
Note 1: The accumulated time includes automatic operating time but not the single block offtime,
feed hold offtime, etc.
Note 2: If the power supply is switched off immediately after the stop of automatic operation, a
time error up to 6min may be caused after power on again.
Note 3: When necessary, time can be preset through setting operations. The data number is 57,
58 or 59.
4.4.26 Menu switching function

It is possible to enable or disable the switching function of the NC storage using the LCD
instead of the operation panel of the machine.
With this function, the number of switches on the operation panel can be reduced. The following
signals may be switched on or off through the LCD.
(1) Single block (SBK)
(2) Machine lock (MLK)
(3) Dry run (DRN)
(4) Optional block skip 1 to 9(BDT19)
(5) Mirror image (MIX, MIY, M14 and M15)
(6) Display lock (DLK)
(7) Auxiliary function lock (AFL)
48

(8) Axis Z neglected (ZNG)
(9) JOG absolute (ABS)
After the signal data is stored in memory, the switching of these data displayed on the LCD
remains unchanged even the NC power is disconnected.
These signals are not completely replaced by those displayed on the LCD. These signals are
deemed to be switched on no matter whether the machine signals or the signals set on the LCD
are switched on. Accordingly, these signals can be switched on or off through the LCD by
disconnecting the above listed optional signals through the operation panel.
Setting and display: The LCD state of the above signals may be displayed through the following
operations.
Display
(i)
Select the set chapter 3

For setting display, press the SETTING button and then press it twice again.
(ii) Press the PAGE button to select the desired page from the two pages than can be
displayed.
Page 1: The part other than optional blocks skipping
Page 2: Optional block skipping 1~9.
Setting
Proceed as follows after the above procedures.
(iii) Move the cursor to the page number to be changed.
Move the cursor to the page number to be changed by pressing the cursor or key.
(iv) When the address P is pressed, enter 1 for switching on and 0 for switching off. Press the
1
keys in the sequence of (P)
(entry).
2
49
4.4.27 Operations of LCD soft function keys

4.4.27.1 General
Here function buttons (POSITION, PROGRAM, OFFSET etc) are used as soft function keys.
Their meanings may be displayed on the LCD. All the pages abstained by pressing the soft
function keys are described below.
4.4.27.2 Display
(1)
Display of actual position
The actual position of relative coordinate system is displayed on the LCD when the soft function
key REL is pressed.
50
Press the page key the update display as shown above. The positions of workpiece
coordinate system and relative coordinate system are exchangeable on the screen.
(2)
Display of a program
Press the PROGRAM soft function key to display a program. It is possible to make background
edit (edit the programs other than the currently running programs) using B. EDIT.
Press the PROGRAM soft function key again to display program list. The program list is
displayed as follows.
51
(3)
Display of offsets
When the OFT soft function key is pressed, the offset corresponding to each tool number is
indicated on the LCD. Press the page or key and cursor or key to select
the desired data. At the same time, the actual position of relative coordinate system is
displayed on the lower part of the LCD.
(4)
Display of an instruction
52

Press the COMMAND soft key. The data displayed on three pages of the LCD appears on the
screen as shown in the above figure. The screen changes as follows when the page key is
pressed.
(5)
Setting
53
Press the SET soft function key. Now all set data is displayed on the screen. Run time is
displayed in the page of SET DATA 01.
54
Press the MACRO key. Now the local variable and common variable of user macro are
displayed on the LCD screen.
Press the ON-OFF key. The menu switch window is displayed as shown as shown in Section
4.26 (menu switch function).
(6) Display of alarm and operation information
Pressing the ALM soft function key displays the alarm messages as shown in the above figure.
Pressing the OUTMESS soft function key displays the external information as shown in the
above figure.
55
(7)
Parameter display
Pressing the NC PARA and PC PARA soft function keys to display the relevant parameters on
the LCD.
Pressing the page
(8)
or
and cursor
Display of diagnostic data
56
or
to display the desired parameters.

Pressing the DGN soft function key displays 64 diagnostic data.
Pressing the page or and cursor or to display the desired diagnostic data.
4.4.27.3 Direct entry of measured workpiece origin offset

The coordinates of the relative coordinate system that offsets at the workpiece origin and is
indicated by the LCD screen may be set as workpiece origin offset. With the function the
relative coordinate system is cleared away at the reference point and the machine is moved to
the workpiece origin by JOG. Now the coordinates of the relative coordinate system may be set
as workpiece origin offset. In this way it is easy to set the workpiece origin offset.
(1)
Operating procedures
The relative coordinate system may be cleared away and workpiece origin offset set on the
workpiece origin offset page of the LCD through the following procedures.
(a) Delete the relative coordinate system
Pressing the
and SHIFT keys deletes the relative coordinate system of axis X (this
operation accordingly applies to axes Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes).
(b) Set workpiece origin offset
Press the
and INPUT keys after moving the cursor to the required workpiece offset
number. Then the coordinates of the axis X in the corresponding coordinate system is set
as the axis-X workpiece origin offset of the selected workpiece offset number.
(This operation accordingly applies to axes Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes
Note: When the
key is pressed in steps (a) and (b), the X of the relative coordinate
system blinks.
57
4.5 Position Indication through Position Display Unit (Available upon

Customers Request)
The position display unit indicates the actual position. The position display reset buttons are
connected to the position display unit. Each button corresponds to one axis. The position
display of the relevant axis is cleared when any one of the buttons is pressed.
After the absolute origin (G92) is programmed and established, it is indicated on the display unit
through parameter setting (PPD) coordinates.
Note 1: Position pulse cannot be sent to the position display unit when the DISPLAY LOCK
switch is set to ON position. The switch may used to prevent writing offset in position indication
by manually moving the coordinate system.
Note 2: Position is indicated in Inch-system format in the event of entry in inch system.
Position is indicated in metric format in the event of entry in metric system. The RESET button
shall be pressed so that the position indication is zero when the input system is switched from
inch system to metric system, vice versa.
Note 3: Machine compensation data, e.g. amount of clearance compensation cannot be
indicated on the position display unit.
58
GSK983M Milling CNC System Operating Manual (Volume II: Operations)
Appendix 1
Character
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
DEL
ISO Code
7 6 5 4
Codes for Programming
3
0
0
Character
EIN Code
6 5 4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
DEL
59
Meaning
?
?
Numeral 0
"1
"2
"3
"4
"5
"6
"7
"8
"9
Address A
"B
"C
"D
"E
"F
"G
"H
"I
"J
"K
"L
"M
"N
"O
"P
"Q
"R
"S
"T
"U
"V
"W
"X
"Y
"Z
Delete
(cancellation
of an incorrect
* hole)
ISO Code
Charact
er
NUL
EIN Code
4
Charact
1
er
Blank
8 7
BS
HT
LForNL
CR
SP
%
(
0
0
Meaning
3
1
No-hole and EIA
codes are not
* used
in
effective-value
information area
Rewind
*
( backspace )
Separator
*
End of block
BS
Tab
CRorEO
B
0
0
0
0
0
0
Return of printer
* base
SP
ER
(2-4-3)
(2-4-7)
0
0
0
0
* Blank space
End of rewinding
Control OUT (start
of note)
Control IN (end of
note)
Positive
sign
*
Negative sign
#
$
&
*
,
0
0
0
0
&
[
]
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
60
As a program
number of ISO
codes
Stop
of
block
selection
Full stop (decimal
point)
Well number
Unit number
& (and)
Apostrophe
Asterisk
Comma
Semicolon
Left
angular
bracket
* Equal sign
Right
angular
*
bracket
* Question mark
* @ sign
* Quotation mark
* Left brace
* Right brace

(Note 1) * code is read in memory only it appears in a note and is invalid in other information areas.
(Note 2) ? code is read in memory only it appears in a note and causes alarm when it appears
in other information areas.
(Note 3) When a user macro is selected, the following codes are usable in the effective
information areas.
For ISO: +, [, ], #, *, =, B, C, H, J, V, Y.
For EIA: +, [, ], &, the codes set by parameter and B, C, H, J, V, Y.
(Note 4) The codes not listed in the table are ineffective even its parity is correct.
(Note 5) The use of a code with incorrect parity may cause TH alarm. But it is ignored in notes
and does not cause TH alarm.
(Note 6) The output of all the eight digits does not cause alarm for EIA code.
61
Appendix 2
G Codes
G00*
G01*
G02
G03
G04
G07
G09
G10
G17*
G18
G19
G20
G21
G22
G23
G27
G28
G29
G30
G31
G33
G40*
G41
G42
G43*
G44*
G49*
G45
G46
G47
G48
G50*
G51
G54*
G55
G56
G57
G58
G59
G60
G61
G62
G64*
G65
G66
G67*
G73
G74
G76
G Codes List
Group No.
01
00
02
06
04
00
01
08
00
11
14
00
15
00
2
09
Function
Positioning (quick)
Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
Arc interpolation CW (clockwise circle)
Arc interpolation CCW(counterclockwise circle)
Suspension
imaginary axis designation
Accurate stop check
Offset, work zero offset setting
To select XY plane
To select ZX plane
To select YZ plane
To input in inch system
To input in metric system
Storage travel limit ON
Storage travel limit OFF
Reference point return check
To return to reference point
To return from reference point
To return to the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference points
To skip over cutting
Thread cutting
Tool compensation left side
Tool compensation right side
Tool radius compensation, +
Tool radius compensation, To cancel tool length compensation
To increase tool offset
To reduce tool offset
To increase tool offset by twice
To reduce tool offset by twice
Zooming OFF
Zooming ON
One-way positioning
To enable automatic angle adjustment
Continuous cutting mode
Simple recall of a user macro
Modal recall of microinstruction
To cancel modal recall of microinstruction
Gun drilling cycle
Left-handed tapping cycle
Finish boring
62
G80*
G81
G82
G83
G84
G85
G86
G87
G88
G89
G90*
G91*
G92
G94*
G95
G96
G97*
G98*
G99

To disable fixed cycle
Drilling cycle, spotter
Drilling cycle, counter boring
Depth drilling cycle
Tapping cycle
Boring cycle
Boring cycle
Reverse boring cycle
Boring cycle
Boring cycle
Absolute-value programming
03
Incremental-value programming
00
Coordinate system setting
Feed per minute
05
Feed per rotation
Feed at constant speed
13
To cancel constant speed control
To return fixed cycle to the initial point
10
To return fixed cycle to point R
(Note 1) The G codes marked with * are the initial G codes of all groups. That is, these G codes are
established when power on or pressing the RESET key (the system parameters specifying
initial G codes are validate).
The selection of the state of the initial G codes such as G00, G01, G43, G44, G49, G90, G91
or G94 and G95 shall be set by parameters (G00, G43, G44, G90 and G95).
For G20 or G21, it becomes the state before power off.
(Note 2) The G codes in group 00 are modal and are only valid in the blocks they belong to.
(Note 3) When a G code not listed in the above table is specified or an optional G code not defined by
control unit is specified, (N0.010) will give an alarm. (N0.010) But G38 and G39 are ignored.
(Note 4) Some G codes may be specified in the same block even they do not belong to the same group.
When 2 or more G codes than belong to the same group are specified in a block, the lastly
specified G code will be valid.
(Note 5) If any G code in group 01 in fixed cycle mode, the fixed cycle will be automatically disabled and
the system will be in G80 state. However, the G codes in group 01 are not subject to the
influence of the G codes of fixed cycle.
(Note 6) G70 and G71 replaces G20 and G21 (special G codes) by parameter setting (GSP).
(Note 7) The G codes of all groups are displayed.
63
Appendix 3
Ranges of Instruction Values
Input in mm
Output in mm
Input in inch
Output in mm
Input in mm
Output in inch
Input in inch
Output in inch
0.001mm
0.001
0.0001inch
0.001
0.001mm
0.001
0.0001inch
0.001
Maximum travel (the value starts

from reference point)
99999.999mm
99999.999mm
3937.0078inch
99999.999inch
Max. instruction value
99999.999mm
99999.999
3937.0078inch
99999.999
99999.999mm
99999.999
99999.999inch
99999.999
1 mm/min
to 15000
mm/min
0.01 inch/min to
600.00
inch/min
1 mm/min to
15000
mm/min
0.01 inch/min to
600.00
inch/min
30 mm/min to
15000
mm/min
30 mm/min to
15000
mm/min
3.0 inch/min to
600.0
inch/min
3.0 inch/min to
600.0
inch/min
6 mm/min to
15000
mm/min
6 mm/min to
15000
mm/min
0.6 inch/min to
600.0
inch/min
0.6 inch/min to
600.0
inch/min
1 mm/min to
2000
mm/min
0.04 inch/min to
78.7
inch/min
0.5 mm/min to
1016
mm/min
0.02 inch/min to
40
inch/min
Coordinates of 2nd reference

point (the value starts from
reference point)
0 mm to
99999.999mm
0 mm to
99999.999mm
0 inch to
3937.0078inch
0 inch to
99999.999inch
Tool offset
0 mm to
99999.999mm
0 inch to
99999.999inch
0 mm to
99999.999mm
0 inch to
99999.999inch
0.001mm
0.0001inch
0.001mm
0.0001inch
0mm to 0.255mm
0 mm to
0.255mm
0 inch to
0.255inch
0 inch to
0.255inch
Compensation of screw pitch

error
0mm to
0.007mm
0mm to
0.007mm
0inch to
0.007inch
0inch0.007inch
Setting range of storage travel

limit (the value starts from
reference point)
0mm to
99999.999mm
0mm to
99999.999mm
0inch to
3937.0078inch
0inch to
99999.999inch
0s to 99999.999s
0s to
99999.999s
0s to 99999.999s
0s to
99999.999s
Minimum setting unit
When
adjusting
cutting feed
by 100%
Feed per minute
Feedrate at high speed (all axes

are independent)
Upper limit of cutting feedrate
Manual feedrate
F0
JOG feedrate
Minimum value of incremental

feed
Clearance compensation
Pause
64
Appendix 4
Calculating Chart
A4.1 The tool path in a turning angle section

(1 )
Summary
Due to the delay of servo system (as a result of exponential deceleration/acceleration during
cutting or the use of the positioning system of a DC servo motor), a minor deviation exists
between the tool path (tool center path) and instructed path as shown in Fig. 4.1 (a). In this
center, the time constant T1 of exponential deceleration/acceleration is fixed to 0.
Fig. 4.1 (a): The tool path regarding a turning angle section
The tool path depends on the following parameters:
(a) Feedrate (V1, V2)
(b) Degree of the turning angle ()
(c) Time constant (T1)(T1 = 0) of exponential deceleration/acceleration during cutting
(d) Loop gain of positioning system
(e) Existence of buffer
This document makes theoretical analysis of tool path with the above parameters. The tool path
of temporarily set parameters is displayed in graph.
The above notes shall be observed for programming. Note whether the machining shape is
within the desired accuracy range.
That is, when it is possible to reach the theoretical accuracy, hold for a proper time using the
suspension function until the instruction speed drops to zero before reading in the next block.
(2)
Analysis
In the following conditions, make analysis of the tool path as shown in Fig. 4.1(b).
(a) Feedrate remains constant in the blocks before and after the turning angle.
(b) The control is provided with a buffer (error changes with the reading rate of the input
equipment and the number of characters of the next block).
65
VX1 = Vcos1
VY1 = Vsin1
VX2 = Vcos2
VY2 = Vsin2
(1-2)=
[Explanations for the symbols]
V:
Feedrate in the blocks before and after turning angle
VX1: X component of the feedrate in the previous block

VY1: Y component of the feedrate in the previous block
VX2: X component of the feedrate in the next block
VY2: Y component of the feedrate in the next block
:
Angle of the turning angle
1:
The included angle between the direction of the instruction path in the previous block and
axis X
2:
The included angle between the direction of the instruction path in the next block and axis
X
66

Calculation of initial value
The initial value at the beginning of a turning angle, i.e. the X and Y coordinates at the end of
the distribution of the control unit are determined by the time constant of the positioning system
of the used DC motor.
X0 = Vx1(T1+T2)(1)
Y0 = Vy1(T1+T2)(2)
T1: Time constant (T1 = 0) of exponential deceleration/acceleration

T2: Time constant (reciprocal of position loop gain) of positioning system
Analysis of tool path
The feedrates in the directions of axis X and Y in the turning angle are expressed in the
following formulas.
Vx(t)=(Vx2Vx1)[1
= Vx2 1 Vx1
T1 + T2
Vy(t)=
Vy1 Vy 2
T1 T2
Vx1
{T1 exp t T2 exp t } + Vx1]
T1 T2
T1
T2
(3)
t
t
T1 exp T2 exp + Vy 2
T2
T1
(4)
t
t
T1 exp T2 exp
T
1
T2
The coordinates of the tool path at time t are calculated with the following formula.
t
X(t)= 0 Vx(t )dt X 0

=
t
t
Vx 2 Vx1 2
2
T1 exp T2 exp
T1 T2
T2
T1
Vx 2 (T1 + T2 t ) (5)
Y(t)= 0 Vy (t )dt Y0
=
Vy 2 Vy1
T1 T2
2
t
t
2
T1 exp T2 exp
T2
T1
Vy 2 (T1 + T2 t ) (6)
A4.2 Error of radius direction during arc cutting

When using a DC servo motor, a delay is produced between the input and output axes due to
the factors of the positioning system. The linear interpolation on instruction path does not cause
any error. Arc interpolation, especially the arc cutting at high speed may cause a deviation in
the direction of radius, which is determined with the following formula.
Y: Maximum radius error (mm)
V: Feedrate (mm/sec)
67

r: Arc radius (mm)
T1: Time constant (sec) (T1 = 0) of exponential deceleration/acceleration during cutting
T2: Time constant (sec) (reciprocal of position loop gain) of positioning system
r=
V
1 2
T1 + T22 2
2
r
(1)
The radius r(mm) and permissible error r(mm) of a workpiece are given in actual machining.
Permissible speed limit V(mm/sec) can be calculated with the formula (1).
The Time constant of deceleration/acceleration during cutting set by the unit varies with
machine types. Refer to the user manual supplied with the machine.
68
Appendix 5
Parameters
Display and setting procedures of parameters

When the NC is connected to a servo motor or the machine, the specifications and functions of
the machine shall be set to maximize the performance of the servo motor. Since its contents
vary with machine types, please refer to the additional parameters of the machine. End user is
not allowed to change the parameters.
A5.1 Display of parameter

(a) Press the PARAMETER key.
(b) Select the desired page with the PAGE key, or
, parameter number and INPUT
A5.2 Setting of parameter

Setting in MDI mode
(a) Switch the PRM.WT switch on the main unit to ENABLE (ON) to activate the warning
indicator on the panel.
(b) Set the MDI mode.
(c) Press the PARAMETER key.
(d) Press the N , the parameter number to be set and INPUT. The cursor will appear
underneath the number provided that the page of the parameter number to be set is
selected. (This may also be done with the PAGE button and cursor or button. )
(e) Set with
P , set data and INPUT.
In the event of error during typing in, press the CANCEL key.
(f)
Make sure the setting is correct.
(g) After the setting of all parameters and end of confirmation, return the switch on the main
PCB to DISABLE (OFF).
(h) To terminate the alarm state (No. 100), press the RESET button.
A5.3 Parameters list

Parameter No.
0
ORWD
SCTO
EENB
OTCS
FMIC
MDL
MIC
SCW
0
ORWD: Retention parameter

SCTO 1:
0:
EENB 1:
0:
OTCE 1:
Perform detection of speed reaching signal during instruction and changing from
quick speed to cutting feed.
Not perform detection of speed reaching signal.
Servo OFF signal is active.
Servo OFF signal is inactive.
Stop once the travel switch of hardware is pressed.
(Mechanical position is lost)
FMIC
MDL
0:
Slow down and stop once the travel switch of hardware is pressed. (Mechanical
position is not lost)
1:
When inputting in metric system, the unit of feedrate is 1/10.
0:
Not 1/10
1:
The minimum unit of the indication on the position display unit is 0.01mm or input
in metric system and 0.001inch for input in inch system.
69
0:
MIC
SCW

The minimum setting unit of the indication on the position display unit is 0.001mm
or input in metric system and 0.001inch for input in inch system.
1:
The minimum setting unit of the indication on the position display unit is 0.01mm or
input in metric system and 0.0001inch for input in inch system.
0:
The minimum setting unit of the indication on the position display unit is 0.001mm
or input in metric system and 0.0001inch for input in inch system.
1:
The minimum travel unit is 0.0001inch (machine in inch system)
0:
The minimum travel unit is 0.001mm (machine in metric system)
ADFT
7
ADET 1:
EOM
CINP
DCS
CLER
TVC
2
PPD
RDRN
Perform automatic drift compensation
0:
Not perform automatic drift compensation.
1:
If M30 is sent to the machine side and FIN returns when M30 is instructed, it is
continuously executed from the preceding block of the program, or the machine
side does not send back FIN signal but external reset signal. The program returns
to the beginning to enter into reset state (in automatic mode).
0:
When M30 is instructed, only M30 is sent out to the machine side and the program
does not return to the beginning unless reset and rewinding signal is used (in
automatic mode).
1:
Instruction speed reduces to 0 between two non-cutting blocks. The next block is
not continued until the machine confirms that the designated position is reached
(the confirmation is called positioning detection).
The next block is executed once the instruction speed reduces to 0 between two
non-cutting blocks (not perform positioning detection).
1:
The start button on the MDI panel does not pass through the machine side, but
directly is switched on the NC side (only for MDI mode).
0:
The start button on the MDI panel is sent to the machine side, and then the start
button on the machine side returns for start.
CLER 1:
The NC is brought into clearing state (see Appendix 7 for clearing state) using the
RESET button, external reset signal, reset and rewinding signal.
0:
The NC is brought into reset state using the RESET button, external reset signal,
and reset and rewinding signal.
1:
Not perform TV check in the control output section (note section)
0:
Perform TV check in the control output section (note section)
1:
Preset the position display unit by setting a coordinate system.
0:
Not preset the position display unit during the setting of a coordinate system.
EOM
CINP
DCS
TVC
PPD
RDRN 1: Dry run is also valid for rapid feed instruction.

0:
0
Dry run is not valid for rapid feed instruction.

8
ICR
7
GSP
6
5
70
G44
G90
G95
G43
G00

ICR
GSP
G90
G95
G00
1:
When ISO code is used for output, EOB will be output by LF.
0:
When ISO code is used for output, EOB will be output by LFCR CR.
1:
Use a special G code.
0:
Use a standard G code.
1:
Enter into G90 mode when in power on and clearing state.
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
G44, G43
G44
G43
Initial state
FIX2
7
FIX2
RWL
MCF
RWL
MCF
FMFS
FCUT
0:
Not output the M code but SSP and SRV in a fixed cycle (fixed cycle II)
1:
Store the outside of the travel limit 2 as a prohibited area.
0:
Store the inside of the travel limit 2 as a prohibited area.
1:
Output EF at the end of the positioning of G81 (axis Z does not move).
0:
Output EF at the end of the positioning of G81 (axis Z moves).
0:
Output FMF signal once in a fixed cycle.
FCUT 1:
The travel of the axes X and Y in a fixed cycle uses the G codes in Group 01.
0:
The travel of the axes X and Y in a fixed cycle usually uses rapid feed.
1:
Change the initial plane points with the RESET button.
0:
Not change the initial plane points even using the RESET button.
1:
Output EF with a photoelectric coupler
0:
Output EF with a relay.
TDRN 1:
0:
0
TDRN
Output the M code in a fixed cycle (fixed cycle II).
Output FMF signal twice in a fixed cycle.
EFRI
EFR1
1:
FMFS 1:
ILVL
ILVL
Also valid for dry run of thread cutting.

Invalid for dry run of thread cutting.
0
TCW
7
CWM
SOV
SLCC
OFSD
SOVC
71
ISOT
1

Signs for TCW, CWM and S4-digit output
TCW
CWM
Sign
0
0
M03
M04 are all positive.
0
1
M03
M04 are all negative.
1
0
M03 is positive while M04 is negative.
1
1
M03 is negative while M04 is positive.
SOV
1:
Enable main axis adjustment.
0:
Disable main axis adjustment.
TLCC 1:
The change of offset in G43 and G44 modes starts to take effect from the next
block.
0:
The change of offset in G43 and G44 modes starts to take effect from the following
H and D codes.
OFSD 1:
Tool position offset (G45 to G48) uses D code.
0:
Tool position offset (G45 to G48) uses H code.
SOVS 1:
ISOT
Spindle adjustment is clamped at 100% in tapping.
0:
Spindle adjustment is not clamped at 100% even in tapping.
1:
With the storage type travel limit selection, JOG rapid feed is valid even returning
to the reference point is not performed.
0:
With the storage type travel limit selection, JOG rapid feed is valid unless returning
to the reference point is performed.
DGNE
7
SETE
6
DECI
SSPB
DGNE 1:
Enable data output in diagnosis.
0:
Disable data output in diagnosis.
SETE 1:
DECI
VCT
3
SUPM
ADLN
Input setting is possible when the lock key is closed.
0:
Input setting is not possible when the lock key is closed.
1:
Decelerate when the decelerating signal is 1 during the return to reference point.
0:
Decelerate when the decelerating signal is 0 during the return to reference point.
SSPB 1:
Spindle stops when the spindle stop input signal (SSP) is o.
0:
Spindle stops when the spindle stop input signal (SSP) is 1.
1:
It is possible to specify tool compensation vector with I, J and K.
0:
It is impossible to specify (general automatically calculate).
VCT
SUPM 1:
0:
ADLN 1:
0:
0
Start and cancel type B in tool radius compensation C.

Start and cancel type A in tool radius compensation C. (See this document for type
A/B.)
The 4th axis is used as a linear axis.
The 4th axis is used as an axis of revolution.
2
ZGM4
7
ZGGMZ
6
ZGMY
5
ZGMX
4
ZM4
ZMZ
ZMY
ZMX
ZGMX, ZGMY, ZGMZ and ZGM4 are the return-to-reference-point modes for axes X, Y and Z
and the 4th axis respectively.
72

1: magnetic switch mode
0: grid mode
ZMX, ZMY, ZMZ and ZM4 are the return-to-reference-point directions as well as the initial
directions of clearance when power on for axes X, Y and Z and the 4th axis respectively.
1:
The return-to-reference-point direction as well as the initial direction of clearance is

negative.
0:
The return-to-reference-point direction as well as the initial direction of clearance is

positive.
(Note 1) For an axis with return-to-reference-point function, the return-to-reference-point

direction is identical with the initial direction of clearance. For an axis without
return-to-reference-point function, the parameter only has the meaning of initial direction of
clearance.
(Note 2) After power on, clearance compensation is made when moving in the direction set by
this parameter.
0
PSG2
PSG1
PHS
5
PSG2, PSG The tooth to spindle ratio of spindle and position coder
Override
PSG2
0
0
1
1
X1
X2
X4
X5
PSG1
0
1
0
1
Override=
When in PHS and PSCG modes (rotary transformer and inductosyn), the initial setting of
relative offset:
1:
does not automatically set phase deviation
0:
automatically sets phase deviation. PHS automatically changes to 1 after the setting is
performed once.
DMR
7
6
6
Z
3
2
GRD
73
2
GRD
5
DMR
GRD
4
DMR
7

0
DMR
7
0
6
GRD
4
DMR
7
4
3
2
GRD
DMRX, DMRY, DMRZ, DMR4 and DMR5 are the measuring override ratio for axes X, Y, Z and
the 4th axis respectively.
Setting codes
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Overrides
Rotary transformer and inductosyn
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
3/8
3/4
1/2
1
Pulse coder
1/2
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
2
3/2
3
2
4
GRDX, GRDY, GRDZ, GRD4 and GRD5 are the capacities of the reference counters for axes X,
Y, Z and the 4th axis respectively.
Setting codes
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Capacity of a cycle
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
8000
10000
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
(Note) The codes other than those listed in the above table are treated as 8000 capacity.
0
8
3
CPF2
CPF1
Pulse frequency (holoaxial calling) for CPF2 and CPF1 clearance compensations.
Frequency, KHZ
32
64
128
256
0
CPF2
0
0
1
1
CPF1
0
1
0
1
(Must be set to 256KHZ)
TMF
9
7
TFIN
5
TMF The time from the send-out of M, S, T and B codes to that of MF, SF, SF and TFBF:
16126ms (16ms interval).
TFIN The time of FIN signal receiving width: 16265ms (16ms interval).
74
TMF
15m
sec
32m
sec
48m
sec
64m
sec
80m
sec
96m
sec
112m
sec
128m
sec
144m
sec
160m
sec
176m
sec
192m
sec
208m
sec
224m
sec
240m
sec
256m
sec
0
TFIN
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
>15m
sec
CLSI
7
CLSI
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ZTN5
ZTN4
1:
Not detect servo position circuit LSI.
0:
Detect servo position circuit LSI.
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
ZTNZ
ZTNY
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
ZTNX
ZTNX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the availability of return-to-reference-point function for axes X, Y and Z
as well as the 4th and 5th axis respectively.
1:
With return-to-reference-point function
0:
Without return-to-reference-point function
G84S
7
SFOU
6
EDMZ
5
75
EDMY
4
EDMX
EDPZ
EDPY
EDPX
0
G84S 1:
0:
SFOU

When S 12-digit output A and S analog output A are used in fixed cycles G74 and
G84, method B is valid.
When S 12-digit output A and S analog output A are used in fixed cycles G74 and
G84, method A is valid (see connection guides for method A/B) .
For 12-digit outputs A and B as well as analog output A, SF setting is not output in
the output without gear switching.
1:
Output SF.
0:
Not output SF.
EDMX, EDMY and EDMZ correspond to the negative instructions of axes X, Y and Z
respectively.
1:
Valid for rapid feed and external deceleration of cutting feed
0:
Only valid for rapid feed.
EDPC, EDPY and EDPZ correspond to the positive instructions of axes X, Y and Z respectively.
1:
Valid for rapid feed and external deceleration of cutting feed
0:
Only valid for rapid feed.
2
7
SIJ
SIJ
6
PMXY2
5
PMXY1
4
RS43
3
FXCD
2
TAPSG
1
FXCS
0
Setting of tool returning method in fixed cycle G76 or G87

1:
Set direction and amount of travel with address I and J.
0:
The amount of travel uses address Q as instruction and its direction is determined
by parameters PMXY1 and PMXY2
PMXY2, 1 Setting of tool returning direction in fixed cycle G76 or G87(only valid when SIJ =0)
PMXY2
0
0
1
1
RS43
PMXY1
0
1
0
1
Returning direction
X
X
Y
Y
1:
The offset vectors of G43 and G44 are retained after reset.
0:
The offset vectors of G43 and G44 are cleared after reset.
FXCD 1:
Dwell instruction is valid in fixed cycles G74 and G84.
0:
Dwell instruction is invalid in fixed cycles G74 and G84.
TAPSG 1:
Output tapping signal in fixed cycles G74 and G84.

(Valid only when FLX2 = 1).
0:
Not output tapping signal.
FXCS 1:
M05 is not output and spindle rotates reversely or forward in fixed cycles G74 and
G84 (Valid only when FIX2 = 1)
0:
M05 is output and spindle rotates reversely or forward in fixed cycles G74 and
G84
EXIOD
7
76
EXIOD 1:

To multiply the unit of external origin offset by 10.
0:
0
Not to multiply it by10.

4
PMC2, 1
PML2
PML1
DLME
RDAL
ADW2
ADW1
ADW0
FMT
Screw pitch error compensation override

The set compensation is output after it is multiplied by the override.
FMT
1:
Perform software parity check for part program edit area.
0:
Not perform the check.
When it is ready for the check, the parameter is automatically set to 1. It cannot be externally
switched on or off.
PML2
0
0
1
1
DLME 1:
PML1
0
1
0
1
Override
1
2
4
8
All programs stored before are automatically cleared when storing programs in
memory.
0:
Not automatically clear.
RDAL 1:
Generally all programs are stored when storing programs in memory.
0:
When storing programs in memory, storing a program or all programs is

determined by MDI operations.
ADW2, 1, 0 Select the name for the 4th axis in the even of data output or display on LCD.
ADW2
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
MSUB 1:
0:
MURS 1:
0:
MCYL 1:
0:
ADW1
0
0
1
1
0
0
MUSR
MCYL
ADW0
0
1
0
1
0
1
MSUB
Address
A
B
C
U
V
W
MPRM
7
6
5
4
Subprogram type user macro terminates.
TSE
3
Macro type user

Use user macro look-at-me function
Not use.
User macro terminates in cycle operations.
User macro does not terminate in cycle operations
(Note) The local variable for a macro terminated and called by subprogram type user macro
does not change. The local variable for a macro terminated and called by macro type user
macro differs from that is used in the current program.
MPRM 1:
TSE
That a user macro terminates and controls M codes is set by parameter.
0:
The look-at-me of a user macro is controlled by M96 and M97.
1:
The look-at-me of a user macro adopts state triggering mode.

77
0:
0

Adopt fringe triggering mode.
6
NGMP
OFFVY
OGE
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MGMP The amounts of travel of manual pulse generator are as follows.
NGMP
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
MP2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
OFFVY 1:
CKIM
MP1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
CKIM
0
Amounts of travel
0.001mm/0.0001inch
0.01mm/0.001inch
0.1mm/0.01inch
0.1mm/0.01inch
0.01mm/0.001inch
0.001mm/0.0001inch
0.1mm/0.01inch
0.1mm/0.01inch
Servo alarm is not given even when VRDY is ON before PRDY output.
0:
Servo alarm is not given when VRDY is ON before PRDY output.
1:
Ignore the switching of signal during automatic operation (the state of during
CYCLE START is valid).
0:
Immediately enable machine lock signal.
(Note) Machine lock is always active in JOG mode.

1:
Storage sorting is not performed during program search.
0:
Storage sorting is performed during program search.
CMRX
CMRY
CMRZ
CMR4
CMR5
CMRX, CMRY, CMRZ, CMR4 and CMR5 are the instruction multiplying powers for axes X, Y
and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
1
2
4
10
0.5
1
2
20
10
VLOCX
VLOCY
VLOCZ
VLOC4
VLOC5
VLOCX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the minimum values of speed instruction for axes X, Y and Z as well as
the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
78
MBUF1
MBUF2
MBUF1, MBUF2
buffer.
0
SPGST
Up to 2 settings between 00 and 97 may be set for the M codes without

SPGST
The setting between 0 and 255 for the number of revolutions of spindle motor (S12 or
S analog output A/B) during the shifting of spindle gear.
Setting=
0
SPSOR
SPSOR Number of revolutions during accurate stop of spindle (S12 or S analog output A/B)
Settings 0 to 255
Unit: rpm
PECZRX
PECZRY
PECZRZ
PECZR4
PECZR5
PECZRX to 5 are the settings of pitch error origin for axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th
axes respectively.
Settings 0 to 127
Set some points corresponding to the reference point. For example, assuming that the pitch
error origin is set to 0 and the set point 1 is located at +8.000mm, then the compensation range
of the set point 127 at 1016.000mm is 0 mm to 1016.000mm.
79
This is the occasion that pitch error compensating clearance (parameters 163 to 166) is 8000.
0
UMMCD4
UMMCD5
UMMCD6
UMMCD7
UMMCD8
UMMCD9
UMMCD10
UMMCD11
UMMCD12
UMMCD13
UMMCD4 to UMMCD13
Up to 10 M codes for calling user macros can be set (assignment of independent variable is also
possible).
Settings 01 to 97
0
MACINTON
MACINTON: The code for a user macro to terminate its active state.
Settings 03 to 97
The parameters are only valid when the parameter 025MPRM = 1.
0
MACINTOF
MACINTON: The code for a user macro to terminate its inactive state.
Settings 03 to 97
The parameters are only valid when the parameter 025MPRM = 1.
0
TMHOR (hr)
TMMIN (min)
TMSEC (sec)
TMHOR Display in hour: 0 to 255 (increment: 1 hr)

TMMIN Display in minute: 0 to 59 (increment: 1min)
80
Display during machining time

TMSEC Display in sec: 0 to 58 (increment: 2 sec)
Machining time (when the STL indicator is lit) is displayed in hour, minute or sec by setting.
Machining time is saved in nonvolatile memory even in the event of power failure.
To preset it to zero, proceed as the setting operations for switching on (also for settings).
0
IDXUNT
IDXUNT Minimum indexing angle of rotary workbench

Settings 1 to 255
Unit: deg(degree)
It is only valid when it is used in junction with the parameter 3/45(IFIX)= 1. Now P/S alarm (No.
180) will be given if the travel other than the integral multiples of IDXUNT setting is specified.
In addition, P/S alarm (No. 180) will be given if the instructed value of coordinate setting (G92),
the parameter value of automatic coordinate system setting and the parameter value of
workpiece origin offset are beyond the integral multiples set in IDXUNT.
0
FIND
The constant of change in feedrate when the pulse generator is moved for one division
by JOG under F1-digit instruction.
F=
FIDN
F max
(i=1.2)
100n
Set the n in the above formula, namely the feedrate hits Fmax i when the pulse generator is
rotated for n turns by JOG.
Settings 1 to 12
The Fmax i in the above formula is the upper limit of the feedrate of F1-digit instruction and is set
by parameter No.065, 066.
Fmax1 Upper limit of the feedrate of F1 to F4 (065)
Fmax2 Upper limit of the feedrate of F5 to F9 (066)
0
SCTTIM
SCTTIM The delay time setting of the spindle speed reaching signal detection; the setting of the
time from the start of execution of S function to the end of spindle speed reaching
signal detection.
Settings 0 to 255
Unit: msec
3
7
ADL5
HIR5
ZDL5
EX5NG
HIRS
1:
The 5th axis is a linear axis.
0:
The 5th axis is an axis of rotation
1:
Enable the look-at-me of the 5th axis handwheel.

81
AP5
1
G605
0

Disable the look-at-me of the 5th axis handwheel.
0:
EX5NG 1:
Enable the 5th axis neglecting signal.
0:
Disable the 5th axis neglecting signal.
1:
Enable the automatic coordinate system setting for the 5th axis.
0:
Disable.
1:
The approaching direction of the single-directional positioning for the 5th axis is
negative.
0:
The approaching direction is positive.
AP5
G605
4
7
SCLZ
2
SCLY
1
SCLX
0
SCLX, SCLY and SCLZ are the settings of availability of the zooming functions of axes X, Y and
Z respectively.
1:
Enable the zooming function.
0:
Disable the zooming function.
FIDMAX1
FIDMAX2
FIDMAX1 , FIDMAX2 The upper limit of the feedrate of F1-digit instruction

FIDMAX1 The upper limit of the feedrate of F1 to F4
FIDMAX2 The upper limit of the feedrate of F5 to F9
Settings 0 to 15000
0 to 6000
Unit: mm/min (output in metric system)

Unit: 0.1 inch/min(output in inch system)
See parameter No.061 for details.

0
CYCR
CYCR
The setting of return in fixed cycle G73 (high-speed depth drilling cycle)
Settings : Input 0 to 32767 in metric system, unit: 0.001mm.

Input 0 to 32767 in inch system, unit 0.0001inch.
It is also to set with specified values.
0
CYCD
CRCDL
CRCDL
The neglecting limit of the minor amount of travel while the tool is machining on the
exterior side of the turning angle near 90 during tool radius compensation.
Settings:
Input 0 to 16383 in metric system, unit: 0.001mm

Input 0 to 16383 in inch system, unit: 0.0001inch
82
When XCRCDL and YCRCDL, minor travel is neglected. In this way the influence as a
result of workpieces stop on workpiece may be prevented.
0
INPX
INPY
INPZ
INP4
INP5
INPX, INPY, INPZ, INP4 and INP5 are the positioning width settings for axes X, Y and Z as well
as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
Settings 0 to 32767 measurement units
0
STPEX
STPEY
STPEZ
STPE4
STPE5
STPEX, STPEY, STPEZ, STPE4 and STPE5 are position deviation limits for axes X, Y and Z as
well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
Setting units: 0 to 32767 measurement units
0
SERRX
SERRY
SERRZ
SERR4
SERR5
SERRX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are position deviation limits for axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th
axes respectively.
83

Settings 0 to 32767measurement units
0
GRDSX
GRDSY
GRDSZ
GRDS4
GRDS5
GRDSX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are grid drifts for axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes
respectively.
Settings 0 to 32767measurement units
The setting is a + (-) value when the reference point is the drift in the + (-) direction.
0
LPGMX
LPGMY
LPGMZ
LPGM4
LPGM5
LPGMX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the settings of servo loop gain multiplier for axes X, Y and Z as well as
Settings = 2048
E
1000
L
E = 7V (motor: 7V/1000rpm)
3.5V(motor: 7V/2000rpm)
L = Mechanical travel in mm or inch equivalent to one rotation of motor
= Measurement unit (mm or inch)
Example: Servo motor: 2mm travel each rotation, 7V/1000r/min
Measurement unit: for 1/1000mm
2048
Setting
7
1
1000 = 7168
2 1000
The digits behind the decimal point are rounded off.

0
LPGIN
LPGIN The setting of loop gain for position control

Settings 1 to 9999, unit: 0.01s-1
0
JOGF
JOGF
The JOG feedrate when the rotary switch is set to 10.
Settings 1 to 150, unit: mm/min, deg/min (output in mm)

1 to 60, unit: 0.1inch/min, 0.1deg/min(output in inch) or 1deg/min(output in inch)
(Note) For the input in inch system, the unit for additional axis is 0.1deg/min or 1deg/min is set
84

by parameter ROT10(No.306). Also see parameters ADNW(No.318) and JOGFAD(348)
0
RPDFX
RPDFY
RPDFZ
RPDF4
RPDF5
RPDFX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the quick speeds of for axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes
respectively.
Settings 30 to 15000
30 to 6000
unit: mm/min (output in metric system)

unit: 0.1inch (output in inch system)
LINTX
LINTY
LINTZ
LINT4
LINT5
LINTX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the time constant (for quick speed) of linear acceleration/deceleration
for axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
Settings 8 to 4000, unit: msec.
1
EXPTX
EXPTY
EXPTZ
EXPT4
EXPT5
EXPTZ, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for axes X, Y and
Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
Settings 8 to 4000
1
unit: m.s
FEEDT
FEEDT: The exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for cutting feed

Settings 8 to 4000, unit: m.s.
1
FEDMX
FEDMX The upper-limit rate of cutting feed, valid for all axes
(a)
For parameter No. 318 (ADNW = 0) (type A)

It is applicable for all axes and sets a tangential speed limit, which shall not be exceeded;
otherwise it is subject to clamping.
85

Settings 6 to 15000, unit: mm/min, output in deg/min metric system
6 to 6000, unit: 0.1inch/min, 0.1deg/min or 1deg/min (output in inch system)
(Note) For output in Inch, the unit for an additional axis is 0.1deg/min or 1deg/min depends on
parameter ROT10 (No.306).
(b)
For parameter No. 318 (ADNW = 1) (type B)

It is applicable for axes X, Y and Z. the speeds of all axes in linear interpolation and tangential
speeds in arc interpolation shall not be exceeded; otherwise they will be restricted.
Settings 6 to 15000
6 to 6000
unit: mm/min (output in metric system)

unit: 0.1inch/min (output in inch system)
(See parameter No. 366 for additional axes)

1
EXDEC
EXDEC
Speed of external deceleration (common for all axes)
Settings 6 to 15000, unit: mm/min (output in metric system)

6 to 6000, unit: 0.1inch/min( output in inch system)
1
FEDFL
FEDFL
The lower-limit (FL) rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed
Settings 6 to 15000, unit: mm/min or

6 to 6000
unit 0.1inch/min
The value is generally 0.

1
JGFLX
JGFLY
JGFLZ
JGFL4
JGFL5
JGFLX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are lower limit (FL) of exponential acceleration/deceleration for continuous
JOG feed for axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
Settings 6 to 15000, unit: mm/min.
6 to 6000, unit: 0.1inch/min
1
SPDFL
SPDFL
The lowest speed (F0) for quick adjustment (common for all axes)
Settings 6 to 15000, unit: mm/min, deg/min(output in metric system).

6 to 6000
unit: 0.1inch/min
0.1deg/min (output in inch system)
6 to 6000
unit: 1deg/min(output in inch system).
(Note) For output in inch system, the unit for an additional axis is 0.1deg/min or 1deg/min
depends on parameter ROT10 (306).
1
ZRNFL
ZRNFL
Low-speed feedrate (FL) for return to the reference point (common for all axes)
86

Settings 6 to 15000, unit: mm/min, deg/min (output in metric system)
6 to 6000, unit: 0.1inch/min
0.1deg/min or 1deg/min (output in inch system).
(Note) For output in inch system, the unit for an additional axis is 0.1deg/min or 1deg/min
depends on parameter ROT10 (No.306).
1 1 5
BKLX
BKLY
BKLZ
BKL4
BKL5
BKLX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are lower limit (FL) of reverse clearances for axes X, Y and Z as well as the
4th and 5th axes respectively.
Settings 0 to 255unit 0.001mm(output in metric system)
0 to 255unit 0.0001inch(output in inch system)
1
SPDLC
SPDLC
Spindle speed offset compensation, i.e. the compensation for setting the zero offset of
spindle speed instruction voltage (for S analog output A/B)
Settings 0 to 8191unit VELO.

1
TLCNEG
TLCNEG Tool life management negligence number

Settings 1 to 255
1
DRFTX
DRFTY
DRFTZ
DRFT4
DRFT5
DRFTX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the compensation of the drift occurred inside the servo ring of axes X,
Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
Settings 0 to 5000
unit: VELO
The value automatically changes after the parameter setting (007-ADFT) of automatic drift
compensation.
1
PRAZX
PRAZY
PRAZZ
PRAZ4
87

PRAZ5
PHAZX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the servo phase deviation of axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th
axes respectively. The value corresponding to the signal phase fed back from phase detector is
automatically set (for rotary transformer and inductosyn).
Settings 0 to 500
1
GRLMAX
GRLMAX The setting of maximum number of spindle revolutions for low-speed gear (S12-digit
outputs A, for S analog output A)
The setting of number of spindle revolutions when speed instruction voltage is 10V.
Settings 1 to 9999
unit: r/min
1
GRHMAX
GRHMAX The setting of maximum number of spindle revolutions for high-speed gear (S12-digit
outputs A, for S analog output A)
The setting of number of spindle revolutions when speed instruction voltage is 10V.
Settings
1
1 to 9999
unit r/min
GRHMIN
GRHMIN The setting of lower limit of spindle revolutions for high-speed gear (S12-digit outputs
A, for S analog output A)
Settings 1 to 9999
unit r/min.
(Note) It becomes a low-speed gear when a value identical with the setting is instructed.
1
SPDMIN
Settings
SPDMIN
The setting of lower limit of spindle motor output (S12-digit outputs A/B, for S analog
output A/B)
=
Settings 1 to 4095
1
SPDMAX
SPDMAX The setting of upper limit of spindle motor output (S12-digit outputs A/B, for S analog
output A/B)
Settings
Settings 1 to 4095
1
PSANGN
PSANGN Setting of the gain calling data of S analog output A/B

Setting range: 700 to 1250
Standard setting: 1000
[Adjusting procedures]
(1) Set it to standard setting 1000.
(2) Specify the maximum value of S analog quantity (10V).
88

(3) Measure the output voltage.
(4) Set PSANGN according to the following formula.
(5) Set the parameter and then instruct the maximum (10V) confirming output voltage of S
analog quantity as 10V.
1
TIME1
TIME1
Set the preset quantity of service time.

It is also possible to preset with setting.
Settings 0 to 32767
TIME2
unit: 0.1hr
TIME2
Set the preset quantity of service time.

unit: 0.1hr
LT1X1
LT1Y1
LT1Z1
LT141
LTI51
LT1X2
LT1Y2
LTIZ2
LT142
LT152
LT2X1
LT2Y1
LT2Z1
LT2X2
LT2Y2
LT2Z2
89

LT
Indicate the No. n acme in the quadrangular area.
Indicate an axis (4 for the 4th axis and 5 for the 5th ) 1
No. n travel limit
Set the above travel limit.
0 to 99999999
2
unit: 0.001mm (output in metric system)
unit: 0.0001inch(output in inch system)
151 to 157 can also be set with setting values.

1
REF2X
REF2Y
REF2Z
REF24
REF25
REF2X, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the distance from the 2nd reference points to the 1st one of axes X, Y
and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
Settings 0 to 99999999, unit: 0.001mm(output in metric system).
0 to 99999999, unit: 0.0001inch(output in inch system).
0 to 99999999, unit: 0.001(axis of rotation).
1
PECINTX
PECINTY
PECINTZ
PECINT4
PECINT5
PECINTX to 5 are the settings of pitch error compensation spacing of axes X, Y and Z as well as
Settings 8000 to 20000000, unit: 0.001mm (output in metric system).
4000 to 20000000, unit: 0.0001inch (output in inch system).
6000 Unit: 0.001(axis of rotation)
(Note) The setting to 0 does not compensate.
1
ATCLZV
ATCLZV The setting of travel limit of axis Z in negative direction

Settings 0 to 99999999, unit: 0.001mm (output in metric system).
0 to 99999999, unit: 0.0001inch (output in inch system).
1
Password
MASKA Store a password before using key lock for a program.

90

1
FIDF1
FIDF2
FIDF3
FIDF4
FIDF5
FIDF6
FIDF7
FIDF8
FIDF9
FIDF1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 are the feedrates corresponding to F1 instructions F1 to F9.

Settings 0 to 15000
unit: 0.1mm/min (output in metric system).
0 to 6000, unit: 0.01inch/min (output in inch system).

The setting with set values is also possible.
In addition: For F1 instructions, the parameter value changes when feedrate is changed with a
manual pulse generator.
3
FL4
7
FLZ
FLY
FLX
G604
G60Z
G60Y
G60X
0
G60X, Y, Z and 4 are the approaching directions of the single-directional positioning of axes X, Y
and Z and the 4th axis.
1.
Approaching direction is negative.
0.
Approaching direction is positive.
For FLX, Y, Z, 4, NC/TC, whether the axes X, Y and Z and the 4th axis are parallel to the 5th axis
(NC/TC)
1.
parallel
0.
not parallel
3
SKPF
7
SKPF 1.
0.
CHR
6
SFRV
5
NEOP
3
ROT10
TMCR
SALM
0
For skip instruction (G31), the feedrate becomes the FL speed (No.342) set by
parameter.
For skip instruction (031), feedrate is specified by F code.
91
CHR
1.

For the look-at-me function of handwheel, the feedrate is limited to quick speed.
0.
Not limited to quick speed.
SFRV 1.
0.
In G84 and G74, SRV can be used to change the polarity of analog voltage.
Cannot change
(Note) The parameter is valid only when the parameter NO.010 Bit7 TCW is 1.
NEOP 1.
0.
When storing programs in memory, M02, M30 and M99 are not used for the end of
program.
May be used for the end of program.
ROT10 1. For output in inch system, the unit of feedrate parameters(No.091, 106, 113 and 114)
is 1deg/min.
0.
The unit is 0.1deg/min.
(The parameter is valid only when the additional axis is an axis of rotation.)
TMCR 0.
1.
SALM 1.
0.
T code cannot be used for calling

T code is used for calling a user macro.
Alarm is given when the S code instructed in S4 binary 12-digit output A/analog
output A goes beyond the lower limit or upper limit of the value output to the spindle.
No give any alarm but be restrained to the lower limit or upper limit.
Refer to parameters No.135 and 136.

3
EX4NG
7
EX4NG 1.
0.
SFOB
5
SCDB
GRST
TLCD
2
Additional-axis neglecting signal 4NG is valid.

Additional-axis neglecting signal 4NG is invalid.
Whether SFOB outputs SF in S12-digit output B or S analogy output B:

1.
Not output SF.
0.
Output SF.
SCDB 1.
0.
The last 2 digits of S4-digit is output to B21 through B38 for S12-digit output B or
analogy output B. If B3-digit function is required, the digit can not be set to 1.
Not output
GRSR 1.
All executive data in all groups are cleared during the input of tool change reset
signal.
0.
Only the executive data that tool life times out are cleared during the input of tool
change reset signal.
TLCD 1.
0.
3
DIOM 1.
0.
MSFT 1.
0.
LGCM 1.
Tool length compensation is added to an instructed axis.

Tool length compensation is usually added to axis Z.
8
DIOM
MSFT
LGCM
RSTB
4
CFMF
2
It is possible to read and write DI and DO using macro variables.

Impossible.
If user macro selection is provided, SHIFT key is active when typing in through MDI.
SHIFT key is active when typing in through MDI.
The number of rotations for switching between low-speed and high-speed gears
depends on the value of parameter SPDMXL(NO365) (type A).
92
0.

The number of rotations for switching is the maximum value at low speed (type A).
Note: The parameter is valid for S12-digit output A and S analog output A.
RSTB
1.
In-reset signal is not output when the system is reset by with emergency stop,
93

external reset, reset and rewinding.
CFMF
0.
Output in-reset signal.
1.
For G84 and G74 in the fixed cycle II, output signal FMF is switched OFF by the
FIN of M05.
0.
For G84 and G74 in the fixed cycle II, output signal FMF is output until R-point
plane.
TLSK
GST2
GST1
LCTM
7
TLCK
AP4
3
1.
Input group number during tool skip.
0.
Not input group number.
APZ
APY
APX
GST1, GST2
GST2
0
0
GST1
0
1
0
1
1
1
LCTM
1.
Specify tool life in time.
0.
Specify tool life in number of cycles.
Group No.
1 to 16
1 to 32
1 to 64
1 to 128
APX, Y, Z and 4 are the settings of availability of automatic coordinate setting of axes X, Y and Z
and the 4th axis respectively.
1.
Enable automatic coordinate setting
0.
Disable.
See parameters No.375 382.

3
NFED1
RSCR1
STP21
RAD1
NFED2
RSCR2
STP22
RAD2
NFED3
RSCR3
STP23
RAD3
NFED4
RSCR4
STP24
RAD4
When NFED1, 2, 3 and 4 use I/Os 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively, whether the blank space between
the first and last guide holes and program is output or not:
1.
Not output guide space
0. Output.
RSCB1, 2, 3, 4
When RSCB 1, 2, 3 and 4 use I/Os 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively, whether the control codes (DC1 to
DC4) are used or not:
1.
Not use the control codes.
0. Use the control codes.

94

When STP21, 2, 3 and 4 use I/Os 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively, the number of stop bit(s) is set to 2
or 1:
1. 2 stop bits
0.
1 stop bit
RAD1, 2, 3 and 4 are the baud rate settings for I/Os 1, 2, 3 and 4.
(Note) If ROBOT interface selection is provided, the baud rate for the data transmission between
NC and ROBOT is set to BAD4.
Baud rate
50
100
110
150
200
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
RAD1, 2, 3, 4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
(Note) See parameters No.340 and 341.

3
IM15
7
MINT
IFIX
IRND
H4
HZ
HY
HX
IM15 1. For the instructions for axis B, its rotating direction is positive despite that G90/G91
mode must be regarded as an absolute instruction.
In addition: M15 is instructed to rotate in negative direction.
0. The instruction for axis B is an absolute/incremental instruction depending on
G90/G91 and its rotating direction is positive or negative. M15 has no special
meaning.
MINT 1. Start to execute interrupt program (user macro interrupt type II) at the end of the
execution of the current block.
0. Immediately execute the interrupt program
IFIX
(user macro interrupt type I)
1. Give P/S alarm for the instructions other than integral multiple of the indexing angle of
indexing workbench (parameter No.060 shall be also be set).
0. The instructions for axis B may instruct the instructions independent of the minimum
angle of the indexing workbench.
IRND 1. It is possible to round the absolute coordinates of axis B to 360.

0. It is impossible to round them to 360.
HX, Y, Z and 4 are the setting of interrupts of the handwheels of axes X, Y and Z as well as the
4th axis.
1.
Enable.
95

0.
Disable.
3
PRT
PRT
BLOW
BDEG
IDXB
SSCR
SSCA2
SSCA1
SSCA0
1. Leading zero outputs nothing while DPRNT instruction is used for data input.
0. Leading zero outputs blank spaces while DPRNT instruction is used for data input.
SLOW 1. The parameter setting of the clamping value for the minimum number of spindle
rotations in the constant control of surface speed is applicable for all gears. (No. 347)
0. Set for all gears respectively (No. 343, 344, 345 and 346)
BDEG 1. Input unit: 0. 001(B1=0001).
0. Input unit of axis B: 1(B1=1).
IDXB 1. Indexing sequence B of indexing workbench.
0. Indexing sequence A of indexing workbench.
SSCR 1. In the blocks of rapid feed, surface speed is calculated in accordance with the
coordinates of the end point of the current block.
0. In the blocks of rapid feed, surface speed is calculated in accordance with the actual
position of the tool.
SSCA2, SSCA1 and SSCA0 are settings for the axis as the calculation basis in the constant
control of surface speed.
SSCA2
0
0
0
0
1
SSCA1
0
0
1
1
0
CDSCG
7
CDSCG 1.
0.
SSCA0
0
1
0
1
0
ACMR DSCG5 DSCG4

6
Axis
X
Y
Z
4
5
DSCGZ
DSCGY DSCGX
1
Not perform frequency detection of DSCG feedback (rotary transformer and

inductosyn).
Perform detection
(The parameter is always preset to 0 after original adjustment.)
ACMR
1.
It is possible to make special CMR setting (disabled).
0.
It is impossible to set special CMR.
DSCGX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the position detection system type settings of axes X, Y and Z as well
as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
1.
Position detection system is a rotary transformer or inductosyn.
0.
Position detection system is a pulse coder.
(Note) Combination of pulse coder and rotary transformer or inductosyn in axes X, Y and Z is not
allowed. The mixture of the 4th and 5th axes is also not allowed.
3
UM#8
7
UM#7
6
UM#6
5
UM#5
4
UM#4
3
UM#3
2
UM#2
1
UM#1
0
UM#1 to 8 For EIA code, store and use the codes corresponding to # used in macro.
Example: UM#8 to UM#1=01001001
96

The codes with holes on passage 1, 4 and 7 are regarded as the # of EIA. The used address
codes cannot be set.
UM#8 to UM#1=00000000 indicates that # will not be used.
3
PRG9
MSC9
MPD9
MSRH
RSTL
ADNW
PRG9
7
MSC9
6
MPD9
5
NSRH RSTL
3
2
1
ADNW
0
1.
The programs of numbers 9000 to 9899 cannot be edited.
0.
The programs of numbers 9000 to 9899 can be edited.
1.
When executing the programs of numbers 9000 to 9899, single block stops while
executing a macroinstruction in user macro if it is single block mode.
0.
Not execute.
1.
The contents of program are not displayed when executing the programs of
numbers 9000 to 9899.
0.
The contents of program are displayed when executing the programs of numbers
9000 to 9899.
1.
OP signal is not output during sequence number search.
0.
OP signal is output during sequence number search.
1.
STL signal is not output when using CYCLE START to store messages in memory
in EDIT mode.
0.
STL signal is output.
1.
Feedrate is of type B.
0.
Feedrate is of type A.
[Type B]
(1)
JOG feedrate
The JOG feedrate of additional axis (axis of rotation) is set by parameter No.348. When the
additional axis is interlocked with another axis or it is a linear axis (for parameter No. 11 BIT0
ANLN=1), however, the JOG feedrate of the additional axis is identical with other axes
(parameter No. 091 JOGF).
(2)
Upper-limit rate of cutting feed

When instructing linear interpolation (G01), the value that speeds of all axes exceed parameter
setting by is clamped.
The clamped value is set for axes X, Y and Z and additional axis individually. For arc
interpolation, the value that tangential speed exceeds parameter setting by is clamped.
[Type A]
(1)
JOG feedrate
The feedrate of additional axis is set along with other axes in parameter No.091.
(2)
Upper-limit rate of cutting feed

That the tangential speeds of all axes exceed parameter value is limited by parameter.
3
PRG8
MCS8
MPD8
MCS7
4
It is also possible to set with set values.

PRG8
MCS8
1.
It is impossible to edit the programs of program numbers 8000 to 8999
0.
Possible
1.
If the programs of program numbers 8000 to 8999 are executed in SINGLE

97

mode, the execution of the macroinstruction of a user macro stops at a single
block.
MPD8
MCS7
0.
Not stop at a single block.
1.
The contents of program is not displayed when executing the programs of

program numbers 8000 to 8999.
0.
The contents of program is displayed
1.
If the programs of program numbers 0001 to 1999 are executed in SINGLE

mode, the execution of macro stops at a single block.
0.
Not stop at a single block.
UMMCD1
UMMCD2
UMMCD3
UMMCD 1, 2, 3
Up to 3 M codes for calling user macro are set.
Settings 01 to 91.
(User macro cannot be called with M00. The setting of 00 is equivalent to no setting.)
3
UMGCD0
UMGCD1
UMGCD2
UMGCD3
UMGCD4
UMGCD5
UMGCD6
UMGCD7
UMGCD8
UMGCD9
UMGCD019
Up to 10 G codes for calling user macro are set.
Settings 001 to 255.
(User macro cannot be called with G00. The setting of 00 is equivalent to no setting.)
3
AOVMDR
AOVMDR
The minimum reduction ratio of interior arc cutting rate
Range: 1 to 100%, standard setting: 1
3
AOVOR
AOVOR The minimum reduction ratio of automatic adjustment for interior turning angle section
Range: 1 to 100%, standard setting: 50
98

Set the adjusting value of inner turning angle.
3
AOVTH
AOVTR
Interior reference angle for automatic adjustment for interior turning angle.
Range: 1 to 179, standard setting: 91

3
POSTNX
POSTNY
POSTNZ
POSTN4
POSTN5
POSTN X, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the approaching amount of negative positioning of axes X, Y and Z
as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
Settings 0 to 255; unit: 0.01mm (output in mm).
0 to 255; unit: 0.001 inch (output in inch).
3
IDVICE
ODVICE
IDVICE: Select an input device (INPUT DEVICE2=1(RS232) interface for setting; this setting is
valid) for storing programs in memory.
ODVICE: Select an output device for data output.
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
I/O
Paper tape reader for input and FACIT and PUNCHER for output
ASR33/ASR43 is used to set baud rate and other data (No.310) for both
input and output.
Reader/puncher interface for I/O.
Set baud rate and other data in parameter No.311.
PSKPFL
PSKPFL FL speed of skipping cutting (common for all axes)

6 to 6000
unit: 1mm/min (output in metric system).

unit: 0.1 inch/min (output in inch system).
GRMIN1
GRMIN2
GRMIN3
GRMIN4
GRMIN1 to GRMIN4 Minimum number of spindle revolutions in surface speed constant control
(G96) mode
99

Settings 0 to 9999 Unit: RPM.
Valid only when parameter No. 3/5 - SLOW=0
3
LOWSP
LOWSP Minimum number of spindle revolutions in surface speed constant control (G96) mode
(for constant control selection)
Settings 0 to 9999
unit RPM
Valid only when parameter No. 315 - SLOW=1

3
JOGFAD
The JOG feedrate when the rotary switch is set to 10 with the existence of an additional axis
(axis of rotation) (type B).
Settings 1 to 150
unit: deg/min
See parameter No.091 (JOGF)

(Note) Refer to parameter No.318 ADNW for type B.
3
AOVLE
AOVLE
The decelerating distance Le at the end point of the automatic adjustment of interior
turning angle section
Range:
0 to 3999 unit: 0.1mm(input in metric system).

Unit 0.01 inch(input in inch system).
The parameter may be operated and set with set values.
AOVLS
AOVLS
The decelerating distance Ls at the end point of the automatic adjustment of interior
turning angle section
Range 0 to 3999; unit: 0.1mm (input in metric system).

Unit: 0.01 inch (input in inch system).
The parameter may be operated and set with set values.
3
EXOFSX
EXOFSY
EXOFSZ
3 6 0
EXOFS4
EXOF5
EXOFS X, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are external workpiece origin offset of axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th
and 5th axes.
Settings 0 to 7999 unit: 0.001mm (input in metric system).
0 to 7999
unit: 0.0001 inch(input in inch system).
Typically the parameter is automatically set by the input on the machine side.
(External data input function).
3
PGMAX1
100

PGMAX2
PGMAX3
PGMAX4
PGMAX1, 2, 3 and 4 select the maximum set numbers of rotations of gears 1, 2, 3 and 4 (For
S12-digit output B and S analog output B).
Set the number of spindle rotations at 10V speed instruction voltage.
Settings 1 to 9999rpm.
3
SPDMXL
SPDMXL Settings =

Valid only when
NO. 3085 LGCM =1
3
parameter
FEDMXAD
FEDMXAD
Upper-limit rate of the cutting feed of additional axis

Valid only when parameter No.318 (ADNW=1)
Settings 6 to 15000; unit deg/min (axis of rotation)
6 to 15000; unit: mm/min (output in metric system)
6 to 6000; unit: inch/min (output in inch system)
REF3X
REF3Y
REF3Z
REF34
REF35
REF3X, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the distances from the 3rd reference point to the 1st reference point of
axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
0
to
unit:
0.0001inch
inch system)
3
REF4X
REF4Y
REF4Z
REF44
REF45
101
99999999
(output
in

4
REF4X, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the distances from the 4th reference point to the 1st reference point of
axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
0 to 99999999
unit: 0.0001inch (output in inch system)
PPRTMX
PPRTMY
PPRTMZ
PPRTM4
PPRTM5
PPRTMX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are settings of automatic coordinate system input in metric system of
axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively. The distance from the origin of
coordinate system to the first reference point is set in metric system.
unit: 0.001mm
If Inch/metric switching option is provided, parameter No.379 to 382 and 411 shall also be set.
It is only valid for the axes that are set active in the automatic coordinate system set in parameter
No.309.
3
PPRTIX
PPRTIY
PPRTIZ
PPRTI4
PPRTI5
PPRTIX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are settings of automatic coordinate system input in inch system of axes X,
Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes respectively.
The distance from the origin of coordinate system to the first reference point is set in inch
system.
When settings 0 to 99999999 (unit 0. 0001inch) are provided with Inch/metric switching option,
parameters No. 375 to 378 and 440 shall be set. This is only valid for the axes that are set active
in the automatic coordinate system set in parameter No.309.
3
ZOFSIX
ZOFSIY
ZOFSIZ
ZOFSI4
ZOFSI5
ZOFSIX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the first workpiece origin offsets (G54) of axes X, Y and Z as well as
102

Settings 0 to 99999999 unit: 0.001mm (input in metric system)
0 to 99999999
unit: 0.0001inch (input in inch system)
The OST function key is usually selected for input.

3
ZOFS2 X
ZOFS2 Y
ZOFS2 Z
ZOFS2 4
ZOFS2 5
ZOFS2X, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the 2nd workpiece origin offsets (G55) of axes X, Y and Z as well as
0 to 99999999
unit: 0.001mm(input in metric system)

unit: 0.000inch(input in inch system)

3
ZOFS3 X
ZOFS3 Y
ZOFS3 Z
ZOFS3 4
ZOFS3 5
ZOFS3X, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the 3rd workpiece origin offsets (G56) of axes X, Y and Z as well as
unit 0. 001mm(input in metric system).
0 to 99999999
unit 0. 0001inch(input in inch system).

3
ZOFS4 X
ZOFS4 Y
ZOFS4 Z
ZOFS4 4
ZOFS4 5
ZOFS4X, Y, Z, 4 and 5 are the 4th workpiece origin offsets (G57) of axes X, Y and Z as well as
0 to 99999999
unit 0.001mm (input in metric system).

unit 0.0001inch(input in inch system).

3
ZOFS5 X
103

ZOFS5 Y
ZOFS5 Z
ZOFS5 4
ZOFS5 5
0 to 99999999


4
ZOFS6 X
ZOFS6 Y
ZOFS6 Z
ZOFS6 4
ZOFS6 5
0 to 99999999


4
SCRATE
SCRATE
Scaling rate
Settings: 0 to 99999999; unit: 0.001 time.

It is a value whose P has not been instructed in the blocks of G51.
4
LOCK/UNLOCK
Typing will not be locked when a value identical with that of No.168 is input. It is locked in the
event of input of different values.
4
1
7
6
5
4
3
The return-to-reference point mode of the 5th axis
ZGM5
ZGM5
1
ZM5
0
1. Magnetic switch mode

0. Grid mode
ZM5
1. The returning direction to reference point and the initial direction of clearance of the
5th axis are negative.
0. The returning direction to reference point and the initial direction of clearance of the
5th axis are positive.
ADW52
2
7
ADW51
ADW50
4
104
AD5B
AD5A
AD4B
AD4A

The name selection of the 5th axis when ADW52, 1 and 0 have the 5th axis.
ADW52
0
0
0
0
1
1
ADW51
0
0
1
1
0
0
ADW50
0
1
0
1
0
1
Letter
A
B
C
U
V
W
AD4A, AD4B, AD5A, AD5B

Setting of which axis the 4th and 5th axes parallel
The 5th axis
AD5B
AD5A
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
4
The 4th axis

AD4B
AD4A
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
CLCL
7
CLCL
The basic axis that parallels the 4th and 5th

axes
Axis X
Axis Y
Axis Z
Which axis it does not parallel
WNSAA
6
1. Local coordinate system is cleared after the JOG return to reference point
0. Not cleared.
WNSAA 1. External workpiece number search function is used to search the programs of a
program number whose first digits are 00 and last two digits are identical with the
search number.
0. External workpiece number search function is used to search the programs of a
program number whose last two digits are identical with the search number.
6
ROTR
7
ROTR
1. The R value of angle instruction is absolute or incremental depends on G90/G91

mode.
0. The R value of angle instruction is absolute.
RTANGL
7
(The set value may also be set).

RTANGL
The angle that the coordinate system rotates by
Settings: 0 to 360000; unit: 0. 001deg.

The value is valid when it is not specified in the blocks of G68.
1
Setting of pitch error compensation of axis X
Settings 0 to 7
Setting of pitch error compensation of axis Y
Settings 0 to 7
Setting of pitch error compensation of axis Z

105

3
Settings 0 to 7
Setting of pitch error compensation of the 4th axis
Settings 0 to 7
Setting of pitch error compensation of the 5th axis
Settings 0 to 7
106

The items set and displayed using set values.
Data No.
000
057*
058*
059*
067*
068*
141*
151*
152*
153*
155*
156*
157*
180*
319*
340*
341*
355*
356*
407*
Item
The settings related to I/O (DNC, RMT, INCH, ISO, TVON, REV4, REVY and
REVX)
Machining time (unit: hr) (TMHOR)
Machining time (unit: min) (TMMIN)
Machining time (unit: sec) (TMSEC)
The returning amount in fixed cycle G83 (high-speed depth drilling cycle) (CYCR)
The cutting origin in fixed cycle G83 (high-speed depth drilling cycle) (CYCD)
Machining time (TIME1)
Storage type travel limit 2, X value of the 1st acme
Storage type travel limit 2, Y value of the 1st acme
Storage type travel limit 2, Z value of the 1st acme
Storage type travel limit 2, X value of the 2nd acme
Storage type travel limit 2, Y value of the 2nd acme
Storage type travel limit 2, Z value of the 2nd acme
The program number of the program whose execution is stopped
All settings (PRG8 and MSBL).
Select an input device for data storage (IDVICE)
Select an output device for data output (ODVICE)
The decelerating distance at the end point of a block (automatic adjustment of
turning angle)
The decelerating distance at the starting point of a block (automatic adjustment of
turning angle)
Scaling factor
Select address SET.
The data numbers other than other listed in the table above are displayed as blank.
The data number with a * can be set with address PARAM in the same data number.
See the parameter explanations regarding the same data numbers for the contents.
107
Appendix 6
Alarms List
No.
Descriptions
000
N O power supply must be disconnected once and reconnected after parameter

setting (parameter No. 012 to 018, 027 to 034, 082 to 090 and 124 to 131, 316).
001
TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity is input in valid information area)
002
TV alarm (the number of characters in a block is odd). ON is possible only when

TV detection is set.
003
A data with impermissible number of digits is input (see the item of Maximum
instruction value)
004
Numeral, character (-) or decimal point is entered without address at the

beginning of a block (refer to the descriptions for P/S alarm in the items III, 10
and 11 when it is provided with user macro option).
005
There is not data but address or EOB code following an address.
006
Sign - is input incorrectly (- is entered behind an address that allows no

negative sign, or two or more - signs are entered.)
007
Decimal point is entered incorrectly ( is entered behind an address that allows

no negative sign, or two or more symbols are entered.)
008
Device setting is entered incorrectly.
009
A prohibited character is entered in the valid information area. (E)
010
A prohibited G code is used (the alarm is also given when an instruction similar
to the unselected G code is instructed).
011
Feedrate is not instructed or instructed improperly during cutting feed.
014
Synchronous feed is instructed when thread cutting/synchronous feed option is

not provided.
015
Permissible number of concurrently controllable axes is exceeded.
017
The move instruction of additional axis is instructed without additional control

option.
018
Concurrent motion of additional axis and other axes is instructed

additional control select function for additional axis.
021
An axis beyond plane assignments (G17, G18 and G19) is instructed in arc
instruction.
022
3R is instructed without radius R instruction option in arc instruction.
023
R is instructed as 0 or negative when radius R instruction is used in arc

instruction.
108
Remarks
without

027
For an axis, tool length compensation is applied without cancellation of the

foregoing tool length compensation.
028
An instruction of more than 2 axes is instructed for the axis in the same direction
in an arc instruction.
029
Compensation is modified when the stored offset is of more than 6 digits.
030
The compensation number instructed with the D and H codes for tool radius
compensation, tool length compensation and tool position compensation is
excessive.
031
The P value of an instructed offset number is excessive or P is not instructed in

the input of offset (using G10 or user macro input command).
032
The offset instructed by P is excessive in the input of offset (using G10 or user
macro input command).
033
Intersection point cannot be determined using the intersection-point method of

calculation for tool radius compensation C, or intersection point calculation of a
turning angle less than 90 is instructed in tool radius compensation B.
034
Compensation start or cancel is executed in G02/03 mode during tool radius

compensation.
035
Skipping cutting (G31) is instructed in tool radius compensation.
036
G45 to G48 (tool offset) are instructed in tool radius compensation.
037
Switching between compensation planes (G17, G18 and G19) is conducted in

tool radius compensation.
038
Overcutting is caused as the radius of arc is 0 at its origin and end point in tool
radius compensation.
041
Overcutting is caused in tool radius compensation.
044
G27 through G30 and ATC cycle (M06) are instructed in fixed cycle mode.
045
046
047
048
058
ATC cycle (M06) is instructed in a device without return-to-reference-point

selection function.
An instruction other than P2, P3 and P4 is instructed in the 2nd, 3rd and 4th
return-to-reference-point instructions.
G27 to G30 are instructed for an axis without reference point.
G30 is instructed without returning to reference point after switching on or
emergency stop. When a storage type travel limit option is provided, a move
instruction is executed without returning to reference point after switching on or
emergency stop.
An instruction beyond the maximum or minimum number of spindle rotations is
instructed in S4-digit binary 12-bit/analog output A.
059
The block of the selected workpiece number is not found (external workpiece
number selection A function).
060
The specified sequence number is not found during sequence number search or
restart of program.
065
A value of a scaling rate beyond 1 to 99999 is instructed.
066
After the application of scaling, traveling amount, coordinates and arc radius
exceed the maximum instruction value.
109

067
G51 (scaling ON) is instructed in tool radius compensation.
070
The capacity of memory is inadequate.
071
The address searched is not found.
072
The number of stored programs exceeds 95 or 191.
073
A stored program number is used.
074
The program number is beyond 1 to 9999.
075
Neither program number nor sequence number is entered in the first paragraph
of the program.
076
Address P is not instructed in the blocks containing M98, G65 and G66.
077
A subprogram is called for 3 times (or 5 times with a user macro option).
078
079
084
085
086
The program number (the program number instructed when G, M and T calling
are used) specified by address P, sequence number or serial number specified
by GOTO statement is not found in the blocks containing M98, M99, G65 and
G66.
A communicated program is not identical with the original one (program
comparison).
Program edit is impossible as a result of improperly instructed origin, end point or
travel end point in expanded edit function.
The number of bits or baud rate of input data is not correct during reading in with
RS232 and DNC connectors.
Transmission or I/O device is abnormal during input and output with RS232
connector.
087
A data with more than 10 characters is input after sending DC3 stop code when
RS232 and DNC connectors are used for reading in.
090
The one-revolution signal from pulse coder (basic origin signal for linear
graduation) is not input or reference point is not correctly returned to during the
return to reference point in grid mode.
091
The one-revolution signal from pulse coder (basic origin signal for linear
graduation) is not in step with basic counter and reference point is not correctly
returned to during the return to reference point in grid mode.
092
The axes instructed by G27 cannot return to reference point.
094
The restart of program cannot instruct type P (because coordinate system

setting, clearing and other operations are performed after program interrupt).
095
The restart of program cannot instruct type P (because external workpiece origin
offset is changed after program interrupt).
096
The restart of program cannot instruct type P (because workpiece origin offset is
changed after program interrupt).
097
The restart of program cannot instruct type P (because automatic operation has
been never performed after power on or emergency stop and termination of
storage limit alarm (emergency stop)).
110
098
099
100
101
Reference point is not returned to after switching on or emergency stop and

termination of storage type limit alarm (instant stop) and G28 is found in program
search using program restart instruction.
Move instruction in MDI mode is executed after the end of the search using
program restart.
The RESET button is pressed for reset by switching the parameter writing switch
from ON to OFF.
Power is disconnected when storing and editing a part program or rewriting the
memory. In the event of alarm, the memory is completely cleared by concurrently
pressing the DELETE and RESET buttons to switch on the power.
102
Power is disconnected when writing in data of tool life management.
110
The absolute value of data indicated by fixed point goes beyond the allowable
range.
111
The data displayed by floating point goes beyond the upper limit.
112
The divisor is 0.
113
A function that cannot be used for macro A is used.
114
A format other than FOMAT is incorrect.
115
A value that cannot be defined by variable is instructed.
116
The left of the assignment statement is a prohibited variable.
118
The number of layers of brackets goes beyond the upper limit (5).
119
The independent of SQRT or BCD is negative, or a numeral other than 0 to 9

serves as a digit.
122
The number of calling layers of macro goes beyond the permissible range (1-4).
123
Macro control instruction is used in DNC mode.
124
DOEND do not correspond one to one.
125
The format of (FORMUCA) is incorrect.
126
In DON, the value of N does not fall within 1N3.
127
NC instructions are mixed with macro instructions.
128
In GOTON, the value of N does not fall within 0N9999.
129
A prohibited address is used in (independent variable assignment).
130
The data of a big address is incorrect during the input of external data.
131
5 or more alarm numbers appear in the external alarm information area.
132
133
There is no corresponding alarm number in the clearance of external alarm

information.
The data of a minor address is external alarm information and external operating
information.
134
The rotary plane of coordinate system or the plane of arc or tool radius
compensation C is incorrect.
140
Tool group number goes beyond the upper limit (one of 16, 32, 64 and128).
111

141
The tool group number instructed in machining program is not set.
142
The number of tools in a group goes beyond the upper limit of storable number.
143
T code is not stored in the block for setting tool group.
144
H99 or D99 is specified when the tool in group is not used.
145
146
The T code following M06 in program execution does not match the relevant T
code in tool group in service.
There is not P and L instructions at the beginning of the program for setting tool
group.
147
The set number of tool groups goes beyond the upper limit.
148
The values of parameter No.333, 334 and 335 are beyond the setting range.
160
An executing program is edited or a program to be edited is not selected.

Sequence number is searched before edit.
170
The programs of program number 8000 to 8999 and 9000 to 9899 are edited.
However, these programs are prohibited from edit, resulting in the alarm (see
parameters No.318 for PRG9 and 319 for PRG8)
180
A value below the decimal point is specified when a decimal point is used in
B-axis instruction and a value beyond the integral multiple of the minimum
indexing angle of the indexing workbench is instructed.
181
One of the axes X, Y and Z is instructed at the same time with axis B.
190
Axis is specified incorrectly in the control of surface constant speed.
210
211
212
213
214
215
The moving part of the machine contacts the travel limit switch in + direction of
axis X.
The movable part of the machine contacts the travel limit switch in - direction of
axis X.
Tool enters the exclusion area of storage type travel limit 1 when axis X moves in
the positive direction.
the negative direction.
220
The movable part of the machine contacts the travel limit switch on the positive
side of axis Y.
221
The movable part of the machine contacts the travel limit switch on the negative
side of axis Y.
222
223
224
225
230
Tool enters the exclusion area of storage type travel limit 1 when axis Y moves in
side of axis Z.
112
Indexing
job
Indexing
function.
231
232
233
234
235
240
241
242
243
250
251
252
253

side of axis Z.
Tool enters the exclusion area of storage type travel limit 1 when axis Z moves in
side of the 4th axis.
Tool enters the exclusion area of storage type travel limit 1 when the 4th axis
moves in the positive direction.
moves in the negative direction.
moves in the positive direction.
moves in the negative direction.
400
Axes X, Y and Z are overloaded.
401
The speed ready signal (VRDY) of axes X, Y and Z are disconnected.
402
Additional axis is overloaded.
403
The speed ready signal (VRDY) of additional axis is disconnected.
404
Though the position ready signal (PRDY) is switched off, the speed ready signal
(VRDY) is not OFF. When the power is switched on again, the ready signal
(PRDY) is not ON, so the speed ready signal (VRDY) will be ON.
405
The malfunction in NC or servo system may prevent returning to reference point.
407
The position ready signal (VRDY) of the 5th axis is switched off.
410
The position offset during the stop of axis X exceeds the setting.
411
The position offset during the travel of axis X exceeds the setting.
412
Axis X drifts excessively (above 500VELO).
413
The position offset of axis X exceeds 32767 or the speed instruction value of
DA converter is beyond +8191 to -8192. The alarm is often caused by wrong
setting.
414
The detecting device of the rotary transformer and inductosyn of axis X

malfunctions.
415
A speed above that in unit/sec detected by 511875 is instructed in axis X. The

alarm is the result of incorrect CMR setting.
416
The detecting device for the pulse coder of axis X is out of order (disconnection
alarm).
113

417
The servo position LSI of axis X is incorrect.
420
Position offset exceeds the setting when axis Y stops.
421
Position offset exceeds the setting when axis Y travels.
422
Axis Y drifts excessively (over 500VELO).
423
The position offset of axis Y exceeds 32767 or the speed instruction value of
DA converter goes beyond the range of +8191 to -8192. The alarm is usually a
result of incorrect settings.
424
The detecting device of rotary transformer and inductosyn of axis Y

malfunctions.
425
A speed above that in unit/sec detected by 511875 is instructed in axis Y. The

426
The position detector for the pulse coder of axis Y is out of order.
427
The servo position LSI of axis Y is incorrect.
430
Position offset exceeds the setting when axis Z stops.
431
Position offset exceeds the setting when axis Z travels.
432
Axis Z drifts excessively (more than 500VELO).
433
434
The position offset of axis Z exceeds 32767 or the speed instruction value of DA
converter goes beyond the range of +8191 to -8192. The alarm is usually a result
of incorrect settings.
The detecting device of the rotary transformer and inductosyn of axis Z
malfunctions.
435
A speed above that in unit/sec detected by 511875 is instructed in axis Z. The

436
The detecting device for the pulse coder of axis Z is out of order (disconnection
alarm).
437
The servo position LSI of axis A is incorrect.
440
Position offset exceeds the setting when the 4th axis stops.
441
Position offset exceeds the setting when the 4th axis travels.
442
The 4th axis drifts excessively (more than 500VELO).
443
444
The position offset of the 4th axis exceeds 32767 or the speed instruction value
of DA converter goes beyond the range of +8191 to -8192. The alarm is usually a
result of incorrect settings.
The detecting device of the rotary transformer and inductosyn of the 4th axis
malfunctions.
445
A speed above that in unit/sec detected by 511875 is instructed in the 4th axis.
The alarm is the result of incorrect CMR setting.
446
The detecting device for the pulse coder of the 4th axis is out of order
(disconnection alarm).
447
The servo position LSI of the 4th axis is incorrect.
114

450
Position offset exceeds the setting when the 5th axis stops.
451
Position offset exceeds the setting when the 5th axis travels.
452
The 5th axis drifts excessively (more than 500VELO).
453
The position offset of the 5th axis Y exceeds 32767 or the speed instruction
value of DA converter goes beyond the range of +8191 to -8192. The alarm is
usually a result of incorrect settings.
454
The detecting device of the rotary transformer and inductosyn of the 5th axis
malfunctions.
455
A speed above that in unit/sec detected by 511875 is instructed in the 5th axis.
The alarm is the result of incorrect CMR setting.
456
The position detecting device for the pulse coder of the 5th axis is out of order
(disconnection alarm).
457
The servo position LSI of the 5th axis is defective.
600
Data transfer error of the connection unit.
601
Ready signal is cut off.
602
PC program is not loaded (only PC-Model A)
603
The communication between the NC and PC is improper or interrupted.
604
The MPU of PC-B cannot be held or the PCGREADY or PC-GR cannot be

switched ON.
605
System alarm is given in the MPU or PC-B or G (monitor alarm).
606
RAM/ROM parity error occurs in the MPU or PC-B or G.
607
The data transfer error of MDI/LCD.
700
The main PCB is overheated.
701
The additional PCB is overheated.
702
The DC motors of axes X, Y and Z are overheated.
703
The motor of the 4th axis is overheated.
704
The motor of the 5th axis is overheated.
900
Non-volatile memory circuit 1 malfunctions.
901
902
903
Non-volatile memory circuit 4malfunctions.
904
115

905
906
907
908
909
910
RAM parity error (lower byte)
911
RAM parity error (higher byte)
912
920
System alarm (fault of monitoring timer).
930
CPU malfunctions (Class 0, 3 and 4 interrupts).
940
Offset memory alarm (excessive offset is set): Set correct offset in the specified
offset number.
950
Clock malfunctions (the clock of main PCB malfunctions).
960
The temporary storage area for system control commands becomes inadequate
(overflow).
961
CPU alarm (execution of INT instruction)
996
Necessary option of additional RAM is added, but RAM is not really installed.
997
ROM parity error (PC ROM).
998
ROM parity error (primary ROM).
999
ROM matching error (height mismatching)
116
NO alarm
NO alarm
Appendix 7
Clearance
List of the States during Switching On, Reset and
O. A state remains unchanged or a movement is kept on.

X.
A state is cancelled or a movement is interrupted.

When switching
on
Clearing state
Reset state
Offset
Setting data
Parameter
Programs in
memory
Information in
memory
In MDI mode
Other than in MDI mode
Indication of
sequence
numbers
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
One-off G codes
Modal G codes
Initial value
G20/G21 remains
constant as before
power failure
Initial values
G20/G21 and
G22/G23 remain
unchanged.
All remain unchanged.
Zero
Zero
STMB
In MDI mode
Workpiece
coordinates
Zero
Travel
Dwell
MSTB code is
sent.
Tool length
compensation
Depending on
RS43
MDI mode ; a mode

other than MDI depends
on RS43
Items
Setting
data
Data
Coordinate
system
Executing
motions
117

(Note 1) Program number is displayed from the beginning of the program.
When
switching on
Clearing state
Reset state
Tool
radius
compensation
In MDI mode
The storage of the

called subprogram
numbers
(Note 2)
In MDI mode
(Note 2)
The indicator
goes out in the
absence of
alarm.
See the left.
See the left.
(The indicator is
lit in case of
emergency stop.)
(The indicator is lit in

case of emergency stop.)
LSK
The indicator is
lit.
The indicator is lit.
BUF
The indicator
goes out.
The indicator
goes out.
Items
Executing
motions
ALM
NOT READY
Indicators
and output
signals
MDI mode:
A mode other than MDI:
the he indicator goes out.
MDI mode:
A mode other than MDI:
the he indicator goes out.
Return to reference
point
STB codes
(emergency
stop)
M codes
MSTB
strobe
signal
Spindle
rotation
signal (S12-digit /S
analog signal)
NC ready signal
(MA, MB)
ON
ON (in the
absence of
servo alarm)
See the left.
See the left.
Servo ready signal

Signal indicator in
CYCLE START
Signal indicator in
feed hold
(emergency stop )
Note 2: When the NC is reset in the execution of a subprogram, the next block of the called subprogram
during the return of the control to the main program cannot be executed in midway due to the
subprogram. Therefore control returns to the start of the program.
118
Appendix 8
Memory Type Pitch Error Compensation
A8.1 Feature
Pitch error compensation is applicable for the minimum instruction units for all axes. The function
is valid after returning to reference point.
A8.2 Specifications
The tool position after returning to reference point is called compensation origin. The
compensations of the concerned axes are set in parameters.
i) Compensable axes: axes X, Y and Z as well as the 4th and 5th axes.
ii) Number of compensation points:
Linear axis 128 points
Rotary axis 61 points
iii) Range of compensation
0 to 7X compensation scaling rate/compensation point (minimum instruction unit)
Compensation scaling rate X1, X2, X4 and X8 (common for all axes)
iv) Compensation interval
Travel unit
Metric system
inch system
Minimum set interval

8000
4000
Maximum set interval

20000000
20000000
unit
0. 001mm
0.0001inch
(Maximum compensation range = set interval 128)

Actual compensation interval shall be set depending on the optimal value between the maximum
compensation distance and mechanical travel in the ranges as listed in the above table. When the
4th or 5th axis is used as an axis of rotation, compensation interval is set within 360000.
In this case, a value less than 110,000deg/min (31.2rpm) shall be used for the feedrate of an axis
of rotation.
When the set interval is less than the above minimal set interval, compensation is impossible for a
linear axis.
Now it is necessary to reduce the rapid feedrate.
A8.3 Parameter setting

Parameters concerning pitch error shall be set in the following parameter numbers in MDI mode
or emergency stop mode.
(1)
Pitch error compensation scaling rate

0 2 4
PML2
PML1
The scaling rate is multiplied by the set compensation for output.

PML2
0
0
1
1
PML1
0
10
0
1
Scaling rate
X1
X2
X4
X8
(Common for all axes)
(2)
Pitch error origins

0
PECZRX
119

0
PECZRY
PECZRZ
PECZR4
PECZR5
Pitch error origins PECZRX, Y, Z, 4 and 5 specify the origin values in the pitch error
compensations list.
The setting ranges of all axes are any value between 0 and 127 depending on machine type.
(3)
The setting of compensation interval

1
PECINTX
PECINTY
PECINTZ
PECINT4
PECINT6
Pitch error compensation intervals PECINT X, Y, Z, 4 and 5 specify pitch error compensation
intervals.
Except setting the positive values of 8000 or above (metric system) and 4000 or above (Inch) (for
the value that the axis of rotation is 3), the setting of 0 is not compensated.
(4)
Compensation setting
The pitch error compensation for all axes is set in the following parameters:
Axis name
Axis X
Axis Y
Axis Z
The 4th axis
The 5th axis
Parameter number
1000 to 1127
2000 to 2127
3000 to 3127
4000 to 4127
5000 to 5127
Compensation cannot be set for the parameter numbers other than listed in the above table. The
set compensation rage is 07. The setting beyond the range is invalid.
(Example)
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
In the above example, a compensation of 7 is set at the set point No.120 of axis X. The value
of the set point is added or reduced by 1 using the cursor or . The compensation values
at adjacent points are displayed.
120
A8. 4
(1)
Examples of all parameter settings
Example 1: Pitch error origin =, compensation interval =10000
The beginning of the compensation list corresponds to the reference point while compensation
point 1 corresponds to the point moving by 10000 in the positive direction from the reference point.
After that, every 1000 corresponds to a compensation point. As a result, the compensation
point128 is set at 1270000. The compensation for the travel from 0 to 10000 is set at
compensation point 1 while that from 1000 to 2000 is set at compensation point 2 and that from (n
1) (compensation interval) corresponds to n(compensation interval) is set at compensation
point n.
In the above example
Interval
Compensation data
0 to 10000
10000 to 20000
+6
20000 to 30000
When the real machine move from the reference point to the position at +30000, the total pitch
error compensation is as follows:
(+7) + (-6) + (+4) = 5
(2)
Example 2: Pitch error origin =60, compensation interval =10000
The set point 60 corresponds to the reference point. The set point 61 is located in the position of
+10000. After that, every 10000 corresponds to a compensation point. The set point 59 is located in
the position of -10000. After that, every -10000 corresponds to a compensation point and
compensation point 0 is located at -600000. That is, the compensation for the travel from (n-61)
(compensation interval) to (n-60)(compensation interval) is set at compensation point n.
In the above example, in the interval
-30000 to -20000:
A compensation of +7 is set.
-20000 to 10000:
A compensation of +7 is set.
-10000 to 0:
A compensation of -6 is set.
0 to 10000:
A compensation of -4 is set.
In the above example, the total compensation for pitch error when the machine moves from
-30000 to +10000 is:
(-7)+(-7)+(+6)+(+4)=(-4)
(3)
Example 3: Pitch error origin =127, compensation interval =10000

121
The end of the compensation list corresponds to the reference point. The set point 126 is located
in the position of -10000. After that, every -10000 corresponds to a compensation point. The
compensation for the travel from -10000 to 0 is set at compensation point 127 while that from
-20000to -10000 is set at compensation point 126. The compensation for the travel from (n-128)
(compensation interval) to (n-127)(compensation interval) is set at compensation point n.
In the above example, compensation data is as follows:
in the interval -40000 to -30000: -3
-30000 to -20000: +7
-20000 to 10000: 0
-10000 to 0: -2
The total compensation for pitch error when the real machine moves from -40000 to the reference
point is:
(+3)+(-7)+(0)+(2)=(-2)
A8. 5 Compensation setting method

The relationship between the compensation as shown in the above item and the reference point
as well as compensation origin
z
The traveling direction of the machine
Compensation interval
They are not directly related. The compensation at the compensation point n (n=0, 1, 2127) is
determined by the mechanical error (the remaining travel for a move instruction) in the interval
n-(compensation origin +1) compensation interval to (n compensation
origin)(compensation interval).
(1)
Method for inputting compensation

The input of compensation is possible by the identical means of the common parameter input.
(a) Cancellation of compensation
For an axis eliminated of compensation, all the compensations of the axis are after a
compensation of -9999 is input in any parameter number.
(b) Output of compensation
All compensations can be output in the sequence identical with that of common parameter
output. However, -9998 rather than -9999 shall be typed now. This type of output is
impossible for some specific axes.
(2)
Precautions for setting

(a) When the setting of compensation interval for the setting (parameters No.163 to 166 and 436)
is a positive value, the value will be used for compensation.
When it is a negative value, its absolute value will be used for compensation.
When it is 0, the axis will not be compensated.
(The indication is positive even a negative compensation interval is input)
(b) Pitch error compensation is valid at the end of return to reference point. If compensation is
not made after parameter setting at the end of return to reference point, parameter setting
shall be made before returning to reference point after switching on. If pitch error
122

compensation is changed after returning to reference point, the reference point shall be
returned to again.
(c) Pitch error compensation (parameters No.1000 to 5127)
The following restrictions are made for pitch error compensation:
The value of (Valid compensation of pitch error)(pitch error compensation scaling
rate)CMR must fall within 127.
If the setting of the value goes exceeds 127, correct compensation cannot be made. If it is
necessary to set a value beyond 127, divide the compensation and then make
compensation at adjacent points.
Note: CMR: Command multiplying rate
Refer to parameters No.27, 28, 29 and 30.
A8.6 Pitch error compensation for an axis of rotation
For pitch error compensation for the 4th axis as an axis of rotation, its parameters are set as
follows:
Parameter No.
42
166
Descriptions
Compensation zero
Compensation interval
Parameter setting
0
6000
That is, pitch compensation error origin =0 and compensation interval=6000 shall be used. Now a
circumference is divided into 60 parts and compensation is made for every 6 degrees.
Compensation is set as the following 61 points.
Parameter No.
4000
4001
4002
4059
4060
Parameter setting
-6 to 0 deg compensation
0 to 6 deg compensation

In special cases, parameters 4000 and 4060 may be set to the same value. The pitch error
compensation for an axis of rotation uses rapid feedrate 110000deg/min (31.2rpm) or the
following speeds.
The sign of the pitch error compensation is based on its moving direction.
Namely for positive compensation, the amount of travel is only increased by one quantity of
compensation.
For negative compensation, the amount of travel is only reduced by one quantity of compensation.
When mechanical travel has negative and positive errors opposite to the move instruction,
negative and positive compensations are set.
When the error (excessive travel) is positive (+), the compensation will be negative (-).
When the error (excessive travel) is negative (-), the compensation will be positive (+).
(Example of setting)
For travel in positive direction, +3 (-5) shall be compensated by the arrival of the compensation
point.
For travel in negative direction, -3 (+5) shall be compensated by the arrival of the compensation
point.
123
For travel in positive direction, +3 (-5) shall be compensated by the arrival of the compensation
point.
For travel in negative direction, -3 (+5) shall be compensated by the arrival of the compensation
point.
(Note) Thus it can be seen that the sign of compensation is only related to the traveling direction
during compensation instead of the position of origin.
124
Appendix 9
Item
Clear
Communication
input
Operations List
Parameter
writing ON/OF
Mode
Function key
To clear memory
Power ON
To clear parameters
To clear programs
Power ON
Power ON
To input parameters
Emergency stop
ON
PARAMETER
Function
Program
protection OFF
To store a program
EDIT mode
To add programs
To store all programs
Parameters for pitch error
compensation
EDIT mode
EDIT mode
Emergency stop
ON
To input parameters
Concurrently press the O and DELETE buttons to switch on the

power.
Concurrently press the CANCEL and DELETE buttons.
Concurrently press the RESET and DELETE buttons.
P
(
PARAMETER
MDI mode
PARAMETER
- 9999 - INPUT
O
program number INPUT
O CANCEL INPUT
O - 9999 - INPUT
P
- 9999 - INPUT
N
parameter number INPUT
P
parameter writing switch OFF RESET (Note 2)
To input an offset
Any mode
(Except EDIT)
OFFSET
To input setting data
MDI mode
SETTING
EDIT mode
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
OFFSET
P
P
- 9999 - OUTPUT
- 9999 - OUTPUT
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
- 9999 - OUTPUT
MDI input
Communication
output
Operating procedures
To output parameters
To output an offset
To output the parameters
for
pitch
error
compensation
125
offset No. INPUT
dataINPUT
offset dataINPUT
Move the cursor to the setting number to changed

dataINPUT

To output all programs
Output a program.
Search
Edit

(stored in memory)
Sequence number search
(stored in memory)
Word search (stored in
memory)
Address search (stored in
memory)
EDIT mode
EDIT mode
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
O program No (cursor
(cursor)
AUTO mode
PARAMETER
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
Input the address and data to be searched (cursor)
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
Input the address to be searched(cursor)
O
O
- 9999 - OUTPUT
program No. - OUTPUT
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
- 9999 - DELETE
To delete a programs
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
program number - DELETE
To
delete
programs
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
sequence number - DELETE
To delete a single program
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
To delete a word
To change a word
EDIT mode
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
PARAMETER
To insert a word
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
Memory sorting
EDIT mode
PARAMETER
126
CANCEL
sequence number(cursor)
To delete all programs
several
Search to the beginning of the block to be deleted EOB

DELETE
Search to the word to be deleted DELETE
Search to the word to be changed address data ALTER
Search to the word preceding the one to be inserted address
data INSERT
CANCEL SHIFT
Appendix 10
Lock of Program Key
A10.1 General
Program numbers 9000 to 9899 are locked with keys. In key lock mode, the
programs of program numbers 9000 to 9899 cannot be displayed, edited and
output. The function may be used to protect the special programs developed with
manufacturers user macros and prevents them from accidental deletion.
A10. 2 Program number

It is possible to lock the programs of program numbers 9000 to 9899 with keys.
Other programs cannot be locked with keys. Once they are locked with keys, all
the programs of program numbers 9000 to 9899 are automatically locked.
Therefore, the programs that do not need key lock shall use the numbers other
than 9000 to 9899.
A10. 3 The state after key lock

In key lock mode (see Section 4 below), the programs of program numbers 9000
to 9899 are as follows:
(1) Their information is not displayed even in execution.
(2) Program number search (alarm No.071) is impossible in EDIT mode (AUTO
mode). Therefore they cannot be edited.
(3) The memory cannot be cleaned up.
(4) The numbers are not included in the display of all program numbers.
(5) Program output is impossible (not output even when all programs are output).
(6) Program deletion is impossible (not deleted even when all programs are
deleted).
(7) Program storage is impossible (alarm No.170).
A10. 4 Key locking and unlocking procedures

(1) Preset a secret number (1 to 99999999) in parameter No.168. Do not to
forget the number since the contents of the parameter is not displayed. A
program cannot be unlocked if it is set to 0.
(Note 1) The setting of the parameter is active in unlock state.
(Note 2) The parameter is not deleted even in complete clearing state.
(Note 3) The parameter becomes 0 after complete clearance of memory, i.e.
the key is disabled.
(2) To disable the key, set the same information in parameter No.408 and 168.
The key is disabled only when it has the same value with parameter No.168.
(Note 1) The settings of the parameter are not displayed.
(Note 2) The parameter cannot be stored in non-volatile memory.
(3) Method of key lock after unlock
(a) Set a different value in parameter No.408 than in parameter No.168.
(b) Switch off the NC power and then switch on it again.
Parameter No.
127

1
Secret No.
Store the secret number to be locked.

4
Lock/unlock
The key lock is disabled by entering the same value as No.168.

The key lock is active when a different value is entered.
(Note 1) When the value of parameter No.168 is set to 0, the key lock is
disabled and is inactive even the power lock is switched OFF. Note that
parameter No.168 must be set to 0 when key lock is not necessary.
A10. 5 Cautions
(1) Proceed as follows if the set secret code is forgotten:
(a) Completely clear the memory (disable key lock).
(b) Input all parameters (except parameter No.168)
(c) Save secret programs in the memory.
(d) Set a secret code in parameter No.168 (with key lock).
(2) The PROGRAM page is displayed as follows if a program with key lock is
switched to EDIT mode. The settings of the program are hidden. The display
or edit of other programs shall be performed by reset (now continuous
operation is impossible due to reset). The initial page will be returned to once
the system is reset. To continue to execute a program, switch the mode to
AUTO or DNC mode. Machining is performed using CYCLE START.
(3) Once programs 90000 to 9899 are stored and edited, please apply key
lock for the programs other than 9000 to 9899. When programs 9000 to
9899 are displayed, the above page is displayed in EDI mode and programs
are displayed by reset.
128
Appendix 11
The Interrupt Function of User Macro
A11.1 General
During the execution of a program, it is possible to call another program by
inputting interrupt signal on the machine side. This function is called interrupt
function of user macro.
The interrupt instruction in a program is as follows:
M96, Puser macro interrupt ON
M97, Puser macro interrupt OFF
By using this function it is possible to call other programs on any executing block
of program and start program operations in ever-changing conditions.
(Example of application)
(1) Start tool abnormality detection with external signal.
(2) Stop the currently performing machining and insert other machining in the
continuous machining.
(3) The current machining information is read regularly.
Fig.1: Schematic diagram of user macro interrupt

It is also applicable for the applications of adaptive control.
After instructing M96P in program, the currently executing program is
interrupted once interrupt signal (UINT) is input.
Programs instructed by P
The interrupt signal during the execution of program and after M97 is invalid
(marked * in the figure).
A11.2 Method of instruction

A11.2.1 Significant conditions
User macro INTERRUPT is only effective during the execution of a program.
129

Namely the significant conditions are:
(1)
MEMORY, TAPE or MDI mode is selected.
(2)
STL (start indicator) is set to ON.
(3)
User macro INTERRUPT is still not being executed. User macro

INTERRUPT cannot be executed during JOG (JOG, STEP, HANDLE etc)
operation.
A11.2. 2
Instruction types
User macro interrupt function disables or enables interrupt signal (UINT) using
M96 and M97 in principle.
That is, when M96 is instructed, interrupt signal (UINT) may be used to start user
macro INTERRUPT until M97 is instructed or NC is reset. Also, INTERRUPT
(UINT) is invalid without the instruction of M96. User macro INTERRUPT cannot
be started even by inputting interrupt signal (UINT) after M979 is instructed or
reset.
(Format)
M96 P;
User macro INTERRUPT ON

Instructing a program number to be interrupted
M97
User macro INTERRUPT OFF
Interrupt signal (UINT) is valid after the input of M96.

Once M97 is instructed, interrupt signal will be invalid. The signal input after
instructing M97 is kept until the input of M96. Once M96 is instructed, user macro
INTERRUPT can be started.
A11.3 Detailed descriptions

A11.3. 1
The ENABLE/MASK of user macro INTERRUPT
Even user macro INTERRUPT is not used, it is not necessary to change the
program. For this purpose, parameter ENABLE/MASK (parameter
No.025MSUR) is provided for selecting user macro INTERRUPT.
If user macro INTERRUPT is set to MASK in the parameter, M96 and M97 will be
output to the outside as common M codes. If it is set to ENABLE, they are
processed inside the parameter without inputting to the outside.
A11.3. 2
Subprogram type interrupt and macro type interrupt

130

The modes of user macro interrupt include subprogram type interrupt and macro
type interrupt. Therefore, the parameter No.025MSUB is designed for an
interrupt mode.
z
Subprogram type interrupt

Interrupt program is called by a subprogram.
That is, the values of local variables remain unchanged before and after
interrupt. In addition, the interrupt is not counted as the number of calls.
Macro type interrupt

Interrupt program is called as a macro.
That is, the values of local variables change before and after interrupt.
In addition, the interrupt is not counted as the number of calls. The number
of calls of programs and macros executed in interrupt program are
accumulated to their numbers respectively.
Variables cannot be obtained from the executing programs even a user
macro interrupt is a macro interrupt.
A11.3.3 M codes for control of user macro interrupt

In principle, M96 and M97 are used for the control of user macro interrupt.
However, they may be used for other purposes upon manufacturers
requirements (M function and macro call). Therefore, whether these M codes are
valid or not depends on the setting of parameter No.025MPRM.
When the M codes for control of user macro interrupt are set as a parameter:
User macro is set to ON and the M codes are set in #053.
User macro is set to OFF and the M codes are set in #054.
When the parameter MPRM is 0, M96 and M97 become the M codes for control
of user macro interrupt as well as #053 and #054.
It is recommended not to use the M codes other than M96 and M97 for the
control of macro interrupt in consideration of the interchangeability of program.
A11.3.4 User macro interrupt and NC instruction

User macro interrupt is of two types: interrupting the executing NC instruction
and waiting for the end of the currently executing program. For this purpose,
parameter No.314MINT is designed for switching between interrupting in the
midway/at the end of block.
If interrupting in the midway (type I) is selected in the parameter.
(1) Once interrupt signal (UINT) is input, the executing travel or suspension is
interrupted and the interrupt program is executed.
131
(2) When there is an NC statement in the interrupt program, the interrupted

program instruction disappears and the NC instruction in the interrupt
program is executed. In case of return, the next block of the original program
is executed.
(3) If there is no NC instruction in the interrupt program, the interrupted block is
continuously executed when M99 is used to return to the original block.
If the parameter is selected, it is interrupted (type U) at the end of a block:
(1) Once interrupt signal (UINT) is input, the interrupt program instead of the
instruction of the currently executing block is interrupted.
(2) When there is an NC instruction in the interrupt program, it is executed at
the end of the executing program.
In any case, the control switches to the interrupt control program once
interrupt signal is input.
The relationship between the interrupt in the midway of program (Fig.3.4 a)
and the interrupt at the end of program (Fig.3.4 b) are as indicated in the
figure. Interrupt will be executed whichever interrupt signal is input.
A11.3. 5
Reception of user macro interrupt signal (UINT)
There are two modes of reception of user macro interrupt signal (UINT): state
triggering and edge triggering. The so-called state triggering is that it is valid in
the ON state of signal. Edge triggering is that the signal on the edge is active
when the signal is switched from OFF to ON. The use of a mode shall be
determined by parameter No.025TSE.
If this parameter is set to state triggering mode, user macro interrupt occurs
when the interrupt is active, i.e. the interrupt signal (UINT) is ON (1). Therefore,
interrupt program can be repeatedly executed when the interrupt signal (UINT) is
continuously ON.
In addition, when the parameter is set to edge triggering mode, interrupt program
is completed in an instant (only the program instructed by macro, etc) because it
is only valid during the rise of the interrupt signal (UINT). Therefore, it is only
applicable for the occasions that is not suitable for state triggering mode and only
one user macro interrupt is performed in the whole program (interrupt signal is
kept ON in this case).
132
Except special purposes, the actual effects of the two modes are the same (there
is not difference in the time from the input of signal to the interrupt of actual
execution).
State triggering performs user macro interrupt in the ON state of signal. Edge
triggering performs user macro interrupt in the rise of signal. Therefore, in the
above example state triggering performs 4 interrupts while edge triggering only
one.
A11.3.6 Return from user macro interrupt

The instruction for returning from user macro to the original program is M99. The
sequence number in the returned program is also specified with address P. In
this case, search starts from the relevant program switch and returns to the
initially appeared program number (the same as 98).
Other interrupts cannot be performed in the execution of user macro interrupt
program. M99 may be used to clear the state. The conditions individually*
instructed with M99 are executed before the end of the execution of the
foregoing programs. Therefore user program interrupt is also valid for the last
instruction of interrupt program. If it is not applicable, user program interrupt may
be controlled with M96/M97.
*: The single block of M99, which only includes address
For O, N, P, L and M, the block is considered as the same block as the previous
one of the program. Thus even a signal block does not stop. The program is:
G
X ; M99 is actually identical with
G
M99.
(They vary in whether G executes or not before M99.)
133
Fig. 3.6 Return from user macro

Overlapping is not allowed in the execution of user macro interrupt. That is, other
interrupts are automatically shielded in case of interrupt. If M99 is executed, user
macro interrupt will be active again. Here M99 is executed before the end of the
previous program as a separate block. In the above example, the interrupt in the
Gxx block of program 0 1234 is also valid. 0 1234 is executed after signal input.
In addition, 0 5678 is under the control of M96/M97. Hence the interrupt is valid
only after returning to 0 1000.
A11.3.7 User macro interrupt and modal information

User macro is different from general program calls. It is started by interrupt signal
(UINT) in program execution. As a rule, change of the modal information in an
interrupt program has a negative impact on the original program. Therefore,
modal information restores the state before interrupt when it returns to the
original program with M99 even the modal information is changed in an interrupt
program.
When M99 P is used to return to the original program from an interrupt
program, the modal information in a program is controllable. Hence the modal
information changed in the reception of interrupt program. (On the contrary,
when it is to receive the modal information in the original program, the return to
the following travel is changeable depending on the modal data during interrupt.)
Therefore, in this case:
1) Modal information is given in the interrupt program.
2)
Necessary modal information is instructed at return point. Application is

taken into account like this.
134
Fig. 3.7 User macro interrupt and modal information

Modal information shall be changed in interrupt program.
1)
During the return of M99, the reception of modal information before interrupt
is valid while the modal information changed in interrupt program is invalid.
2)
During the return with M99 and P0000, the modal information changed in
interrupt program is also valid after the return of modal information (the
same as M98).
A11.4 Parameters
0
2
MUSR
7
MUSR
5
MSUB
4
MPRM
0
TSE
1. Use macro interrupt function

0. Not use macro interrupt function
MSUB
1. Subprogram type user macro interrupt

0. Macro type user macro interrupt
MPRM 1. The M code for the control of user macro interrupt is set by
parameter.
0. User macro interrupt is under the control of M96 and M97.
Note)
User macro interrupt is a part of User macro B function. That is, user
macro interrupt cannot be used without the selection of user macro B.
The settings of parameters No.053 and 054 are valid only when
MPRM=1 (user macro B must be selected).
TSE
1. User macro interrupt is of state triggering type.

0. User macro interrupt is of edge triggering type.
Note)
State triggering state is valid in signal input state.

Edge triggering is active in the rise of signal.
135

0
MACINTON
MACINTON: The M code when user macro interrupt is active.

Settings 03 to 97
0
MACINTOF
MACINTOF: The M code when user macro interrupt is inactive.

Settings 03 to 97
Note) Parameters No. 053 and 054 are valid only when MPRM (025Bit4)=1.
7
3
6
MINT
MINT
1. The NC instruction that starts to execute interrupt program until the

end of block (user macro interrupt type II)
0. The NC instruction that starts to execute interrupt program before the
end of block (user macro interrupt type I)
Note)
Once user macro interrupt signal (UINT) type I is input, the currently
executing program is interrupted and the interrupt program is executed.
The motion after the return varies with the availability of NC instruction in
interrupt program.
i) With NC instruction
The remaining instructions (amount of travel and suspension time) disappear
in the interrupted blocks.
ii) Without NC instruction
The remaining instruction in an interrupted block continues to execute.
However, the sending auxiliary function can be correctly output in the both
cases.
z
Type II: The current block is not interrupted and the interrupt program
executed even interrupt signal is input. If the interrupt program has an NC
instruction, it starts to execute after the execution of the interrupted
program.
A11.5 Diagnosis
7
UINT 1.
0.
UINT
User macro interrupt ON.
User macro interrupt OFF.
The signal is the external signal for user macro interrupt. Intended for the
applications have requirements for high speed, the signal may be detected
through not only the signal generated by strong power, but also external signal.
Therefore, the manufacturer needs to connect the external signal to the position
of the signal as shown below. The position is not applicable for other purposes.
7
3
UINT
The diagnosis numbers to be observed are #044 and #120.
A11.6 Internal wiring diagram

136
A11.7 Example of application

A11.7.1 Procedures for starting tool fault detection using external signal
(Specifications)
Malfunction restoration is immediately executed even in cycle movement.
(Parameter setting)
TSE=0: Edge triggering mode
MUSR=1: Enable user macro interrupt function
MSUB=*: Subprogram type/macro type user macro interrupt
MPRM=*: Setting of the M code for the control of user macro interrupt
MINT=0: Interrupt program is executed before the end of block.
(Explanations)
User macro interrupt signal is ON during fault detection. It is kept on unless
special operations are performed. Only one interrupt is performed if the edge
triggering mode is selected. Whether the execution is interrupted or not is
detected with diagnosis No.#120.
Parameters are set for the selection of subprogram type, macro type and control
M code depending on programming.
A11.7.2 Inserting other job in continuous machining without interrupting

the current program
(Specifications)
A short job is inserted in the program execution with longer machining time.
General single block stops when the original program restarts. It is hard to
execute the intervention in MDI mode.
(Parameter setting)
TSE=*: Selection of a triggering mode for user macro interrupt
MSUB=0: Macro type user program interrupt
MINT=0: Interrupt program is executed after the end of block.
137

(Explanations)
Parameters are set for the triggering mode of user macro interrupt and the
selection of M code as required.
For user macro interrupt, interrupt is prohibited in the execution of block and
macro type interrupt is used to prevent the affection of the instruction segments
in machining. The modal information, mechanical position, etc in case of interrupt
in an interrupt program are restored during the return to the original program so
that any program can by executed. To fix it, instruction M96 P may be
directly used. The program is called from the interrupt program with M98 P#100 if
it is not fixed.
A11.7. 3
Reading machining information in fixed intervals
(Specifications)
To manage machining status, machining information is sent out on a regular
basis. This exerts no impact on machining sequence.
(Parameter setting)
TSE=0: Edge triggering mode
MSUB=0: Subprogram type user macro interrupt
MINT=0: Interrupt program is executed before the end of block
(Explanations)
Assuming that an interrupt program does not include any NC statement, the
interrupt program is started only once in edge triggering mode on an regular
basis depending on the ON/OFF of interrupt signal (because interrupt program is
repeated when the signal is ON in state triggering mode). Since block may
interrupt in the midway, the rise corresponding to the interrupt signal immediately
interrupts.
The external output of machining information adopts user macro DO, output
modal information and position information.
An interrupt program may execute in parallel with the original block. However,
the machining will stop for a period of time at the end of the original block and
before the end of the interrupt program.
A11.7. 4
cutting
Using the same program for general cutting and special
(Specifications)
Each executive program is provided with special travel. But the instruction is not
easy to be executed in general program.
(Parameter setting)
TSE=1: State triggering mode
MSUB=*: Subprogram type/macro type user macro interrupt
MINT=1: Interrupt program is executed after the end of block.
(Explanations)
138

The interrupt program shall be instructed as follows
O
M97
Disable interrupt
M96
Enable interrupt
M99
The interrupt signal is kept ON in state triggering mode.
Therefore, user macro interrupt is executed at the end of each block in the original
program. The special travel to be executed is instructed in an interrupt program. The
program part that needs no user macro interrupt is disabled using M97.
139
Add: No.52, 1st . Street, Luochong North Road, Luochongwei, Guangzhou, 510165, China
Website: http://www.gsk.com.cn
Tel: 86-20-81796410/81797922
E-mail: gsk@gsk.com.cn
Fax: 86-20-81993683
All specification and designs are subject to change without notice.
Aug. 2007/Edition 4
Aug. 2007/Printing 4

Gsk983m CNC System User Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Gsk983m CNC System User Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

GSK983M Milling CNC System

This manual consists of two volumes. Volume I mainly describes the

This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel as

3.5.3 Unidirectional positioning (G60) ........................................................................................................42

3.8.1.2 S 4 digits ....................................................................................................................................... 134

3.10.7.6 Calling a subprogram with an M code ................................................................................. 183

GSK983M Milling CNC System

Operation Manual (Volume I: Specifications and Programming)

1.2 Introduction to the Manual

GSK983M Milling CNC System

Operation Manual (Volume I: Specifications and Programming)

Standard: 3 axes, namely axes X, Y and Z

Standard: 3, axis 3, link,

Min. set increment

Min entered increment

The minimal increment entered in accordance with parameter

Bit detecting device

Max. instruction value

It is possible to enter numerical values including a decimal point.

Axial speed can be up to 24,000m/min or 960 inch/min. In

Feedrate can be set within the following ranges: 1 mm/min

GSK983M Milling CNC System

Operation Manual (Volume I: Specifications and Programming)

Both manual rapid traverse and automatic rapid traverse are

G codes may be used to select absolute or Incremental

When the instruction value for subsequent axes of G92 is used

All axes individually move to the end point rapidly and

Linear interpolation may be conducted at the feedrate specified

The operation of the next block can be delayed before execution

Accurate stop detection

The block of instruction G09 decelerates and performs

Accurate stop detecting

If G61 is instructed, the travel instructions following G61

The instructions of M2 with 2 digits following may be used to

In dry running mode, feedrate becomes Jog (JOG) feedrate.

GSK983M Milling CNC System

Operation Manual (Volume I: Specifications and Programming)

To skip over an optional

The block preceded by a / (slash) code may be ignored by

The switch may be used to reverse the program instructions of

Manual Absolute Value

It is possible to determine whether to add the traveling amount

To lock auxiliary function

BCD code signal and strobe signal of M, S, T and B are sent to

To lock the machine

The machine keeps still. However, position display is still valid

To cancel the instruction

The function is only equivalent to Z-axis locking. It is to be used

The function is used to fix the cutting feedrate at 100%

By pressing the Emergent stop button all feed instructions stops

External reset, reset

The function is used to reset NC from the outside of NC. The

A block instruction can be executed each time.

GSK983M Milling CNC System

Operation Manual (Volume I: Specifications and Programming)

The moving parts of the machine receives arriving signal when

When the power supply is switched on, NC gives the signal in

Servo Ready signal

When the servo system is ready, the signal is sent to the

The signal is sent out when NC is in warning state.

Cycle Operation signal

NC gives the signal in cycle operation.